Table of Contents

 
 
UNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D.C. 20549
 
Form 10-KSB
     
(Mark One)    
þ
  ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
 
    For the fiscal year ended December 31, 2004
 
or
 
o
  TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
 
    For the transition period from           to
Commission File Number 001-16391
 
TASER International, Inc.
(Name of small business issuer in its charter)
     
Delaware
  86-0741227
(State or other jurisdiction of
incorporation or organization)
  (I.R.S. Employer
Identification Number)
 
7860 E. McClain Drive, Suite 2,
Scottsdale, Arizona
  85260
(Zip Code)
(Address of principal executive offices)
   
(480) 991-0797
(Issuer’s telephone number)
Securities registered under Section 12(b) of the Exchange Act: None
Securities registered under Section 12(g) of the Act:
Common Stock, $0.00001 par value per share
      Check whether the issuer: (1) filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Exchange Act during the past 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.     Yes  þ           No  o
      Check if there is no disclosure of delinquent filers in response to Item 405 of Regulation S-B contained in this form, and no disclosure will be contained, to the best of registrant’s knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-KSB or any amendment to this Form 10-KSB.  o
      The issuer’s revenues for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2004 were $67,639,879.
      The aggregate market value of the Common Stock held by non-affiliates of the issuer, based on the last sales price of the issuer’s Common Stock on March 15, 2005 as reported by NASDAQ, was $825,543,546.
      The number of shares of Common Stock outstanding as of March 15, 2005 was 61,106,110.
DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE
      Parts of registrant’s proxy statement dated on or about April 1, 2005 prepared in connection with the annual meeting of stockholders to be held April 22, 2005 are incorporated by reference into Part III of this report.
      Transitional Small Business Disclosure Format: Yes  o           No  þ
 
 


TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.
ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 10-KSB
Year Ended December 31, 2004
TABLE OF CONTENTS
             
        Page
         
  PART I
    Description of Business     2  
    Description of Property     15  
    Legal Proceedings     15  
    Submission of Matters to a Vote of Security Holders     18  
 
  PART II
    Market for Common Equity, Related Stockholder Matters and Small Business Issuer Purchases of Equity Securities     18  
    Management’s Discussion and Analysis or Plan of Operation     19  
    Financial Statements     26  
    Changes In and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure     26  
    Controls and Procedures     26  
    Other Information     26  
 
  PART III
    Directors, Executive Officers, Promoters and Control Persons; Compliance with Section 16(a) of the Exchange Act     26  
    Executive Compensation     27  
    Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related Stockholder Matters     27  
    Certain Relationships and Related Transactions     28  
    Exhibits     28  
    Principal Accountant Fees and Services     29  
  Signatures     30  
           
  EX-3.3
  EX-10.13
  EX-10.14
  EX-10.15
  EX-10.16
  EX-14.1
  EX-23.1
  EX-31.1
  EX-31.2
  EX-32.1
  EX-32.2
  EX-99.1

1


Table of Contents

PART I
      The statements contained in this report that are not historical are “forward-looking statements” within the meaning of Section 27A of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “Securities Act”), and Section 21E of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”), including statements, without limitation, regarding our expectations, beliefs, intentions or strategies regarding the future. We intend that such forward-looking statements be subject to the safe-harbor provided by the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. Such forward-looking statements relate to, among other things: (1) expected revenue and earnings growth; (2) estimates regarding the size of target markets; (3) our ability to successfully penetrate the law enforcement market; (4) growth expectations for existing accounts; (5) our ability to expand product sales to the private security, military, airline, and private citizen self-defense markets; and (6) our target business model. These statements are qualified by important factors that could cause our actual results to differ materially from those reflected by the forward-looking statements. Such factors include but are not limited to: (1) market acceptance of our products; (2) our ability to establish and expand direct and indirect distribution channels; (3) our ability to attract and retain the endorsement of key opinion-leaders in the law enforcement community; (4) the level of product technology and price competition for our ADVANCED TASER product; (5) the degree and rate of growth of the markets in which we compete and the accompanying demand for our products; (6) risks associated with rapid technological change and new product introductions; (7) competition; (8) litigation resulting from alleged product related injuries and death; (9) media publicity concerning allegations of deaths occurring after use of the TASER device and the negative effect this publicity could have on sales; (10) TASER device tests and reports; (11) product quality; (12) implementation of manufacturing automation; (13) potential fluctuations in quarterly operating results; (14) financial and budgetary constraints of prospects and customers; (15) order delays; (16) dependence upon sole and limited source suppliers; (17) negative reports concerning TASER device uses; (18) fluctuations in component pricing; (19) government regulations and inquiries; (20) dependence upon key employees and our ability to retain employees; and (21) other factors detailed in our filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission, including, without limitation, those factors detailed in Exhibit 99.1 to this report.
      We own the following trademarks: TASER™ and AIR TASER™, TASER-Wave™, T-Wave™, AUTO TASER™, ADVANCED TASER®, Shaped Pulse Technology™, X-Rail™ and AFID™. Each other trademark, trade name or service mark appearing in this report belongs to its respective holder.
Item 1. Description of Business
Overview
      TASER International, Inc. (the “Company” or “we” or “us”) began operations in Arizona in 1993 for the purpose of developing and manufacturing non-lethal self-defense devices. From inception until the introduction in 1994 of our first product, the AIR TASER device, we were in the developmental stage and focused our efforts on product development, raising capital, hiring key employees and developing marketing materials to promote our product line.
      In 1995 and 1996, we concentrated our efforts on promoting retail sales and establishing distribution channels for the AIR TASER product line which was sold to private citizens for self defense. In fact, our marketing efforts were limited by a non-compete agreement that prohibited the marketing or sale of our products to the U.S. law enforcement and military markets. In 1998, the non-compete agreement that had precluded sales to the law enforcement and military markets expired. In anticipation of its expiration, we focused our research and development efforts on the ADVANCED TASER product line. Our change in focus from the private citizen market to the law enforcement market resulted from a market analysis that suggested it was critical to first prove the effectiveness of our technology in the professional law enforcement community. In December 1999, we introduced the ADVANCED TASER device for sale in the law enforcement market.
      The first full year of ADVANCED TASER product line sales was 2000. Although we had limited financial resources, we spent the year building the distribution channel for marketing the product line and developing a nationwide training program to introduce the product line to law enforcement agencies, primarily

2


Table of Contents

in North America. In 2001, we made significant changes to support the growing demand for the ADVANCED TASER product line. We developed a manufacturing infrastructure inclusive of direct assembly and material management to support product demand. We also completed in 2001 an initial public offering of 800,000 units, at $13.00 per unit, each unit consisting of one and one half shares of common stock and one and one half warrants to purchase one share of common stock with net proceeds to us of approximately $8.4 million. Proceeds from the offering were used to retire debt, increase inventory and working capital and fund future sales and marketing programs. During 2001, we relocated our corporate headquarters to a larger, more modern facility, expanded our sales and marketing efforts, and sold or provided ADVANCED TASER devices to more than 1,000 police agencies worldwide.
      In 2002, Company management worked with officials from United Airlines and a Washington lobbying firm to assist with safety studies and to initiate legislative changes which would allow the ADVANCED TASER device to be deployed on board commercial aircraft. On November 25, 2002, Congress approved The Homeland Security Act of 2002 allowing individual carriers to apply to the Undersecretary of Transportation for Security, on a case by case basis, to deploy our weapon system. As of January 2003, two commercial carriers, United Airlines and Mesa Airlines, had submitted these applications to the Transportation Security Administration (TSA) for approval. In November 2004, the TSA granted approval for the first commercial airline to deploy TASER devices on flights.
      In April 2002, the Company was notified that it had received a grant from the Office of Naval Research to aid the U.S. Government with the development of non-lethal weapons for the military. This grant provided us with added funding for our research and development efforts, and also validated our position as a leader in non-lethal technologies. In September 2002, our grant funding was augmented with an additional $349,000 to pursue the concepts developed in Phase I of the award, bringing the total award under this grant to $479,000. The Company received a grant for an additional $515,000 from the Office of Naval Research at the end of 2004. At the close of 2002, three years following our initial introduction of the ADVANCED TASER device, we had more than 2000 law enforcement agencies worldwide testing and deploying our M26 weapon system. This number of agencies includes 134 departments who have either purchased, or are in the process of purchasing, one unit for each patrol or line level officer. This list of 134 departments includes two major departments, the City of Phoenix, a top-ten law enforcement agency in the U.S., and the Ohio State Troopers, a leader in the highway patrol community.
      In 2003, we remained focused on expanding our manufacturing and sales infrastructure to support the growing demand for our product. We continued developing new product capabilities, and we added new resources to expand our technology base. In May 2003, we introduced the TASER X26 device at our annual tactical conference. This product incorporated the strengths of its predecessor, the ADVANCED TASER device but also introduced to the market a new “shaped pulse” technology, and a new smaller form factor. The product design was completed, comprehensive medical safety testing was conducted, and the first weapons began shipping in September 2003.
      On June 26, 2003, we purchased the assets of Electronic Medical Laboratory Inc., doing business as Taser Technologies Inc., formerly Tasertron, a competitor in the manufacture and sale of Taser conducted energy weapons to law enforcement at the time. This purchase provided us with clear title to the “TASER” Trademark and a number of patents, eliminated litigation and market confusion, and enabled us to enter into a teaming relationship with General Dynamics.
      The protection of our intellectual property was also a priority for our engineering and legal team during 2003. After acquiring the assets of Tasertron, the next step in our strategy to build strong barriers to entry for new competitors was to strengthen our patent protection on both existing technologies, and those in varying stages of development. On October 21, 2003, we were granted a fundamental patent on our ADVANCED TASER waveform. This patent protects us against competing product development using electrical impulses ranging from half the energy of the M26 to five times the energy of the M26, or the range of electrical output capable of immobilizing a human without affecting critical organs. In addition, we purchased eight additional patents allowing us to expand our current product capabilities into new areas of weapon systems, including

3


Table of Contents

area denial systems, or TASER “landmine” type devices known as TASER Anti-Personnel Munition (TAPM).
      In 2003, we shipped our products to key United States Military command posts, and worked with several key international police and military forces to conduct safety and reliability testing for future deployment. These test programs included the United Kingdom, Australia and Canada. We also received Congressional approval for $1.0 million of appropriations to be used to purchase TASER brand weapons for the United States Military. And, we had our first major sale to a foreign military agency in alliance with the U.S. in the war against terror.
      In 2004, the Company continued to expand, growing its revenue internally by 177% compared to 2003. In 2004, the Company also announced its new TASER X26 C Citizen Defense System, targeted to the private citizen self-defense market, and began shipments of this product late in the third quarter. The Company booked the largest order in its history when it sold $3.7 million of TASER products to the city of Houston, TX. The Company also booked significant sales to the United States Military and the National Guard. In addition, the Company completed the development of the X-rail system to attach a TASER X26 to the stock of an M-16 assault rifle using the Picatinny rail system as well as the launch of an extended range cartridge that improved the maximum range of TASER devices to 25 feet.
      The Company also achieved several important legislative and safety approvals for its products. In July 2004, the State of Massachusetts passed legislation allowing TASER devices to be used by police (prior legislation precluding the use of TASER devices was overturned). The Transportation Security Administration approved the use of TASER devices on commercial aircraft in November 2004. The United States Department of Defense Human Effects Center of Excellence (HECOE) concluded an extensive review of TASER devices concluding that, while additional studies would be helpful, TASER devices are generally safe and effective, and that data indicated TASER devices reduce injuries to police officers and suspects when compared to alternatives along the force continuum. Several international governments also approved the use of TASER devices, including the United Kingdom, Finland, Sweden, and South Korea. Finally, the Company established the TASER Foundation for the families of fallen law enforcement officers in the fourth quarter of 2004. The TASER Foundation was funded with initial commitments for over $700,000 from TASER International, Inc. employees. The TASER Foundation is a structured means for TASER International to give back to the community in a very targeted fashion to support the law enforcement community which has helped us to build our company.
Products
      Our devices use compressed nitrogen to shoot two small, electrified probes up to a maximum distance of 25 feet. The probes and compressed nitrogen are stored in a replaceable cartridge attached to the base of the device. Our proprietary replacement cartridges are sold separately.
      After firing, the probes discharged from our cartridges remain connected to the device by high-voltage insulated wires that transmit electrical pulses into the target. These electrical pulses are transmitted through the body’s nerves in a manner similar to the transmission of signals used by the nervous system to communicate within the body. The pulses temporarily overwhelm the normal electrical signals within the body’s nerve fibers, impairing subjects’ ability to control their bodies or perform coordinated actions. The TASER device’s electrical output can penetrate up to two inches of clothing. The initial effect lasts up to ten seconds and the charge can be repeated for up to approximately ten minutes by repeatedly firing the device, if required.
      Since all our devices use the same cartridges, we can support multiple platforms and still achieve economies of scale in cartridge production. Our cartridges contain numerous colored, confetti-like tags bearing the cartridge’s serial number. These tags, referred to as Anti-Felon Identification tags, or AFIDs, are scattered when one of our devices is fired. We require sellers of our products to participate in the AFID program by registering buyers of our cartridges. In many cases, we can use AFIDs to identify the registered owner of cartridges fired.

4


Table of Contents

      We introduced our initial product, the AIR TASER, in 1994. We designed the AIR TASER to look like a cellular telephone rather than a gun to target the consumer electronics market. During its life cycle, the AIR TASER product line consisted of the AIR TASER, a cartridge that shoots two small, electrified probes up to 15 feet, an optical laser sight, and a number of holstering accessories. However, in 2003, we discontinued the manufacture of this model after building all available units from raw material inventory, and are continuing to sell off available units into the private citizen market.
      We developed the ADVANCED TASER product line, launched in December 1999, primarily for the law enforcement and corrections market. The ADVANCED TASER device is one of our primary products. We sell the M26 version of this device exclusively to law enforcement, military, corrections agencies and to the commercial airline industry. Currently, the ADVANCED TASER product line consists of the ADVANCED TASER device (there are three versions: the M26, the M18 and the M18-L), various cartridges that shoot two small, electrified probes up to 25 feet, rechargeable batteries, a battery recharging system, data download package, extended warranty packages, and a number of holstering accessories.
      In addition to the law enforcement line of ADVANCED TASER products, we also developed a slightly less powerful private citizen version of the ADVANCED TASER device for the private citizen self defense market. This line includes the ADVANCED TASER M18L, with integrated laser sight, the ADVANCED TASER M18 without an integrated laser sight, a cartridge that shoots two small, electrified probes up to 15 feet, and a number of holstering accessories.
      In 2003, we introduced the TASER X26, with Shaped Pulse Technology. This device uses a highly refined energy pulse that concentrates a small portion of energy to first penetrate the clothing barrier, while the majority of electrical charge is held in reserve, flowing freely through the barrier once the leading edge has been penetrated. The TASER X26 product line consists of the TASER X26 (there are two versions: the law enforcement X26 and the private citizen X26 C ), various cartridges that shoot two small, electrified probes up to 25 feet, a digital power magazine, data download package, extended warranty packages, and holstering accessories.
      Our products are sold primarily through our network of distributors at a wide range of prices and directly to law enforcement agencies across the United States. Our most inexpensive private citizen product is the entry-level ADVANCED TASER M18 product with a retail price of $299.95. Our high-end private citizen model, the X26 C , was introduced during the third quarter of 2004 and is sold in a kit which retails for $995.95. The kit includes the X26 C device, six cartridges, a holster and a coupon which can be redeemed for a one hour one-on-one training session with a certified instructor in the citizen’s home. The ADVANCED TASER device was our best selling item in 2003. In 2004, the Company’s X26 product was its best selling product. Law enforcement distributors sell the ADVANCED TASER M26 to police and corrections agencies for $399. The TASER X26 was introduced to law enforcement in 2003, and is sold to police and corrections agencies for $799. Retail cartridge prices range from $16 for law enforcement to $30 per unit for private citizen purchases.
      The Company also introduced its X-Rail system in 2004, which allows the X26 conducted energy device to be attached to military and law enforcement rifles via a Picatinny rail giving the user lethal and non-lethal options on the same weapon. In 2004, the Company also had successful field trials of its TASER Anti-Personnel Munition (TAPM) area denial device which is being developed with General Dynamics.
      We offer a lifetime warranty on the AIR TASER. Under this warranty, we will replace any AIR TASER that fails to operate properly for a $25 fee. The AIR TASER is designed to disable an attacker for up to 30 seconds, and we encourage private citizens to leave the unit and flee after firing it. As a result, we also provide free replacement units to private citizens who follow this suggested procedure. To qualify for the replacement unit, users must file a police report that describes the incident and confirms the use of the AIR TASER. Warranty costs under the AIR TASER replacement policy have been minimal to date. Historically, approximately 2% of the AIR TASERs sold by us were returned by end users in connection with a warranty claim.
      We offer a one year no-questions-asked replacement policy on the ADVANCED TASER devices and TASER X26 devices. After the warranty expires, if the device fails to operate properly for any reason, we will

5


Table of Contents

replace the ADVANCED TASER device for a fee of $75, and the TASER X26 on a time and materials basis. These fees are intended to help defray the handling and repair costs associated with product returns. This policy is attractive to our law enforcement and corrections agency customers. In particular, it avoids disputes regarding the source or cause of any defect.
      It is our policy to maintain a warranty reserve equivalent to estimated future warranty claims for products sold. We have also historically increased our reserve amount if we become aware of a component failure that could result in larger than anticipated returns from our customers. Warranty costs under the ADVANCED TASER device and TASER X26 device replacement policy totaled $361,000 in 2004 and $302,000 in 2003. And as of December 31, 2004, our reserve for warranty returns was $458,000 compared to the $313,000 reserved in 2003.
Markets
Law Enforcement and Corrections
      Federal, state and local law enforcement agencies in the United States currently represent the primary target market for our ADVANCED TASER device and TASER X26 products. In the law enforcement market, over 7,000 law enforcement agencies have made initial purchases of our TASER brand devices for testing or deployment. These agencies include the Unites States Secret Service, Los Angeles Police Department, Los Angeles County Sheriff’s Department, New York Police Department, Chicago Police Department, Las Vegas Metropolitan Police Department, Seattle Police Department, the Royal Canadian Mounted Police, Miami Police Department, Denver Police Department, Houston (TX) Police Department, Fort Worth (TX) Police Department, Orange County (FL) Sheriff’s Department, Chandler (AZ) Police Department, Philadelphia Police Department, and Minneapolis Police Department. In addition, 1,468 police departments, including Phoenix (AZ) Police Department, Ohio State Troopers, Cincinnati, San Diego, Reno, Houston (TX), Sacramento, Albuquerque, Citrus County (FL) Sheriff’s Office and Clay County (FL) Sheriff’s Office have purchased or are in the process of purchasing one TASER device to issue to each of their on duty patrol officers.
      We believe our TASER products could prove equally suitable for use in correctional facilities and we have begun to see TASER devices deployed in correctional facilities such as those operated by the Los Angeles Custody Division and the State of Wisconsin.
Military Forces, both United States and Foreign Allies
      Military police forces in the United States and overseas represent another key market for TASER devices. During 2004, we saw our non-lethal weapon systems deployed to key strategic locations for our United States Military and allies abroad. In several cases, they were used to reduce civilian and prisoner casualties resulting from combat operations in populated regions, and for prison control. In addition, new TASER prototype devices were tested by strategic military personnel for performance and field suitability. In total, we have shipped military users approximately 5,400 TASER devices to date. These shipments include one large order to a foreign military of 3,348 ADVANCED TASER M26’s. In 2004, the Company had its single largest order from the United States Military for $1.8 million which included TASER devices and cartridges. In addition, the Company had a $440,000 order for X26 conducted energy devices and cartridges which shipped to the United States National Guard during 2004. The Company also introduced its X-Rail system in 2004, which allows the X26 conducted energy device to be attached to assault rifles via a Picatinny rail giving the user lethal and non-lethal options on the same device.
      On September 30, 2003, President Bush signed into law the 2004 Fiscal Year Defense Appropriations Bill providing $1.0 million toward the purchase of TASER non-lethal conducted energy devices by the Department of Defense. As of December 31, 2004, all funds under this budget line item have been spent.
      In April 2002, we were awarded the first phase of a four-phase cost-plus-profit grant from the Office of Naval Research. The grant was to fund the development of non-lethal weapon systems for the United States Military, and provided approximately $130,000 of capital for our research and development efforts. In

6


Table of Contents

September 2002, our funding was increased by an additional grant of $349,000, which provided total funding of $479,000. As of December 31, 2003, we completed and recognized revenue equal to 95% of this project, or $456,000. Due to our success in the first and second phase of this research, the Company was awarded a $515,000 grant for phases three and four of the project in late 2004.
      In addition to our work with the Office of Naval Research, we have also begun working with General Dynamics on the development of area denial systems, utilizing TASER core technologies, for the United States Military. The TAPM (TASER Anti-Personnel Munition) was successfully trialed for the United States Military at the Picatinny Arsenal during 2004, and the Company is now working with General Dynamics on producing prototypes for the military to test.
Commercial Airlines
      The commercial airlines became a new market for us in 2001. Following the events of September 11, 2001, the commercial airline industry implemented added security measures to protect its passengers and crew. These measures, some voluntary and some mandated by the federal government, included reinforcement of cockpit doors, increased airport security, and the testing of effective devices for storage and use on airlines.
      Initially, the Company’s management believed approval of non-lethal devices for airline use would occur in 2002. However, because of an overwhelming array of security issues and programs demanding TSA approval, this item was delayed. Two commercial carriers, United Airlines and Mesa Airlines supported the use of our TASER device for on-board security. And both, in accordance with the Homeland Security Act of 2002, applied to the TSA for formal approval to deploy the ADVANCED TASER M26 device platform. TSA completed in May 2003 a Congressional mandated study on non-lethal weapons. The study affirmed that the ADVANCED TASER M26 would be an appropriate weapon for on board aircraft use and the TSA formally approved a major airline’s application to carry the device on its flights in November 2004.
      In addition, the Vision 100 — Century of Aviation Reauthorization Act which was signed into law on December 12, 2003 (Public Law 108-176), contained a sense of Congress that “members of flight deck crew of cargo aircraft should be armed with a firearm or TASER device to defend the cargo aircraft against an attack by terrorists that could result in the use of the aircraft as a weapon of mass destruction or other terrorist purposes.” As of December 2004, management was not aware of any cargo carriers that are pursuing the deployment of either the ADVANCED TASER M26 or TASER X26 device aboard cargo aircraft.
Private Security Firms and Guard Services
      We are still in the early stage of pursuing additional opportunities for sales of the TASER devices in private security markets, and have made only limited sales to date. However, a report of the Security Industry Association for 1999-2000 estimated that there were over 1.7 million privately employed security guards or personnel in the United States. They represent a broad range of individuals, including bodyguards, commercial and government building security guards, commercial money carrier employees and many others, and represent a large potential market.
Private Citizen/Personal Protection
      Prior to the introduction of the ADVANCED TASER device in late 1999, the majority of our annual revenue was derived from private citizen sales. However, since the introduction of the ADVANCED TASER device in 2000, our annual revenue from private citizen sales has dropped to a range of $1.0 to $1.7 million per year. The Company introduced a private citizen version of the X26 device (X26 C ) during the third quarter of 2004 and agreed to a distribution agreement with one of its distributors to distribute the X26 C to federal firearms licensed dealers (FFL) for public sale in December 2004. During 2004, private citizen sales increased due to the introduction of the X26 C to approximately $1.7 million. We believe private citizen sales could become a more meaningful portion of our revenues going forward depending on the success of the X26 C product and legislation relating to the purchase of our products by private citizens in each state.

7


Table of Contents

Sales and Marketing
      Law enforcement, military and corrections agencies represent our primary target markets. In each of these markets, the decision to purchase TASER devices is normally made by a group of people including the agency head, his training staff, and weapons experts. Depending on the size and cost of the device deployment, the decision may involve political decision-makers such as city council members and the federal government. The decision-making process can take as little as a few weeks or as long as several years. Although the Company has focused on three primary markets, we have been able to expand our customer base to thousands of end users within these markets. In 2004, we shipped a total of 16,612 orders at an average sale price of $4,072 per shipment. This compares to 9,580 orders shipped in 2003, at an average sales price of $2,553 per order.
      Since the introduction of the ADVANCED TASER device in 1999, the Company has used several types of media to communicate the costs and benefits of deploying its device systems. These campaigns have included the development of CD/DVD packages geared toward law enforcement leaders in the community, advertisements in law enforcement publications, and the use of more than 1,000 training classes conducted around the world. The Company also targets key regional and national law enforcement trade shows where it can demonstrate the TASER devices to leading departments. The Company also held its fifth annual U.S. tactical conference for the trained master instructors, and law enforcement training officers, and conducted its third European tactical conference to reach customers in more than 30 countries, including the United Kingdom, Germany, Spain, Austria, Switzerland, Czech Republic, and Finland, who have either expressed an interest in, or who are already in the process of testing or deploying TASER devices. The focus of these conferences in 2004 and 2003 was to introduce and train the officers in the use of the TASER X26, and to introduce the new XP Cartridge for law enforcement use.
      The Company plans to continue investment in the area of law enforcement trade shows and conferences in 2005, as it has provided the ability to market its products to a target audience. We believe these types of activities accelerate penetration of our TASER product lines in each market, which should lead to increased visibility in both the private security and private citizen markets and reinforce the value of non-lethal devices for self-defense. We have developed a private citizen version of our ADVANCED TASER device for individual use. These models, the M18L and M18, offer the private citizen the same features sold to law enforcement, but with a shorter wire length for cartridge deployment and a slightly reduced power setting. We introduced the private citizen version of our TASER X26 system during the third quarter of 2004.
United States Distribution
      With the exception of several accounts to which we sell directly, the vast majority of our law enforcement agency sales in the Unites States occur through our network of 28 law enforcement distributors. In addition, we added one military and government contracting distributor in 2003. These distributors were selected based upon their reputation within their respective industries, their credit worthiness, and their distribution network. We maintain tight controls over our law enforcement distributors to help ensure that our service standards are achieved. We also reserve the right to take any large agency order directly to secure our credit interest.
      Sales in the private citizen market are made through web sales and through 25 commercial distributors. In December 2004, the Company entered into an distribution agreement with one of its existing law enforcement distributors to distribute the X26 C to federal firearms licensed dealers (FFL) for public sale.
      Due to the confidential nature of the relationships established with the major U.S. airlines, we intend to transact directly all future sales of our products to the commercial airline industry. These direct sales will enable us to assist the airlines in the development of training and tactical applications, and to provide on-site equipment maintenance services as they are required.
International Distribution
      We concentrated our marketing resources on penetrating the United States law enforcement and corrections market since the development of the ADVANCED TASER device in late 1999. Our international

8


Table of Contents

sales efforts prior to 2004 were limited to select presentations and training seminars conducted by TASER personnel. These presentations included the introduction of TASER devices in Europe and parts of the Middle East, South America and Asia. Our focus in 2004 was on the countries which were furthest along in the process. These countries included the United Kingdom, France, Australia, and South Korea. The United Kingdom completed a three year study of TASER brand conducted energy devices during 2004. Their study ended in September with the Home Office Secretary, David Blunkett, approving their use by all firearms officers. Total UK sales accounted for 46 percent of our total international sales in fiscal 2004. With the approval coming late in the year, we expect total UK sales to increase in 2005. Similarly, Australia completed pilot programs in seven of its states and wrote favorable reports on TASER brand products. France initiated its testing early in the year and had many widely publicized uses. These uses resulted in favorable feedback from law enforcement unions, officers, and government officials. The results of their pilot program are expected to become available sometime in 2005. French sales accounted for approximately 4.5 percent of our total international sales in 2004. We plan to continue to focus our efforts in territories that are moving in the direction of non-lethal weaponry. During 2005, we plan to bolster our international presence by expanding our focus to a larger number of countries. We also plan to establish more of a global presence by attending many large international tradeshows. In December 2004, we also appointed a Vice President of International Sales who we expect to focus his energies in growing the export markets for our products.
      We continue to work through a network of international distributors that work in a specific territory. Our international distributors buy our products and resell them to dealers and end users. These distributors generally work under short term exclusive agreements. Our 53 distributors get direct support from us with customer service, tradeshows, and training classes. We shipped products to approximately 43 countries during fiscal 2004. Sales volume ranged from $400 to just under $1 million. Our sales outside the U.S. accounted for approximately 4% of our sales in 2004 and 12% of our total sales in 2003. The lower percentage of international sales in 2004 is attributable primarily to the growth in the United States market in 2004.
Training Programs
      Most law enforcement, military and corrections agencies will not purchase new weapons until a training program is in place to certify all officers in their proper use. We offer a sixteen-hour class that certifies law enforcement and corrections agency trainers as instructors in the use of the TASER devices. As of December 31, 2004, approximately 18,922 law enforcement officers around the world have been trained and certified as instructors in the proper use of TASER brand devices. This includes approximately 18,102 officers in the United States and 822 in other countries.
      Currently, 347 of our certified instructors have undergone further training and became certified as master instructors. We authorize these individuals to train other law enforcement and corrections agency trainers, not just end-users within these organizations. Military personnel are trained by our Chief Master Instructor. Approximately 150 of our master instructors have agreed to conduct TASER device training classes on a regular basis. These instructors can independently organize and promote their own training sessions or teach at training classes arranged by the Company. The Company provides logistical support for the training classes in both instances. The master instructors are independent professional trainers, serve as local area TASER experts, and assist in conducting TASER demonstrations at other police departments within regions. On January 1, 2001, we implemented a $195 charge for each training attendee. We pay master instructors a per-session training fee for each session they conduct. We conducted over 350 training courses in 2004 and, as of December 31, 2004, we have conducted a cumulative 1,006 training courses during which we have trained more than 17,700 individuals in the use of TASER products. The Company has also designed a training course for private citizen customers. Customers who purchase an X26 C device receive a certificate good for a one hour, one-on-one training session with a X26 C certified instructor. The Company has over 400 instructors certified to give the X26 C training.
      During 2002, we created a Training Board, consisting of Hans Marrero, our Chief Master Instructor, four active duty police officers, and one retired law enforcement trainer to coordinate the growing demands of our training program. In 2003 the Board was expanded to include a representative from the commercial airline industry, and one additional active duty police officer. This board annually reviews the qualifications of the

9


Table of Contents

master instructors, and provides retraining or certification as required. In addition, the Training Board oversees the trainers and curriculum to ensure new tactics and policies are properly communicated and implemented, and gives input into new product development. The Company created the new position of Director of Training during 2004 and this person also serves on the Training Board. In order to gain new perspectives on the training, the Company added five new members to its training board in late 2004. The new members replaced four training board members who rotated off the training board.
Manufacturing
      We conduct manufacturing and final assembly operations at our headquarters in Scottsdale Arizona and we own all of the equipment required to manufacture and assemble our finished products, as well as all molds, schematics, and prototypes utilized by our vendors in the production of required raw materials and sub-assemblies. With our current work force, on two shifts, we are able to produce approximately 80,000 cartridges per month, and more than 7,500 TASER devices. We can expand our production capabilities by adding additional personnel with negligible new investment in tooling and equipment.
      In 2004, we implemented our first automated production line to increase the throughput of the cartridge assemblies. During 2005 and 2006, we intend to automate more functions in our production process by including other processes in the cartridge and high-voltage assembly lines.
      We currently purchase finished circuit boards and injection-molded plastic components from suppliers located in the Phoenix area. Although we currently obtain these components from single source suppliers, we own the injection molded component tooling used in their production. As a result, we believe we could obtain alternative suppliers without incurring significant production delays. We also purchase small, machined parts from a vendor overseas, custom cartridge assemblies from a proprietary vendor in Arizona, and electronic components from a variety of foreign and domestic distributors. We believe there are readily available alternative suppliers in most cases who can consistently meet our needs for these components. We acquire most of our components on a purchase order basis and do not have long-term contracts with suppliers. We believe that our relations with our suppliers are good.
Competition
Law Enforcement and Corrections Market
      The primary competitive factors in the law enforcement and corrections market include a weapon’s cost, effectiveness, and ease of use. During 2004, two new competitors announced that they planned to introduce products that directly compete with the products manufactured and sold by the Company. The two companies are expected to launch their products during the first quarter of 2005. The Company believes that its strong relationship with customers, its large installed base of products, and the significant amount of medical and safety testing done on its product will provide the Company with a competitive advantage over the new competitors.
      We also believe the ADVANCED TASER device and TASER X26 device also compete indirectly with a variety of other non-lethal alternatives. These alternatives include, but are not limited to pepper spray and impact weapons sold by companies such as Armor Holdings, Inc., and Jaycor, Inc. We believe our TASER brand device’s advanced technology; versatility, effectiveness, and low injury rate enable it to compete effectively against other non-lethal alternatives.
      On June 26, 2003, we purchased the assets of Electronic Medical Research Laboratories, Inc., doing business as Taser Technologies, Inc., formerly Tasertron. Prior to our purchase, Taser Technologies was the sole remaining manufacturer of the original Taser device introduced in the 1970’s. It is our opinion that as of the date of acquisition, fewer than 200 police departments deployed Taser Technologies weapons, with fewer than 5,000 total weapons in the field. As of December 31, 2004, more than 7,000 departments had purchased in the aggregate more than 130,000 of the Company’s TASER brand devices. Some of these agencies previously deployed Taser Technologies weapons.

10


Table of Contents

Military Market
      In the military markets, both the United States and abroad, a wide variety of weapon systems are utilized to accomplish the mission at hand. Conducted energy devices have gained increased acceptance during the last two years as a result of the increased policing roll of military personnel in the conflicts in both Iraq and Afghanistan. There has also been an increased awareness of the use of non-lethal weapons to preserve human intelligence. TASER devices give our armed forces one means to capture or immobilize targets without using lethal force. The Company is the only supplier providing conducted energy weapons to these agencies. There is indirect competition from pepper spray and impact weapons sold by companies such as Armor Holdings, Inc., and Jaycor, Inc.
Private Citizen Market
      Conducted energy weapons have gained limited acceptance in the private citizen market for non-lethal weapons. These weapons compete with other non-lethal weapons such as stun guns, batons and clubs, and chemical sprays. The primary competitive factors in the private citizen market include a weapon’s cost, effectiveness, and ease of use. The widespread adoption of the Company’s TASER devices by prominent law enforcement agencies may help us overcome the historical perception of a lack of private citizen confidence in conducted energy weapons.
      In the private citizen market, the AIR TASER formerly competed with a conducted energy weapon introduced by Bestex, Inc. in 1996, called the Dual Defense, and indirectly competed with other non-lethal alternatives. In July 2002, the Company purchased U.S. Patent No. 5,078,117 from Mr. John Cover. This patent covers the propulsion system of our air cartridge. Prior to our purchase, Mr. Cover had granted licenses to both Bestex and TASER International. However, at the time we purchased the patent, Bestex had not renewed its license, and subsequently lost its right to continue utilizing the patented technology. Therefore, we believe our products will only compete with remaining inventories of the Bestex Dual Defense product produced prior to July 2002, as the continued manufacture by Bestex of the existing Dual Defense product beyond such date would be an infringement of our patent rights.
Regulation
United States Regulation
      The AIR TASER device, ADVANCED TASER device, and TASER X26 device, as well as the cartridges used by these devices, are subject to identical regulations. None of our devices are considered to be a “firearm” by the U.S. Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms and Explosives. Therefore, no firearms-related regulations apply to the sale and distribution of our devices within the United States. In the 1980’s however, many states introduced regulations restricting the sale and use of stun guns, inexpensive hand-held shock devices. We believe existing stun gun regulations also apply to our device systems.
      In 2002 through 2004, we worked with several law enforcement agencies, government agencies and distributors to overturn prior legislation preventing the sale of TASERs to law enforcement agencies in certain regions of the U.S. In August 2004, the Commonwealth of Massachusetts changed its laws to allow law enforcement agencies to deploy TASER devices. These combined efforts were successful in changing the legislation in the states of Hawaii, Massachusetts and Michigan. We consider this to be a dramatic change in regulations as, for example, prior to the amendment to the Michigan Penal Code, the possession of a TASER or electronic weapon of any kind in Michigan could result in a felony conviction. Currently, New Jersey is the only remaining state in which TASER technology is prohibited for law enforcement use.
      In many cases, the law enforcement and corrections market is subject to different regulations than the private citizen market. Where different regulations exist, we assume the regulations affecting the private citizen market also apply to the private security markets except as the applicable regulations otherwise specifically provide.

11


Table of Contents

      Based on a review of current regulations, we have determined the following states regulate the sale and use of our device systems:
         
    Law Enforcement    
State   Use   Private citizen Use
         
Connecticut
  Legal   Legal, subject to restrictions
Florida
  Legal   Legal, subject to restrictions
Hawaii
  Legal   Prohibited
Illinois
  Legal   Legal, subject to restrictions
Indiana
  Legal   Legal, subject to restrictions
Massachusetts
  Legal   Prohibited
Michigan
  Legal   Prohibited
New Jersey
  Prohibited   Prohibited
New York
  Legal   Prohibited
North Carolina
  Legal   Legal, subject to restrictions
North Dakota
  Legal   Legal, subject to restrictions
Rhode Island
  Legal   Prohibited
Washington
  Legal   Legal, subject to restrictions
Wisconsin
  Legal   Prohibited
United States Export Regulation
      Our device systems are considered a crime control product by the United States Department of Commerce. Accordingly, the export of our device systems is regulated under export administration regulations. As a result, we must obtain export licenses from the Department of Commerce for all shipments to foreign countries other than Canada. Most of our requests for export licenses have been granted, and the need to obtain these licenses has not caused a material delay in our shipments. The need to obtain licenses, however, has limited or impeded our ability to ship to certain foreign markets. Export regulations also prohibit the further shipment of our products from foreign markets in which we hold a valid export license to foreign markets in which we do not hold an export license for the products.
      In addition, in the fall of 2000, the Department of Commerce adopted new regulations restricting the export of technology used in our device systems. These regulations apply to both the technology incorporated in our device systems and in the processes used to produce them. The technology export regulations do not apply to production that takes place within the United States, but is applicable to all sub-assemblies and controlled items manufactured outside the United States.
Foreign Regulation
      Foreign regulations which may affect our weapon systems are numerous and often unclear. We prefer to work with a distributor who is familiar with the applicable import regulations in each of our foreign markets. Experience with foreign distributors in the past indicates that restrictions may prohibit certain sales of our products in a number of countries. The countries in which we are aware of restrictions for both citizens and law enforcement include: Belgium, Denmark, Hong Kong, Italy, Japan, Malaysia, New Zealand, the Netherlands, Norway, Serbia, and Pakistan.
      Additionally, Australia, Canada, Greece, India, Latvia, Lithuania, South Korea, Sweden, and Switzerland permit our products to be sold only to law enforcement and corrections agencies. During 2003, Switzerland completed a review of TASER brand devices, and has approved their use for law enforcement. Although there have been no significant orders from this country, this approval is a milestone in reversing legislation in the international community that previously prohibited the use of TASER brand devices.
      Previously, the United Kingdom was among the countries where TASER technologies were prohibited. However, in January 2003, the British Police announced that the national government would be backing a

12


Table of Contents

TASER pilot program for five police forces within the UK. The agencies participating in the trial program of the ADVANCED TASER M26 include: the Northamptonshire Police, Lincolnshire Police, Thames Valley Police, North Wales Police and Metropolitan Police. This decision came after the completion of two years of testing by the Police Scientific Development Branch of the Home Office in England, during which the product was reviewed for operational effectiveness and medical safety. Following a detailed evaluation of a 12-month operational trial of the ADVANCED TASER device, which was carried out by the five police forces, the Home Secretary David Blunkett agreed that firearms officers in forces nationwide can now use the hand-held electrical device as of September 2004. To date, there have been several successful outcomes involving the use of TASER devices reported by the police forces deploying the weapons system.
      TASER device sales to civilians are permitted in Austria, Bahamas, Bulgaria, Costa Rica, Croatia, Czech Republic, Ecuador, France, Germany (device must look like a gun and not have a laser sight), Mexico, Poland, Romania, Slovenia, and South Africa.
Intellectual Property
      We protect our intellectual property with U.S. and foreign patents and trademarks. In addition, we use confidentiality agreements with employees, consultants and key suppliers to help ensure the confidentiality of our trade secrets.
      The Company owns the following U.S. Patents: Patent No. 5,078,117, which expires in 2010, applies to cartridges for the M26 and X26, specifically, use of a compressed gas cylinder to store the propellant for the darts. The Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms, and Explosives classification of firearms does not apply to the M26 and X26 because the propellant for the darts in the M26 and X26 is not gunpowder but compressed nitrogen gas. Patent No. 6,636,412, which expires in 2019, applies to the M26, specifically, circuitry and operating methods for producing the ADVANCED TASER electrical output waveform. Patent No. 5,698,815, which expires in 2015, applies to a non-lethal electronic projectile fired from a conventional weapon. Patent No. 5,654,867, which expires in 2014, applies to weapons for immobilization, specifically, an arrangement for two laser sights, one for each dart. Patent No. 5,936,183, which expires in 2017, applies to non-lethal area denial devices, such as land mines that deploy cartridges as described above. Patent No. 5,955,695, which expires in 2017, applies to non-lethal area denial devices, such as land mines, capable of automatic aiming of deployed cartridges. Patent No. 6,269,726, which expires in 2017, applies to remotely controlled non-lethal weapons operated via video camera for protection of facilities and vehicles against personnel. Patent No. 6,256,916, which expires in 2019, applies to hand-held stun devices that do not propel darts.
      Foreign patents owned by the Company include the following. European Regional Patent No. EP 960048 provides the basis for granted patents in six countries (Great Britain, Belgium, France, Germany, Switzerland, and Italy) which expire in 2017 and apply to non-lethal area denial devices. These patents correspond to U.S. Patent No. 5,936,183, discussed above. European Regional Patent No. EP 993403 provides the basis for granted patents in each of the same six countries which expire in 2017 and apply to automatic aiming of cartridges deployed, for example, from a land mine. These patents correspond to U.S. Patent 5,955,695, discussed above.
      The Company continues to apply for U.S. and foreign patents to protect its technologies. Pending patent applications apply to the ADVANCED TASER M26, the TASER X26, and planned new products.
      Registered trademarks used in connection with current products and services and owned by the Company include ADVANCED TASER (U.S. Reg. No. 2,797,467), TASER (Japan Reg. No. 4826928 and South Africa Reg. No. 95/11583), and our globe with lightning bolt logo (Japan Reg. No. 4826503). Additionally, the Company has pending trademark applications in the U.S. and several foreign countries. The Company owns the internet domain name “Taser.com”.

13


Table of Contents

Research and Development
      Our research and development initiatives are conducted in two separate categories. The first is internally funded research and development, and the second is research funded by the Office of Naval Research. Both categories focus on next generation technology, yet are differentiated by their time to completion and accounting treatment. Internally funded research has been primarily focused on improvements to existing TASER products, or the development of new applications for TASER technology. The work being done for the Office of Naval Research has been focused on developing weapon systems to be used in military combat or policing activities. These projects are more long-term in nature, and involve several outside resources. Both avenues of research are led by our internal personnel and make use of specialized consultants when necessary. These initiatives include bio-medical research and electrical and mechanical engineering. We expect that future development projects will focus on reducing the size, extending the range, and improving the functionality of our products.
      Our investment in internally funded research totaled approximately $824,000 in 2004 and $498,000 in 2003. The increase in expenditures for 2004 was driven by increased headcount in the R&D area as the Company added staff to develop new products in the pipeline. The research funded by the Office of Naval Research (ONR) has been completed on a cost-plus-profit basis, and the grant proceeds in 2004 were approximately $12,000 compared to $277,000 in 2003. The decrease in research funding is partially a timing difference as the Company did not receive its grant for phases 3 and 4 of the extended range projectile project until late 2004. Periodically as work is completed, an invoice summarizing the reimbursable expenses is submitted to the ONR for payment. The payment request details the costs expensed in the period and adds a nominal profit. Because this project generates profit for the Company, the reimbursement is recognized as a component of revenue, and the associated expenditures are expensed as a component of cost of products sold.
      As we progress with projects underway, we expect that our research and development expenditures will increase as a percentage of sales. This is due to the addition of personnel in our research and development department and the costs associated with conducting and preparing biomedical studies, and contracting for the services of medical experts to review our product developments. The Company expects to have a prototype of its Extended Range Projectile ready to test in 2005. The Company also plans to produce prototypes of the TASER Anti-Personnel Munition in 2005.
      During 2003, two products were introduced to our customer base. The first was the TASER X26, the next generation TASER device and the other was a new 21 foot cartridge for our law enforcement customers. The new cartridge, called the XP, was developed to address heavy clothing penetration requirements encountered in colder climates and during the winter months. This cartridge was further improved in 2004 by increasing its range to 25 feet and changing the dart body to an assembly of aluminum and brass.
      During 2004, our Operations Division was reorganized to expedite the development of new products, to streamline the production of existing products, and ready the manufacturing division to accept new technologies coming out of research and development. This reorganization included the expansion of our existing Research and Development and Manufacturing Engineering teams and the creation of a new Quality Assurance Department.
Employees
      As of December 31, 2004, we had 226 full-time employees and 23 temporary manufacturing employees. The breakdown by department is as follows: 169 direct manufacturing employees and 80 administrative and manufacturing support employees. Of the 80 administrative and manufacturing support employees; 26 were involved in sales, marketing, communication and training; 13 were employed in research, development and engineering; 21 were employed in administrative functions inclusive of executive management, legal, finance, accounting and investor relations; 4 were employed in the information systems technologies; and 16 were employed in manufacturing support functions.
      Our employees are not covered by any collective bargaining agreement, and we have never experienced a work stoppage. We believe that our relations with our employees are good.

14


Table of Contents

Corporate Information
      We were incorporated in Arizona in September 1993 as ICER Corporation. We changed our name to AIR TASER, Inc. in December 1993 and to TASER International, Incorporated in April 1998. In February 2001, we reincorporated in Delaware as TASER International, Inc. Our website is located at www.taser.com. The information on, or that can be accessed through, our website is not part of this Annual Report on form 10-KSB.
Item 2. Description of Property
Principal Location, Corporate Headquarters and Manufacturing Facilities
      We conduct our operations from a 11,800 square-foot leased facility in Scottsdale, Arizona. The monthly rent for this facility is approximately $15,000. Our lease expires on December 31, 2005. In addition to our main building, we have leased three additional office suites adjacent to our building. The three auxiliary buildings total approximately 14,000 square feet, and cost the Company approximately $21,000 per month for rent. The leases for the three facilities expired on December 31, 2004 and we are currently renting the three facilities on a month to month basis. The Company is close to completing the construction of a new 100,000 square foot facility to house our operations in Scottsdale, Arizona. This building is expected to be completed and ready for occupancy by April 2005, at which time we expect to consolidate all of the U.S. operations into such facility. The Company has been paying for the construction of the facility as the work has been completed and it anticipates that it will own the building without any mortgage or other obligations when it is completed.
Investment Policies
      Our investment policy to date has been to focus resources on the development of our core business. To that end, our capital investments are made in the areas of fixed assets that will generate income through improved productivity or advanced technology. The Company’s investment choices are limited based on the Portfolio Investment Objectives which were approved by the audit committee of the Company’s board of directors. Cash reserves are invested mostly in interest bearing accounts and government sponsored securities. As of December, 2004, the Company had $14.8 million in cash and cash equivalents, and short-term and long-term investments of $35.3 million.
Item 3. Legal Proceedings
Securities Litigation
      On January 10, 2005, a securities class action lawsuit was filed in the United States District Court for the District of Arizona against the Company and certain of its officers and directors, captioned Malasky v. TASER International, Inc., et al. , Case No. 2:05 CV 115. Since then, numerous other securities class action lawsuits were filed against the Company and certain of its officers and directors. The majority of these lawsuits were filed in the District of Arizona. Four actions were filed in the United States District Court for the Southern District of New York. The parties in three of the New York actions have agreed to transfer the cases to the District of Arizona, and defendants are in the process of seeking the transfer of the fourth New York action to the District of Arizona. The parties have submitted a proposed order to consolidate all actions in the District of Arizona under the Malasky case file.
      These actions are filed on behalf of the purchasers of the Company’s stock in various class periods, beginning as early as May 29, 2003 and ending as late as January 14, 2005. The complaints allege, among other things, violations of Section 10(b) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and Rule 10b-5, promulgated thereunder, and seek unspecified monetary damages and other relief against all defendants. The complaints allege generally that the Company and the individual defendants made false or misleading public statements regarding, among other things, the safety of the Company’s products and the Company’s ability to meet its sales goals, including the validity of a $1.5 million sales order with one of the Company’s distributors in the fourth quarter of 2004.

15


Table of Contents

      Pursuant to a proposed order, which has been submitted to the court, defendants need not respond to any of the complaints originally filed in these actions. Plaintiffs will file an amended consolidated complaint after lead plaintiff and lead counsel are chosen. Defendants will then respond to the amended consolidated complaint.
Shareholder Derivative Litigation
      On January 11, 2005, a shareholder derivative lawsuit was filed in the United States District Court for the District of Arizona purportedly on behalf of the Company and against certain of its officers and directors, captioned Goldfine v. Culver, et al. , Case No. 2:05 CV 123. Since then, five other shareholder derivative lawsuits were filed in the District of Arizona, two shareholder derivative lawsuits were filed in the Arizona Superior Court, Maricopa County, and one shareholder derivative lawsuit was filed in the Delaware Chancery Court. On February 9, 2005, the shareholder derivative actions pending in federal court were consolidated into a single action under the caption, In re TASER International Shareholder Derivative Litigation, Case No. 2:05 CV 123. Pursuant to the consolidating order, defendants will not respond to any of the complaints originally in these actions. Instead, defendants will respond to plaintiffs’ consolidated amended complaint. Defendants have not responded to the cases filed in the Arizona Superior Court or in Delaware Chancery Court.
      The complaints in the shareholder derivative lawsuits generally allege that the defendants breached the fiduciary duties owed to the Company and its shareholders by reason of their positions as officers and/or directors of the Company. The complaints claim that such duties were breached by defendants’ disclosure of allegedly false or misleading statements about the safety and effectiveness of Company products and the Company’s financial prospects. The complaints also claim that fiduciary duties were breached by defendants’ alleged use of non-public information regarding the safety of Company products and the Company’s financial condition and future business prospects for personal gain through the sale of the Company’s stock. The Company is named solely as a nominal defendant against which no recovery is sought.
Securities and Exchange Commission Informal Inquiry
      The Securities and Exchange Commission has initiated an informal inquiry into Taser with respect to the basis for the Company’s public statements concerning the safety and performance of the Company’s products, disclosure issues, and the accounting for certain transactions. The inquiry is ongoing.
Contract Litigation
      In March 2000, Thomas N. Hennigan, a distributor of our products from late 1997 through early 2000, sued us in the United States District Court, Southern District of New York. We had previously sued him in February 2000 but had not served him. After the New York case was dismissed in February 2001 for lack of personal jurisdiction, Mr. Hennigan brought a counterclaim in the United States District Court for the District of Arizona. Mr. Hennigan claims the exclusive right to sell our products to many of the largest law enforcement, corrections, and military agencies in the United States. He seeks monetary damages that may amount to as much as $400 million against us allegedly arising in connection with his service to us as a distributor. His claims rest on theories of our failure to pay commissions, breach of contract, promissory estoppel, breach of fiduciary duty, and on related theories. No written contract was ever signed with Mr. Hennigan. We also believe that he has no reasonable basis for claims based on informal or implied contractual rights and will be unable to prove his damages with reasonable certainty. Mr. Hennigan died in April 2001 and the case is now being prosecuted by his estate. On May 24, 2002, H.A. Russell was permitted to proceed as an additional defendant-counterclaimant. The Company filed various motions in November 2002 for partial summary judgment including a motion to dismiss his claims. On September 30, 2003, the Court issued an order granting the Company’s motion for partial summary judgment to dismiss Mr. Russell’s claims and struck Hennigan’s jury demand. On April 14, 2004, the Court issued an opinion partially granting the Company’s motion for partial summary judgment on certain joint venture, post-termination, post-death and exclusivity claims. A pretrial conference was held on February 18, 2005 and no trial date has been set.

16


Table of Contents

      In September 2004, the Company was served with a summons and complaint in the matter of Roy Tailors Uniform Co., Inc. v. TASER International in which the plaintiff alleges that it is entitled to commissions for disputed sales that were made to customers that are claimed to be plaintiff’s customers for which plaintiff is seeking monetary damages. Plaintiff failed to sign a distributor agreement with the Company and did not have distribution rights with the Company. This case is in the discovery phase and a trial date has not been set.
Product Liability Litigation
      From April 2003 to March 2005, the Company was named as a defendant in 18 lawsuits in which the plaintiffs alleged either wrongful death or personal injury in situations in which the TASER device was used by law enforcement officers or during training exercises. One case has been dismissed with prejudice, another case has been dismissed without prejudice and the balance of the cases are pending. With respect to each of these 18 cases, the table below lists the name of plaintiff, the date of the suit, the jurisdiction in which the case is pending, the type of claim and the status of the matter. In each of these lawsuits, the plaintiff is seeking monetary damages from the Company. We have submitted the defense of each of these lawsuits to our insurance carriers as we maintained during these periods and continue to maintain product liability insurance coverage with varying limits and deductibles. The Company’s product liability insurance coverage during these periods ranged from $5,000,000 to $10,000,000 in coverage limits and from $10,000 to $250,000 in deductibles. The Company is defending each of these lawsuits vigorously. Although the Company does not expect the outcome in any individual case to be material, the outcome of any litigation is inherently uncertain and there can be no assurance that any liability that may ultimately result from the resolution of these matters will not be in excess of amounts provided by insurance coverage and will not have a material adverse effect on our business, operating results or financial condition.
                                 
    Month            
Plaintiff   Served   Jurisdiction   Claim Type   Status
                 
Del’Ostia
    3/2004       US District Court, SD FL       Wrongful Death       Dismissed With Prejudice  
Alvarado
    4/2003       CA Superior Court       Wrongful Death       Discovery Phase  
City of Madera
    6/2003       CA Superior Court       Wrongful Death       Discovery Phase  
Borden
    9/2004       US District Court, SD IN       Wrongful Death       Discovery Phase  
Thompson
    9/2004       MI Circuit Court       Wrongful Death       Discovery Phase  
Pierson
    11/2004       US District Court, CD CA       Wrongful Death       Discovery Phase  
Glowczenski
    10/2004       US District Court, ED NY       Wrongful Death       Discovery Phase  
LeBlanc
    12/2004       US District Court, CD CA       Wrongful Death       Discovery Phase  
Elsholtz
    12/2004       TX District Court       Wrongful Death       Discovery Phase  
Kerchoff
    6/2004       US District Court, ED MI       Training Injury       Dismissed Without Prejudice  
Powers
    11/2003       AZ Superior Court       Training Injury       June 2005 Trial Scheduled  
Cook
    8/2004       NV District Court       Training Injury       Discovery Phase  
Stevens
    10/2004       OH Court Common Pleas       Training Injury       Discovery Phase  
Eckenroth
    11/2004       AZ Superior Court       Training Injury       Discovery Phase  
Lipa
    2/2005       MI Circuit Court       Training Injury       Discovery Phase  
Dimiceli
    3/2005       FL Circuit Court       Training Injury       Discovery Phase  
Cosby
    8/2004       US District Court, SD NY       Injury During Arrest       Discovery Phase  
Blair
    5/2005       US District Court, MD NC       Injury During Detention       Discovery Phase  
Other Litigation
      In early April 2001, a patent licensee sued us in the United District Court, Central District of California. The lawsuit alleges that certain technology used in the firing mechanism for our devices infringes upon a patent for which the licensee holds a license, and seeks injunctive relief and unspecified monetary damages. While the court awarded summary judgment in our favor, the plaintiff has filed a notice of appeal. An

17


Table of Contents

outcome that is adverse to us, costs associated with defending the lawsuit, and the diversion of management’s time and resources as a result of the claim could harm our business and our financial condition.
      In January 2005, the Company filed litigation in U.S. District Court for the Western District of North Carolina against Stinger Systems, Inc. and Robert Gruder alleging false advertising and a violation of the Lanham Act. The defendants have filed a counterclaim against the Company alleging defamation. This case is in the discovery phase and no trial date has been set.
      In February 2005, the Company filed litigation in Superior Court for Maricopa County, Arizona against its former patent attorney, Thomas G. Watkins III, alleging breach of fiduciary duty and estoppel arising out of ownership and inventorship claims Mr. Watkins has made against a patent he filed for the Company for certain technology utilized in the TASER X26 product. This case is in the discovery phase and no trial date has been set.
Item 4. Submission of Matters to a Vote of Security Holders
      None.
PART II
Item 5. Market for Common Equity, Related Stockholder Matters and Small Business Issuer Purchases of Equity Securities
Market Information
      Our Common Stock is quoted under the symbol “TASR” on The NASDAQ National Market.
      The following table sets forth the high and low closing sales prices per share for our Common Stock as reported by NASDAQ for each quarter of the last two fiscal years as adjusted for our February 11, 2004 three-for-one stock split in the form of a stock dividend, our April 29, 2004 two-for-one stock split in the form of a stock dividend, and our November 29, 2004 two-for-one stock split in the form of a stock dividend:
Common Stock “TASR”
                 
Fiscal Quarters   High   Low
         
March 31, 2003
  $ 0.38     $ 0.30  
June 30, 2003
  $ 1.13     $ 0.35  
September 30, 2003
  $ 2.70     $ 0.98  
December 31, 2003
  $ 7.79     $ 2.17  
March 31, 2004
  $ 21.89     $ 3.77  
June 30, 2004
  $ 32.08     $ 8.07  
September 30, 2004
  $ 23.00     $ 12.53  
December 31, 2004
  $ 33.45     $ 13.08  
Holders
      As of December 31, 2004, there were approximately 287 holders of record of our Common Stock.
Dividends
      To date, the Company has not declared or paid cash dividends on its Common Stock. The Company’s revolving line of credit with its principal bank prohibits the payment of cash dividends.
      On January 14, 2004, the Company announced a three-for-one stock split in the form of a dividend. Under the terms of the stock split, the Company’s shareholders of record as of January 26, 2004 would receive a dividend of two shares of common stock for every one share of common stock held on that date. The

18


Table of Contents

dividend was paid on February 11, 2004 from authorized but unissued shares of common stock of the Company.
      On April 6, 2004, the Company announced a two-for-one stock split in the form of a dividend. Under the terms of the stock split, the Company’s shareholders of record as of April 15, 2004 would receive a dividend of one share of common stock for every one share of common stock held on that date. The dividend was paid on April 29, 2004 from authorized but unissued shares of common stock of the Company.
      On November 4, 2004, the Company announced a two-for-one stock split in the form of a dividend. Under the terms of the stock split, the Company’s shareholders of record as of November 15, 2004 would receive a dividend of one share of common stock for every one share of common stock held on that date. The dividend was paid on November 29, 2004 from authorized but unissued shares of common stock of the Company.
Recent Sales of Unregistered Securities
      No unregistered securities were sold in 2004 or 2003.
Item 6. Management’s Discussion and Analysis or Plan of Operation
Overview
      We began operations in Arizona in 1993 for the purpose of developing and manufacturing non-lethal self-defense devices. In December 1999, we introduced our ADVANCED TASER device for sale in the law enforcement market. Although we had limited financial resources, in 2001, we focused on building the distribution channel for marketing our product line and developing a nationwide training program to introduce our product line to law enforcement agencies, primarily in North America. We also completed our initial public offering in 2001. In April 2002, we received a grant from the Office of Naval Research to aid the U.S. Government with the development of non-lethal weapons for the military. This grant provided us with added funding for our research and development efforts, and also validated our position as a leader in non-lethal technologies. In 2003, we remained focused on expanding our manufacturing and sales infrastructure to support the growing demand for our products, continued developing new product capabilities, and added resources to expand our technology base. In May 2003, we introduced our TASER X26 device which incorporated the strengths of its predecessor, the ADVANCED TASER device, but also introduced a new “shaped pulse” technology, and a smaller form factor. The TASER X26 began shipping in September 2003. In June 2003, we purchased patent applications and patents from a former competitor in the manufacture and sale of Taser conducted energy weapons to law enforcement. In 2003, we shipped our products to key United States Military command posts, and worked with several key international police and military forces to conduct safety and reliability testing for future deployment.
      Our business grew substantially in 2004 and we achieved 177% growth in net sales compared to 2003, earned $19.1 million in net income, and generated more than $30.3 million of cash through operating activities. During 2004, our TASER X26 met with significant customer approval contributing more than $46.1 million of net sales for the year. During 2004, we also achieved many of the financial objectives established by the Company at the time of our initial public offering, including our targeted gross margin; sales, general and administrative expenses; research and development costs; operating income; day’s sales outstanding and inventory turns.
      Currently, our ADVANCED TASER product line consists of the ADVANCED TASER device (there are three versions: the M26, the M18 and the M18-L), various cartridges that shoot two small, electrified probes up to 25 feet, rechargeable batteries, a battery recharging system, data download package, extended warranty packages, and a number of holstering accessories. In addition to the law enforcement line of ADVANCED TASER products, we also developed a slightly less powerful private citizen version of the ADVANCED TASER device for the private citizen self defense market. This line includes the ADVANCED TASER M18L, with integrated laser sight, the ADVANCED TASER M18 without an integrated laser sight, a cartridge that shoots two small, electrified probes up to 15 feet, and a number of holstering accessories.

19


Table of Contents

      Law enforcement, military and corrections agencies represent our primary target markets. In each of these markets, the decision to purchase TASER devices is normally made by a group of people including the agency head, his or her training staff, and weapons experts. Depending on the size and cost of the device deployment, the decision may involve political decision-makers such as city council members and the federal government. The decision-making process can take as little as a few weeks or as long as several years. In 2004, we shipped a total of 16,612 orders at an average sale price of $4,072 per shipment. This compares to 9,580 orders shipped in 2003, at an average sales price of $2,553 per order. Sales into the private citizen market were not significant in 2004. With the exception of several accounts to which we sell directly, the vast majority of our law enforcement agency sales in the Unites States occur through our network of 28 law enforcement distributors. Sales in the private citizen market are made through web sales and through 25 commercial distributors.
      Our international sales are made through a network of international distributors that work in a specific territory generally under short term exclusive agreements. Prior to 2004, we concentrated our resources on the United States law enforcement and corrections market and our international sales efforts were limited. We shipped products to approximately 43 countries during fiscal 2004. Our sales outside the U.S. accounted for approximately 4% of our sales in 2004 and 12% of our total sales in 2003. During 2005, we plan to bolster our international presence by expanding our focus to a larger number of countries.
      We conduct manufacturing and final assembly operations at our headquarters in Scottsdale, Arizona and we own all of the equipment required to manufacture and assemble our finished products. With our current work force, on two shifts, we are able to produce approximately 80,000 cartridges per month, and more than 7,500 TASER devices. We believe we can expand our production capabilities by adding additional personnel with negligible new investment in tooling and equipment.
      Our devices are not considered to be a “firearm” by the U.S. Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms and Explosives. Therefore, no firearms-related regulations apply to the sale and distribution of our devices within the United States. However, many states have regulations restricting the sale and use of stun guns, inexpensive hand-held shock devices which we believe apply to our devices.
      Our products are often used in aggressive confrontations that may result in serious, permanent bodily injury or death to those involved. Our products may cause or be associated with these injuries. A person injured in a confrontation or otherwise in connection with the use of our products may bring legal action against us to recover damages on the basis of theories including personal injury, wrongful death, negligent design, dangerous product or inadequate warning. We are currently subject to a number of such lawsuits. We may also be subject to lawsuits involving allegations of misuse of our products. If successful, personal injury, misuse and other claims could have a material adverse effect on our operating results and financial condition. Although we carry product liability insurance, significant litigation could also result in a diversion of management’s attention and resources, negative publicity and an award of monetary damages in excess of our insurance coverage. The outcome of any litigation is inherently uncertain and there can be no assurance that our existing or any future litigation will not have a material adverse effect on our revenues, our financial condition or financial results.
      Our future challenges include risk management and managing the cost structure of our business. As our weapon systems are deployed around the world, we expect to see an increased number of complaints filed against the Company alleging injuries resulting from the use of a TASER device. We carry product liability insurance to help defray the costs associated with these claims, but will likely experience increased legal costs and higher insurance premiums in the future. In addition, the implications of the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) 123R, which requires the expensing of fair value of employee stock options, may result in a significant additional compensation expense to be recorded by the Company.
Critical Accounting Policies
      We have identified the following policies as critical to our business operations and the understanding of our results of operations. The preparation of this Annual Report on Form 10-KSB requires us to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amount of assets and liabilities, disclosure of contingent

20


Table of Contents

assets and liabilities at the date of our financial statements, and the reported amounts of revenue and expenses during the reporting period. There can be no assurance that actual results will not differ from those estimates. The effect of these policies on our business operations is discussed below.
      Revenue Recognition. Our revenue recognition policy is significant because our revenue is a key component of our results of operations. We recognize revenues when persuasive evidence of an arrangement exists, delivery has occurred or services have been rendered, title has transferred, the price is fixed and collectability is reasonably assured. All of the Company’s sales are final and our customers do not have a right to return the product. We charge certain of our customers shipping fees, which are recorded as a component of net sales. We record training revenue as the service is provided. In 2003 we began offering our customers the right to purchase extended warranties on our ADVANCED TASER product and TASER X26 product. Revenue for warranty purchases is deferred at the time of sale, and recognized over the warranty period. During 2004, $839,000 was deferred under this program. During 2003, $110,000 was deferred under this program. The Company also defers revenue associated with the one-on-one private citizen training and background checks that are included with the purchase of an X26 C private citizen device. The revenue associated with these items is deferred until the service is provided. At December 31, 2004, the Company had deferred approximately $135,000 relating to these items, and another $33,000 relating to the training of federal firearms licensed dealers who will sell the X26 C device.
      Standard Warranty Costs. We warrant our products from manufacturing defects for a period of one year after purchase and will replace any defective unit with a new one for a fee. We track historical data related to returns and related warranty costs on a quarterly basis, and estimate future warranty claims by applying our four quarter average return rate to our product sales for the period. We have also historically increased our reserve amount if we become aware of a component failure that could result in larger than anticipated returns from our customers. As of December 31, 2004, our reserve for warranty returns was $458,000 compared to a $313,000 reserved in 2003.
      Inventory. Our inventory balance includes the application of overhead expenditures. This calculation is based upon the standard manufacturing costs for each sub assembly and finished product in inventory at the period end, and includes allocations for indirect manufacturing, manufacturing overhead expenditures and engineering expenses incurred during the period. In 2003, following our 2002 announcement to discontinue manufacture of the AIR TASER product line, and the introduction of the TASER X26 product line, we increased the reserve to reduce the exposure for obsolete inventory created by the shift in product sales. On December 31, 2004, the reserve for obsolete inventory was $144,000, an increase of $36,000 over the previous year end balance of $108,000. In 2004, the Company increased inventory balances by $3.7 million from $3.1 million at December 31, 2003 to $6.8 million at December 31, 2004. The increase in inventory levels was planned in order to meet anticipated future demand.
      Concentration of Credit Risk and Major Customers. Financial instruments that potentially subject us to concentrations of credit risk consist of accounts receivable. Sales are typically made on credit and we generally do not require collateral. We perform ongoing credit evaluations of our customers’ financial condition and maintain an allowance for estimated potential losses. Uncollectible accounts are written off when deemed uncollectible, and accounts receivable are presented net of an allowance for doubtful accounts.

21


Table of Contents

Selected Financial Data
      The selected statement of income data and balance sheet data and discussion presented below summarizes information relating to our results of operations as of, and for the years ended, December 31, 2004 and 2003. This data has been derived from our audited financial statements and should be read in conjunction with the financial statements and notes included elsewhere in this report.
                   
    December 31,   December 31,
    2004   2003
         
Statements of Income and Balance Sheet Data:
               
Statement of Income Data:
               
 
Net sales
  $ 67,639,879     $ 24,455,506  
 
Gross margin
    45,184,383       15,052,890  
 
Sales, general and administrative expenses
    13,485,256       6,973,721  
 
Income from operations
    30,875,534       7,580,699  
 
Interest income
    439,450       50,375  
 
Interest expense
    1,485       9,307  
 
Income before income taxes
    31,315,808       7,367,291  
 
Provision for income tax
    12,191,000       2,913,601  
 
Net income
  $ 19,124,808     $ 4,453,690  
 
Basic earnings per share
  $ 0.33*     $ 0.12*  
 
Diluted earnings per share
  $ 0.31*     $ 0.10*  
Balance Sheet Data:
               
 
Working Capital
  $ 51,496,055     $ 22,479,594  
 
Total Assets
    106,269,136       31,444,690  
 
Total Current Liabilities
    8,538,873       3,973,464  
 
Long Term Portion of Capital Lease Obligations
          3,655  
 
Total Stockholders’ Equity
  $ 97,122,407     $ 27,427,450  
 
Earnings per share data are shown on a post-split basis.
Results of Operations
      Net Sales. Net Sales increased $43.2 million, or 177%, to $67.6 million for 2004 compared to $24.5 million for 2003. This increase was due to the increased unit sales of the higher priced TASER X26 device, and increased single cartridge sales associated with the wider-spread and continued use of TASER devices by law enforcement. Specifically, TASER X26 device sales increased $38.0 million to $46.1 million for 2004 compared to $8.1 million for 2003. ADVANCED TASER device sales decreased $11.5 million in 2004 to $3.9 million compared to $15.4 million in 2003. This decrease was the result of reduced sales of the ADVANCED TASER product line as many customers transitioned to the smaller and lighter TASER X26 models.
      Grant funding from the Office of Naval Research (ONR) decreased $265,000 to $12,000 for 2004 compared to $277,000 of funding received in 2003. The Company was awarded a grant for $515,000 in late 2004 to fund Phases 3 and 4 of the extended range projectile project, and we expect to perform this work and recognize the related revenue in 2005. Other sales represent sales of various ancillary equipment, accessories and training revenue.

22


Table of Contents

      For the years ended December 31, 2004 and 2003, sales by product line were as follows (amounts in thousands):
                                 
    2004   2003
         
Sales by Product Line
                               
TASER X26
  $ 46,083       68%     $ 8,066       33%  
ADVANCED TASER
    3,929       6%       15,412       63%  
AIR TASER
    107       0%       411       2%  
Single Cartridges
    14,655       22%             0%  
Research Funding
    12       0%       277       1%  
Other
    2,854       4%       290       1%  
                         
Total
  $ 67,640       100%     $ 24,456       100%  
                         
      In 2003, cartridge sales were classified with the related product sold.
      We anticipate net sales will decrease in the first half of 2005, perhaps significantly, from the levels achieved in the third and fourth quarters of 2004. We believe the principal reasons for the decrease in net sales, or the deferral of orders, may relate to the adverse impact on customers and potential customers of the allegations of death occurring after the use of a TASER device, adverse publicity surrounding our products or use of our products, and potential competition which may cause our customers to postpone or delay orders to allow them to evaluate other competing products.
      Cost of Products Sold. Cost of products sold increased $13.1 million, or 139%, to $22.5 million for 2004 compared to $9.4 million for 2003. However, as a percent of net sales, cost of products sold decreased 13% to 33% of net sales compared to 38% of net sales for 2003. This decrease is attributable to four factors: a significant increase in unit sales volume, a change in product sales mix to our higher margin TASER X26 product, an increase in the number of direct sales to law enforcement agencies, and improved manufacturing efficiencies.
      In 2004, the number of ADVANCED TASER devices and TASER X26 devices sold increased by 45,681 units, or 142%, to 77,916 devices sold in 2004 compared to 32,235 devices sold in 2003. Single cartridge sales increased by 504,563 units, or 126%, to 904,407 sold in 2004 compared to 399,844 sold in 2003. These increases in unit sales, and the favorable change in product mix, resulted in a 4% reduction in direct expenses as a percent of sales for 2004, to 25% in 2004 from 29% for 2003. Indirect expenses, which include primarily depreciation, rent, supplies, freight, indirect salaries for manufacturing support personnel, and scrapped materials, as a percent of sales declined to 8% for 2004 from 10% for 2003.
      Direct expenses associated with the research grant from the Office of Naval Research were only $1,300 for 2004 compared to $107,000 for 2003. This decline is associated with the decline in grant revenue reported of $12,000 for 2004 compared to $277,000 for 2003. The Company had completed 95% of the contract work approved in 2003 and finished the work in 2004. The Company received additional funding for Phases 3 and 4 of the extended range projectile project in late 2004 which relates to work which is expected to be performed and billed in 2005.
      Gross Margin. Gross margins improved $30.1 million, or 200%, to $45.2 million for 2004 compared to $15.1 million for 2003. As a percent of sales, gross margins improved 8% to 67% for 2004 compared to 62% for 2003. This increase is the result of efficiencies obtained from higher production levels and increased sales of the higher margin TASER X26.
      Sales, General and Administrative Expenses. Sales, general and administrative expenses increased $6.5 million, or 93%, to $13.5 million for 2004 from $7.0 million for 2003. The increase in sales, general and administrative expenses is expected to continue as the Company ramps up its infrastructure to meet the expected increased demand for its products. However, as a percent of sales, sales, general and administrative expenses decreased 31%, to 20% for 2004 compared to 29% for 2003. Administrative expenses were reduced by 31%, to 9% of sales for 2004, compared to 13% of sales for 2003. This reduction in administrative expenses as a

23


Table of Contents

percent of sales was achieved net of significant increases in the Company’s liability insurance, salaries, and travel expenses.
      Sales and marketing expenses were also reduced by 31%, to 11% of sales for 2004 compared to 16% for 2003 due to better leverage of the fixed expenses. In total, the Company spent $7.2 million in promoting new sales and servicing existing customers in 2004, compared to $3.8 million for 2003. The most significant increases were in the areas of public relations activities, law enforcement training programs, and travel and salaries expenses. The increase in public relations activities is associated with the Company’s continuing efforts to educate the public in regard to the safety and efficacy of its products. In addition, the training programs presented cost the Company $1.1 million for 2004 compared to $482,000 for 2003.
      The Company also continued its effort to educate legislators in Washington D.C. as to the advantages of deploying the non-lethal weapons for both commercial airline and military use. During 2003 and 2004, $151,000 and $252,000, respectively, was paid to lobbying firms for their assistance in establishing contacts and in promoting legislation that advanced the approval of TASER devices on board cargo and commercial aircraft. This approval was received in November 2004. Their assistance also led to the approval of $1.0 million of government appropriated funding for the purchase of TASER devices for the Department of Defense in 2004.
      Research and Development Expenses. Research and development expenses increased $326,000, or 65%, to $824,000 for 2004 compared to $498,000 for 2003. This increase was due to higher spending on software development, the design and prototype expenses associated with the X-Rail, and work on a prototype of a projectile weapon platform.
      Interest Income. Interest income increased $389,000 to $439,000 for 2004 compared to $50,000 for 2003. This increase in interest income resulted from higher cash reserves invested. The Company had cash, cash equivalents and investment balances of $50.0 million at December 31, 2004 compared to $15.9 million at December 31, 2003.
      Interest Expense. Interest expense decreased by $8,000 to $1,000 for 2004 compared to $9,000 for 2003. This decrease was a result of the repayment of both long and short-term debt made possible by the cash generated by operating and investment activity in 2004 and 2003.
      Other Income and Expense. During 2004, the Company recorded $2,000 of other income compared to other expense of $254,000 for 2003. This decrease was primarily the result of a discount offered to the holders of TASRW, the Company’s publicly traded warrants, for early exercise in 2003. Prior to the expiration of the discount offer, 781,703 warrants were exercised, resulting in a charge of approximately $248,000 in 2003.
      Income Taxes. The provision for income tax increased $9.3 million to $12.2 million for 2004 compared to $2.9 million for 2003. This increase was the result of higher income before taxes for 2004. The effective income tax rate for 2004 was 38.9% compared to 39.5% for 2003. The decrease in the effective tax rate was due a decrease in non-deductible lobbying expenses, as a percentage of net income, from the prior year.
      During 2004, we received approximately $34.3 million of tax benefits from the exercise of stock options and subsequent sale of the underlying stock compared to $4.0 million for 2003. At December 31, 2004, the Company had an income tax receivable in the amount of $53,000 compared to $292,000 at December 31, 2003. The net deferred tax asset as of December 31, 2004 was $23.2 million compared to $1.1 million at December 31, 2003.
      Net Income. Net income increased $14.6 million to $19.1 million for 2004 compared to $4.5 million for 2003. The increase in net income resulted primarily from the increased sales volume for the year and better leverage of the Company’s fixed costs. Income per basic share increased $0.21 to $0.33 in 2004 compared to $0.12 for 2003. Income per diluted share also increased $0.21 to $0.31 per share in 2004 compared to $0.10 for 2003. Basic earnings per share calculations were based on weighted average shares outstanding of 57,232,329 for 2004 and 37,889,640 for 2003. Diluted earnings per share calculations were based on weighted average shares outstanding of 62,319,590 for 2004 and 46,598,312 for 2003. All share and per share amounts have been retroactively restated for the three stock splits executed during 2004.

24


Table of Contents

Liquidity and Capital Resources
      Liquidity. As of December 31, 2004, we had working capital of $51.5 million compared to working capital of $22.4 million at December 31, 2003. The improvement in working capital from 2003 to 2004 was primarily due to the increase in cash resulting from operating cash flow and the exercise of stock options and warrants. Working capital also increased due to a higher accounts receivable balance due to increased net sales levels and increased inventory levels to support anticipated higher sales.
      During 2004, we generated $30.3 million in cash from operations compared to the $4.4 million generated from operations in 2003. The increase in cash provided by operations was primarily due to three key factors: the $19.1 million of net income generated, $11.5 million of net tax benefits derived from the exercise of stock options, and an increase to accounts payable and other short term liabilities of $5.2 million. These increases were partially off-set by the use of cash from an increase in accounts receivable of $3.1 million during the year, and an increase in the amount of the Company’s investment in inventory of $3.7 million.
      We used $46.8 million of cash in investing activities during 2004, compared to $4.2 million of cash used in investing activities in 2003. Of the funds invested in 2004, $8.7 million was used for the construction of a new 100,000 square foot manufacturing and administrative facility in Scottsdale, Arizona and $1.7 million was used to purchase and install new computer equipment and software including a new ERP system. The Company also invested in $35.3 million in short and long term investments during 2004.
      During 2004, we generated $15.4 million of cash from financing activities, compared to the $12.2 million generated from financing activities in 2003. Of the $15.4 million, $13.1 million resulted from the exercise of stock options and $2.5 million resulted from the exercise of both public and underwriter warrants. The Company used $250,000 of the funds generated to pay off its notes payable.
      Capital Resources. On December 31, 2004, the Company had cash and investments of $50 million and no long term debt outstanding. Additionally, we generated net income of $19.1 million in 2004, and $4.5 million in 2003. The Company believes after payment of liabilities and accounts payable outstanding as of December 31, 2004, its monthly cash flow from operations throughout 2005 will be adequate to cover monthly obligations.
      The Company has a purchase commitment of $3.3 million to complete the construction of its new manufacturing and headquarters facility in Scottsdale Arizona. The Company has adequate cash and short-term investments maturing to fund this commitment.
      We negotiated a new revolving line of credit on July 13, 2004, through a domestic bank. The total availability on the line is $10 million. The line is secured by substantially all of our assets, other than intellectual property, and bears interest at varying rates, ranging from LIBOR plus 1.5% to prime. The line of credit matures on July 13, 2006 and requires monthly payments of interest only. At December 31, 2004, there was a calculated availability of $6.5 million based on the borrowing base defined with the lender. However, there was no outstanding balance under the line of credit at December 31, 2004, and no borrowings under the line as of the date of this filing.
      We believe that our projected operating income in 2005, when added to our cash and investments of $50 million as of December 31, 2004, will be adequate to fund our operations in 2005. However, we may require additional resources to expedite manufacturing of new and existing technologies in order to meet possible demand for our products. Although we believe financing will be available at terms favorable to us, both through our existing credit lines and possible additional equity financing, there is no assurance that such funding will be available.

25


Table of Contents

Commitment and Contingencies
      The following table outlines our future contractual financial obligations, in thousands, as of December 31, 2004:
                                         
        Less           After
    Total   than 1   1-3 years   4-5 years   5 years
                     
Operating Leases
  $ 221     $ 197     $ 24     $     $  
Capital Leases
    5       5                          
Purchase commitment for new headquarters facility
    3,344       3,344                    
                               
Total contractual cash obligations
  $ 3,570     $ 3,546     $ 24     $     $  
                               
Item 7. Financial Statements
      The information required by this Item is included herein by reference to the financial statements beginning on page F-1.
Item 8. Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure
      None.
Item 8A. Controls and Procedures
      Evaluation of disclosure controls and procedures. Our Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer evaluated the effectiveness of our disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended) as of the end of the period covered by this Annual Report on Form 10-KSB. Based on that evaluation, our Chief Executive Officer and our Chief Financial Officer have concluded that our disclosure controls and procedures are effective to ensure that information we are required to disclose in reports that we file or submit under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is recorded, processed, summarized and reported within the time periods specified in Securities and Exchange Commission rules and forms.
      Changes in internal control over financial reporting. There has not been any change in our internal control over financial reporting during our quarter ended December 31, 2004 that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, our internal control over financial reporting.
Item 8B. Other Information
      None.
PART III
Item 9. Directors, Executive Officers, Promoters and Control Persons; Compliance with Section 16(a) of the Exchange Act
      The information concerning the identification and business experience of directors and identification of our audit committee financial expert is incorporated herein by reference to the information set forth in our definitive proxy statement for the 2005 Annual Meeting of Stockholders under the heading “Election of Directors,” which proxy statement we expect to file with the Securities and Exchange Commission within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year ended December 31, 2004.
      The information concerning the identification and business experience of our executive officers is incorporated herein by reference to the information set forth in our definitive proxy statement for the 2005 Annual Meeting of Stockholders under the heading “Executive Officers,” which proxy statement we expect to file with the Securities and Exchange Commission within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year ended December 31, 2004.

26


Table of Contents

      The information concerning compliance with Section 16(a) of the Exchange Act is incorporated herein by reference to the information set forth in our definitive proxy statement for the 2005 Annual Meeting of Stockholders under the heading “Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management — Section 16(a) Beneficial Ownership Reporting Compliance,” which proxy statement we expect to file with the Securities and Exchange Commission within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year ended December 31, 2004.
      The information concerning significant employees and family relationships is incorporated herein by reference to the information set forth in our definitive proxy statement for the 2005 Annual Meeting of Stockholders under the heading “Significant Employees and Family Relationships,” which proxy statement we expect to file with the Securities and Exchange Commission within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year ended December 31, 2004.
      The information concerning the Company’s code of ethics is incorporated herein by reference to the information set forth in our definitive proxy statement for the 2005 Annual Meeting of Stockholders under the heading “Code of Ethics,” which proxy statement we expect to file with the Securities and Exchange Commission within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year ended December 31, 2004.
Item 10. Executive Compensation
      The information concerning executive compensation is incorporated herein by reference to the information set forth in our definitive proxy statement for the 2005 Annual Meeting of Stockholders under the heading “Executive Compensation,” which proxy statement we expect to file with the Securities and Exchange Commission within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year ended December 31, 2004.
      The information concerning compensation of directors is incorporated herein by reference to the information set forth in our definitive proxy statement for the 2005 Annual Meeting of Stockholders under the heading “Compensation of Directors,” which proxy statement we expect to file with the Securities and Exchange Commission within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year ended December 31, 2004.
Item 11. Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related Stockholder Matters
      The information concerning security ownership of certain beneficial owners and management is incorporated herein by reference to the information set forth in our definitive proxy statement for the 2005 Annual Meeting of Stockholders under the heading “Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management,” which proxy statement we expect to file with the Securities and Exchange Commission within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year ended December 31, 2004.
Equity Compensation Plan Information
      The following table provides details of our equity compensation plans at December 31, 2004:
                                 
    Number of            
    Securities   Number of Securities       Number of
    Authorized for   to be Issued Upon       Securities
    Issuance   Exercise of   Weighted Average   Remaining
    Under the   Outstanding Options,   Exercise Price of   Available for
Plan Category   Plan   Warrants or Rights   Outstanding Options   Future Issuance
                 
Equity compensation plans approved by security holders
    23,352,500       5,930,954     $ 3.19       6,832,750  
Equity compensation plans not approved by security holders
    0       0     $       0  
                         
Total
    23,352,500       5,930,954     $ 3.19       6,832,750  
                         

27


Table of Contents

Item 12. Certain Relationships and Related Transactions
      The information concerning certain relationships and related transactions is incorporated herein by reference to the information set forth in our definitive proxy statement for the 2005 Annual Meeting of Stockholders under the heading “Certain Relationships and Related Transactions,” which proxy statement we expect to file with the Securities and Exchange Commission within 120 days after the end of our fiscal year ended December 31, 2004.
Item 13. Exhibits
             
Exhibit    
Number   Description
     
  3 .1       Company’s Certificate of Incorporation, as amended (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.1 to Registration Statement on Form SB-2, effective May 11, 2001 (Registration No. 333-55658), as amended)
  3 .2       Company’s Bylaws, as amended (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.2 to Registration Statement on Form SB-2, effective May 11, 2001 (Registration No. 333-55658), as amended)
  3 .3       Certificate of Amendment to Certificate of Incorporation dated September 1, 2004
  4 .1       Reference is made to pages 1 — 4 of Exhibit 3.1 and pages 1 — 5 and 12 — 14 of Exhibit 3.2
  4 .2       Form of Common Stock Certificate (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.2 to Registration Statement on Form SB-2, effective May 11, 2001 (Registration No. 333-55658), as amended)
  10 .1*       Employment Agreement with Patrick W. Smith, dated July 1, 1998 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 to Registration Statement on Form SB-2 effective May 11, 2001 (Registration No. 333-55658), as amended)
  10 .2*       Employment Agreement with Thomas P. Smith, dated November 15, 2000 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2 to Registration Statement on Form SB-2 effective May 11, 2001 (Registration No. 333-55658), as amended)
  10 .3*       Employment Agreement with Kathleen C. Hanrahan, dated November 15, 2000 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.3 to Registration Statement on Form SB-2 effective May 11, 2001 (Registration No. 333-55658), as amended)
  10 .4*       Form of Indemnification Agreement between the Company and its directors (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.4 to Registration Statement on Form SB-2 effective May 11, 2001 (Registration No. 333-55658), as amended)
  10 .5*       Form of Indemnification Agreement between the Company and its officers (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.5 to Registration Statement on Form SB-2 effective May 11, 2001 (Registration No. 333-55658), as amended)
  10 .6*       1999 Employee Stock Option Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.6 to Registration Statement on Form SB-2, effective May 11, 2001 (Registration No. 333-55658), as amended)
  10 .7*       2001 Stock Option Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.7 to Registration Statement on Form SB-2, effective May 11, 2001 (Registration No. 333-55658), as amended)
  10 .8*       Form of Warrant issued to Bruce Culver and Phil Smith (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.8 to Registration Statement on Form SB-2 effective May 11, 2001 (Registration No. 333-55658), as amended)
  10 .9       Lease between the Company and Norton P. Remes and Joan A. Remes Revocable Trust, dated November 17, 2000 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.14 to Registration Statement on Form SB-2 effective May 11, 2001 (Registration No. 333-55658), as amended)
  10 .10       Form of Sales Representative Agreement with respect to services by and between the Company and Sales Representatives (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.15 to the Annual Report on Form 10-KSB, filed March 15, 2002)
  10 .11       Lease Agreement, dated April 17, 2001, payable to GE Capital Corporation in the amount of $37,945 (incorporated by referenced to Exhibit 10.13 to the Annual Report on Form 10-KSB, filed March 15, 2002)
  10 .12*       Employment Agreement with Douglas E. Klint, dated December 15, 2002 (incorporated by referenced to Exhibit 10.14 to the Annual Report on Form 10-KSB, filed March 15, 2002)

28


Table of Contents

             
Exhibit    
Number   Description
     
  10 .13       Credit Agreement dated July 13, 2004, between the Company and Bank One
  10 .14       Employment Agreement with Daniel Behrendt, dated April 28, 2004
  10 .15       2004 Stock Option Plan
  10 .16       TASER 2004 Outside Directors Stock Option Plan
  14 .1       Code of Ethics, as adopted by the Company’s Board of Directors
  23 .1       Consent of Deloitte & Touche, LLP, independent auditors
  31 .1       Chief Executive Officer Certification pursuant to Rule 13a-14(a) or Rule 15d-14(a)
  31 .2       Chief Financial Officer Certification pursuant to Rule 13a-14(a) or Rule 15d-14(a)
  32 .1       Chief Executive Officer Certification pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350 as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.
  32 .2       Chief Financial Officer Certification pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350 as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.
  99 .1       Certain Factors to Consider in Connection with Forward-Looking Statements
 
Management contract or compensatory plan or arrangement
Financial Statements:
      The Financial Statements listed below are located after the signature page and begin on page F-1.
         
Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
    F-1  
Balance Sheets as of December 31, 2004 and 2003
    F-2  
Statements of Income for the Years Ended December 31, 2004 and 2003
    F-3  
Statements of Stockholders’ Equity for the Years Ended December 31, 2004 and 2003
    F-4  
Statements of Cash Flows for the Years Ended December 31, 2004 and 2003
    F-5  
Notes to Financial Statements
    F-6  
Item 14. Principal Accountant Fees and Services
      Aggregate fees billed to the Company by Deloitte & Touche LLP were as follows:
                 
    2004   2003
         
Audit Fees
  $ 215,057     $ 91,000  
Audit Related Fees
           
Tax Fees
    33,351       21,250  
All other Fees
    500       1,000  
Audit Committee Pre-Approval Procedures for Independent Auditor-Provided Services
      The Audit Committee of the Board of Directors has the sole authority to engage the Company’s independent public accounting firm for audit services and must pre-approve all tax and other non-audit services to be provided by such independent public accounting firm prior to the performance of any such service. The Chairperson of the Audit Committee, acting alone, may approve any non-audit service in an amount of up to $5,000. Approval for all audit services and for non-audit services greater that $5,000 is evaluated during the audit committee meetings. Any non-audit services approved by the Chairperson of the Audit Committee, acting alone, are reported to the full Audit Committee at the first meeting following approval by the Chairperson.

29


Table of Contents

SIGNATURES
      In accordance with the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.
  TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.
Date: March 31, 2005
  By:  /s/ PATRICK W. SMITH
 
 
  Patrick W. Smith
  Chief Executive Officer
Date: March 31, 2005
  By:  /s/ DANIEL M. BEHRENDT
 
 
  Daniel M. Behrendt
  Chief Financial Officer
  (Principal Financial and Accounting Officer)
POWER OF ATTORNEY
      KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, that each person whose signature appears below hereby constitutes and appoints Patrick W. Smith and Daniel M. Behrendt, and each of them acting individually, as his attorney-in-fact, each with full power of substitution, for him, in any and all capacities, to sign any and all amendments to this Annual Report on Form 10-KSB, and to file the same, with exhibits thereto and other documents in connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission, hereby ratifying and confirming our signatures as they may be signed by our said attorney to any and all amendments to said report.
      In accordance with the Exchange Act, this report has been signed by the following persons on behalf of the registrant and in the capacities and on the dates indicated.
             
            Date
             
 
/s/ PATRICK W. SMITH
 
Patrick W. Smith
  Director   March 31, 2005
 
/s/ THOMAS P. SMITH
 
Thomas P. Smith
  Director   March 31, 2005
 
/s/ PHILLIPS W. SMITH
 
Phillips W. Smith
  Director   March 31, 2005
 
/s/ MATTHEW R. MCBRADY
 
Matthew R. McBrady
  Director   March 31, 2005
 
/s/ BRUCE R. CULVER
 
Bruce R. Culver
  Director   March 31, 2005
 
/s/ BERNARD B. KERIK
 
Bernard B. Kerik
  Director   March 31, 2005
 
/s/ MARK W. KROLL
 
Mark W. Kroll
  Director   March 31, 2005

30


Table of Contents

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
To the Board of Directors and Stockholders of
TASER International, Inc.
Scottsdale, Arizona
      We have audited the accompanying balance sheets of TASER International, Inc. (the “Company”) as of December 31, 2004 and 2003, and the related statements of income, stockholders’ equity, and cash flows for the years then ended. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.
      We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. The Company is not required to have, nor were we engaged to perform, an audit of its internal control over financial reporting. An audit includes consideration of internal control over financial reporting as a basis for designing audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such opinion. An audit also includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.
      In our opinion, such financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of TASER International, Inc. as of December 31, 2004 and 2003, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for the years then ended, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.
  /s/ DELOITTE & TOUCHE LLP
 
 
  Deloitte & Touche LLP
Phoenix, Arizona
March 31, 2005

F-1


Table of Contents

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.
BALANCE SHEETS
                 
    December 31,
     
    2004   2003
         
ASSETS
Current Assets                
Cash and cash equivalents
  $ 14,757,159     $ 15,878,326  
Short-term investments
    17,201,477        
Accounts receivable, net of allowance
    8,460,112       5,404,333  
Inventory
    6,840,051       3,125,974  
Prepaids and other assets
    1,639,734       536,815  
Income tax receivable
    52,973       292,321  
Deferred income tax asset
    11,083,422       1,137,196  
             
Total Current Assets
    60,034,928       26,374,965  
Long-term investments
    18,071,815        
Property and Equipment, net
    14,756,512       3,946,881  
Deferred Income Tax Asset
    12,126,765        
Intangible Assets
    1,279,116       1,122,844  
             
Total Assets
  $ 106,269,136     $ 31,444,690  
             
 
LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
Current Liabilities
               
Notes payable
  $     $ 250,000  
Current portion of capital lease obligations
    4,642       15,223  
Accounts payable and accrued liabilities
    8,432,066       3,444,346  
Customer deposits
    102,165       185,802  
             
Total Current Liabilities
    8,538,873       3,895,371  
Capital Lease Obligations, net of current portion
          3,655  
Deferred Revenue
    607,856       78,093  
Deferred Income Tax Liability
          40,121  
             
Total Liabilities
    9,146,729       4,017,240  
             
Commitments and Contingencies
               
Stockholders’ Equity
               
Preferred Stock, $0.00001 par value per share; 25 million shares authorized; 0 shares issued and outstanding at December 31, 2004 and 2003
           
Common Stock, $0.00001 par value per share; 200 million shares authorized; 60,992,156 and 50,698,824 shares issued and outstanding at December 31, 2004 and 2003
    609       507  
Additional Paid-in Capital
    72,819,368       22,249,321  
Retained Earnings
    24,302,430       5,177,622  
             
Total Stockholders’ Equity
    97,122,407       27,427,450  
             
Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
  $ 106,269,136     $ 31,444,690  
             
The accompanying notes are an integral part of these financial statements.

F-2


Table of Contents

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.
STATEMENTS OF INCOME
                 
    For the Year Ended
    December 31,
     
    2004   2003
         
Net Sales
  $ 67,639,879     $ 24,455,506  
             
Cost of Products Sold:
               
Direct manufacturing expense
    16,898,559       6,973,757  
Indirect manufacturing expense
    5,556,937       2,428,859  
             
Total Cost of Products Sold
    22,455,496       9,402,616  
             
Gross Margin
    45,184,383       15,052,890  
Sales, general and administrative expenses
    13,485,256       6,973,721  
Research and development expenses
    823,593       498,470  
             
Income from Operations
    30,875,534       7,580,699  
Interest income
    439,450       50,375  
Interest expense
    (1,485 )     (9,307 )
Other income (expense), net
    2,309       (254,476 )
             
Income before income taxes
    31,315,808       7,367,291  
Provision for income tax
    12,191,000       2,913,601  
             
Net Income
  $ 19,124,808     $ 4,453,690  
             
Income per common and common equivalent shares
               
Basic
  $ 0.33     $ 0.12  
Diluted
  $ 0.31     $ 0.10  
Weighted average number of common and common equivalent shares outstanding
               
Basic
    57,232,329       37,889,640  
Diluted
    62,319,590       46,598,312  
The accompanying notes are an integral part of these financial statements.

F-3


Table of Contents

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.
STATEMENTS OF STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
For the Years Ended December 31, 2004 and 2003
                                         
    Common Stock   Additional       Total
        Paid-In   Retained   Stockholders’
    Shares   Amount   Capital   Earnings   Equity
                     
Balance, December 31, 2002
    33,712,716     $ 337     $ 5,290,332     $ 723,932     $ 6,014,601  
Exercise of stock options
    2,941,692       29       1,819,541               1,819,570  
Exercise of warrants
    99,996       1       1,832               1,833  
Exercise of underwriter warrants
    1,290,504       13       947,005               947,018  
Exercise of public warrants
    12,653,916       127       10,051,541               10,051,668  
Stock options granted for payment of consulting fees
                    177,142               177,142  
Income tax effect of stock options exercised
                    3,961,928               3,961,928  
Net income
                            4,453,690       4,453,690  
                               
Balance, December 31, 2003
    50,698,824       507       22,249,321       5,177,622       27,427,450  
Exercise of stock options
    6,912,892       68       13,084,744               13,084,812  
Exercise of private warrants
    270,208       3       74,997               75,000  
Exercise of public warrants
    3,110,232       31       2,470,034               2,470,065  
Stock options granted for payment of consulting fees
                    625,714               625,714  
Income tax effect of stock options exercised
                    34,314,558               34,314,558  
Net income
                            19,124,808       19,124,808  
                               
Balance, December 31, 2004
    60,992,156     $ 609     $ 72,819,368     $ 24,302,430     $ 97,122,407  
                               
The accompanying notes are an integral part of these financial statements.

F-4


Table of Contents

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.
STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
                   
    For the Year Ended December 31,
     
    2004   2003
         
Cash Flows from Operating Activities:
               
Net income
  $ 19,124,808     $ 4,453,690  
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:
               
Loss on disposal of assets
          15,873  
Depreciation and amortization
    551,793       393,568  
Provision for doubtful accounts
    90,000       12,908  
Provision for warranty
    361,058       302,165  
Compensatory stock options and warrants
    625,714       177,142  
Deferred income taxes
    727,892       (369,627 )
Stock option tax benefit
    11,473,554       3,315,339  
Change in assets and liabilities:
               
 
Accounts receivable
    (3,145,779 )     (4,529,099 )
 
Inventory
    (3,714,077 )     (791,165 )
 
Prepaids and other assets
    (1,102,919 )     (423,066 )
 
Income tax receivable
    239,348       (217,369 )
 
Accounts payable and accrued liabilities
    5,156,425       1,853,114  
 
Customer deposits
    (83,637 )     171,074  
             
Net cash provided by operating activities
    30,304,180       4,366,546  
             
Cash Flows from Investing Activities:
               
 
Purchases of investments
    (35,273,292 )      
 
Purchases of property and equipment
    (11,322,299 )     (3,651,110 )
 
Purchases of intangible assets
    (195,397 )     (565,110 )
             
Net cash used in investing activities
    (46,790,988 )     (4,216,220 )
             
Cash Flows from Financing Activities:
               
 
Payments under capital leases
    (14,236 )     (34,026 )
 
Payments on notes payable
    (250,000 )     (250,000 )
 
Payments on revolving line of credit
          (385,000 )
 
Proceeds from warrants exercised
    2,545,065       11,000,519  
 
Proceeds from options exercised
    13,084,812       1,819,570  
             
Net cash provided by financing activities
    15,365,641       12,151,063  
             
Net (Decrease) Increase in Cash and Cash Equivalents
    (1,121,167 )     12,301,389  
Cash and Cash Equivalents, beginning of period
    15,878,326       3,576,937  
             
Cash and Cash Equivalents, end of period
  $ 14,757,159     $ 15,878,326  
             
Supplemental Disclosure:
               
Cash paid for interest
  $ 1,364     $ 9,922  
Cash (refunded) paid for income taxes — net
  $ (264,026 )   $ 202,410  
Non Cash Transactions
               
Increase to deferred tax asset related to tax benefits realized from the exercise of stock options (with a related increase to additional paid in capital of $34,314,558 and 3,961,928)
  $ 22,841,004     $  
Fair Value of stock options issued for payment of consulting and legal fees
  $ 625,714     $ 177,142  
Note Payable issued for purchase of intangible assets
  $     $ 500,000  
The accompanying notes are an integral part of these financial statements.

F-5


Table of Contents

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
1. History and Nature of Organization
      TASER International, Inc. (TASER or the Company) was incorporated and began operations in Arizona in 1993 for the purpose of developing and manufacturing non-lethal, self-defense devices. In February 2001, the Company reincorporated in the State of Delaware. On May 11, 2001, the Company completed its initial public offering (IPO) of 800,000 units at a price of $13 per unit, consisting of one and one-half shares of common stock and one and one-half warrants, each whole warrant to purchase one share of common stock. The net proceeds received, after the underwriting discount and financing costs, totaled approximately $8.4 million.
2. Summary of Significant Accounting Policies
      The accompanying financial statements have been prepared in conformity with accounting principals generally accepted in the United States of America.
a.     Cash and Cash Equivalents and Investments
      Cash and cash equivalents include funds on hand and short-term investments with original maturities of three months or less. Short-term investments include securities generally having original maturities of 90 days to one year. Long-term investments include securities having original maturities of more than one year. The Company has included its investments in auction rate securities in short term investments, and has classified them as available-for-sale. At December 31, 2004 the Company had $10.0 million of these auction rate securities that were recorded at fair value. The cost of these investments approximates fair value due to their variable interest rates, which typically reset every 7 to 28 days despite the long-term nature of their stated contractual maturities. The remaining short-term and long-term investments are invested in governmental debt securities, and are classified as held to maturity. These investments are recorded at amortized cost, which approximates fair value. The Company intends to hold these securities until maturity. The short-term investments, other than the auction rate securities mentioned above, have maturities of less than one year. At December 31, 2004, the Company had $18.1 million of long-term investments. The Company held $15.6 million of long-term investments with maturities between one and three years, and a $2.5 million investment with a final maturity of ten years. The Company’s cash and investment accounts earned interest at an approximate rate of 1.3% during 2004 and 1.0% in 2003. The Company’s cash with its bank of $14.8 million is in excess of the FDIC insurance coverage limit of $100,000.
      The Company has revised its classification of certain securities. In connection with the preparation of this report, the Company concluded that it was appropriate to classify auction rate securities as short-term investments. Previously, such investments had been classified as cash and cash equivalents. Accordingly, the Company has revised the classification to report these securities as short-term investments as of December 31, 2004. The Company has now included the investment in these notes in the cash flows from investing activities.
b.     Inventory
      Inventories are stated at the lower of cost or market; cost is determined using the most recent acquisition cost which approximates the first-in, first-out (FIFO) method. Inventories consisted of the following at December 31:
                 
    2004   2003
         
Raw materials and work-in-process
  $ 5,198,716     $ 2,294,465  
Finished goods
    1,641,335       831,509  
             
Total Inventory
  $ 6,840,051     $ 3,125,974  
             

F-6


Table of Contents

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)
c.     Property and Equipment
      Property and equipment are stated at cost net of accumulated depreciation. Additions and improvements are capitalized while ordinary maintenance and repair expenditures are charged to expense as incurred. Depreciation is calculated using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the assets.
d.     Long-Lived Assets
      The Company continually evaluates whether events and circumstances have occurred that indicate the remaining estimated useful life of long-lived assets and identifiable intangible assets may warrant revision or that the remaining balance of these assets may not be recoverable. In performing the review for recoverability, the Company estimates the future undiscounted cash flows expected to result from the use of the assets and its eventual disposition. The amount of the impairment loss, if impairment exists, would be calculated based on the excess of the carrying amounts of the assets over its estimated fair value. No impairment losses were recorded in 2004 or 2003.
e.     Customer Deposits
      The Company requires certain deposits in advance of shipment for foreign customer sales orders.
f.     Accounts Payable and Accrued Liabilities
      Accounts payable and accrued liabilities consisted of the following as of December 31, 2004 and 2003:
                 
    2004   2003
         
Accounts Payable
  $ 6,414,932     $ 2,179,634  
Accrued Salaries Expense
    300,380       436,674  
Current Portion of Deferred Revenue
    399,421       31,697  
Accrued Expenses
    859,419       483,407  
Accrued Warranty Expense
    457,914       312,934  
             
Total
  $ 8,432,066     $ 3,444,346  
             
g.     Cost of Products Sold
      At December 31, 2004 and 2003, cost of products sold included the manufacturing costs, including materials, labor and overhead related to finished goods and components, and direct expenses associated with research work completed under the Company’s research grant with the Office of Naval Research (ONR). Shipping costs incurred related to product delivery are also included in cost of products sold.
h.     Revenue Recognition
      The Company recognizes revenues when persuasive evidence of an arrangement exists, delivery has occurred or services have been rendered, title has transferred, the price is fixed and collectability is reasonably assured. All of the Company’s sales are final and our customers do not have a right to return the product. Certain of the Company’s customers are charged shipping fees, which are recorded as a component of net sales. Training revenue is recorded as the service is provided.
      Also included as a component of revenue is development funding provided by the ONR, under a cost-plus fixed fee contract. Periodically, an invoice summarizing the reimbursable expenses is submitted to the ONR for payment. The payment request details the costs expensed in the period and adds a nominal profit. The total

F-7


Table of Contents

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)
amount recognized for this work in 2004 was $12,362 compared to the $276,617 recognized in 2003. The Company recognizes grant revenue when milestones have been completed.
      In 2003 the Company began offering customers the right to purchase extended warranties on the ADVANCED TASER products and TASER X26 products. Revenue for warranty purchases is deferred at the time of sale, and recognized over the warranty period. The extended warranties range from two to four years. At December 31, 2004, $839,427 was deferred under this program. At December 31, 2003, $109,790 was deferred under this program. In 2004 the Company began selling a private citizen version of its TASER X26 product. This product comes with a certificate for a free training session. The Company is deferring the revenue associated with the cost of these trainings until such time as the training has occurred. The Company has valued these one-on-one training sessions at their estimated fair value, which is the amount that the Company will pay the person conducting the training. The Company also defers the recognition of revenue associated with background checks (at the cost of doing the background checks) that are done as part of the private citizen sales process until the background check is done and the private citizen purchases the product. The Company has also deferred recognizing revenue associated with the training for Federal Firearms Licensed dealers which will be trained as part of the distribution agreement signed in 2004. The Company will recognize this revenue as the training is provided. At December 31, 2004, $167,850 was deferred under the X26 C program.
i.     Use of Estimates
      The preparation of financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates.
j.     Advertising Costs
      In accordance with Statement of Position 93-7 “Reporting on Advertising Costs,” the Company expenses the production cost of advertising as incurred. The Company incurred advertising costs of $605,735 and $216,893 in 2004 and 2003, respectively. Advertising costs are included in sales, general and administrative expenses in the accompanying statements of income.
k.     Warranty Costs
      The Company warrants its product from manufacturing defects for a period of one year after purchase, and will replace any defective TASER unit for a fee. The Company tracks historical data related to returns and related warranty costs on a quarterly basis, and estimates future warranty claims by applying the estimated average return rate to the product sales for the period. Historically the reserve amount is increased if the Company becomes aware of a component failure that could result in larger than anticipated returns from our customers. A summary of changes in the warranty accrual for the two-year period ended December 31, 2004 is as follows:
                 
    2004   2003
         
Balance at Beginning of Period
  $ 312,934     $ 59,875  
Utilization of Accrual
    (216,078 )     (49,106 )
Warranty Expense
    361,058       302,165  
             
Balance at End of the Period
  $ 457,914     $ 312,934  
             

F-8


Table of Contents

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)
      After the one year warranty expires, if the device fails to operate properly for any reason, the Company will replace the ADVANCED TASER device for a fee of $75, and the TASER X26 on a time and materials basis. These fees are intended to help defray the handling and repair costs associated with product returns.
l.     Research and Development Expenses
      The Company expenses research and development costs as incurred. The Company incurred product development expense of $823,593 and $498,470 in 2004 and 2003, respectively.
m.     Income Taxes
      Income taxes are accounted for under the asset and liability method. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognized for the future tax consequences attributable to differences between the financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases and operating loss and tax credit carry forwards. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured using enacted tax rates expected to apply to taxable income in future years in which those temporary differences are expected to be recovered or settled. The effect on deferred tax assets and liabilities of a change in tax rate is recognized in income in the period that includes the enactment date.
n.     Concentration of Credit Risk and Major Customers
      Financial instruments that potentially subject the Company to concentrations of credit risk consist of accounts receivable. Sales are typically made on credit and the Company generally does not require collateral. The Company performs ongoing credit evaluations of its customers’ financial condition and maintains an allowance for estimated potential losses. Accounts receivable are presented net of an allowance for doubtful accounts. The allowance for bad debts totaled $120,000 and $30,000 as of December 31, 2004 and 2003, respectively.
      The Company sells primarily through a network of unaffiliated distributors. The Company also reserves the right to sell directly to the end user to secure its credit interests. In 2004, the Company had three distributors that met or exceeded 10% of total sales; one of which represented 14% of sales, and two of which individually represented 10% of sales. No other customer exceeded 10% of product sales in 2004. Sales to one U.S. customer represented 15% of total product sales for 2003. No other customer exceeded 10% of total product sales in 2003.
      At December 31, 2004, the Company had receivables from two customers comprising 21% and 16% of the aggregate accounts receivable balance. These customers are unaffiliated distributors of the Company’s products. At December 31, 2003, the Company had a receivable from one customer comprising 19% of the aggregate accounts receivable balance. This customer was one of the ten largest U.S. police forces.
      The Company currently purchases finished circuit boards and injection-molded plastic components from suppliers located in the Phoenix area. Although the Company currently obtains these components from single source suppliers, the Company owns the injection molded component tooling used in their production. As a result, the Company believes it could obtain alternative suppliers in most cases without incurring significant production delays. The Company also purchases small, machined parts from a vendor in Taiwan, custom cartridge assemblies from a proprietary vendor in Arizona, and electronic components from a variety of foreign and domestic distributors. The Company believes that there are readily available alternative suppliers in most cases who can consistently meet our needs for these components. The Company acquires most of its components on a purchase order basis and does not have long-term contracts with suppliers.

F-9


Table of Contents

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)
o.     Financial Instruments
      The Company’s financial instruments include cash, accounts receivable and accounts payable. Due to the short-term nature of these instruments, the fair value of these instruments approximates their recorded value. The Company also has short and long term investments and auction rate securities that the Company classifies as short-term investments which it also records at fair value. The Company had $10.0 million of auction rate securities at December 31, 2004. The Company intends to hold the remaining investments to maturity and thus has not marked them to market.
p.     Segment Information
      Management has determined that its operations are comprised of one reportable segment.
      For the years ended December 31, 2004 and 2003, sales by product were as follows (amounts in thousands):
                                 
    2004   2003
         
Sales by Product Line
                               
TASER X26
  $ 46,083       68%     $ 8,066       33%  
ADVANCED TASER
    3,929       6%       15,412       63%  
AIR TASER
    107       0%       411       2%  
Single Cartridges
    14,655       22%             0%  
Research Funding
    12       0%       277       1%  
Other
    2,854       4%       290       1%  
                         
Total
  $ 67,640       100%     $ 24,456       100%  
                         
Sales by Geographic Area
                               
United States
    96 %             88 %        
Other Countries
    4 %             12 %        
                         
Total
    100 %             100 %        
                         
      Sales to customers outside of the United States are denominated in U.S. dollars.
q.     Stock-Based Compensation
      At December 31, 2004, the Company had three stock-based employee compensation plans, which are described more fully in Note 9. The Company accounts for those plans under the recognition and measurement principles of Accounting Principles Board Opinion No. 25, Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees, and related Interpretations. No stock-based employee based compensation cost is reflected in net income, as all options granted under those plans had an exercise price equal to the market value of the underlying common stock on the date of grant. The Company granted stock options to consultants in prior years which were subject to variable accounting. The Company accelerated the vesting of these options, and recognized approximately $626,000 of consulting expense in 2004 relating to the fair value of all such options. The following table illustrates the effect on net income and earnings per share if the Company had applied the fair value recognition provisions of Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) Statement No. 123, Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation (FAS 123), to stock-based employee compensation. Beginning

F-10


Table of Contents

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)
July 1, 2005, the Company will account for its stock-based employee compensation plans in accordance with FAS 123R, see Note s.
                 
    For the Year Ended
    December 31,
     
    2004   2003
         
    (In thousands)
Net Income, as reported
  $ 19,125     $ 4,454  
Add: Total stock-based compensation included in net income as reported
    626       177  
Deduct: Total stock-based employee compensation determined under fair value based method for all awards, net of related tax effects
    (7,746 )     (1,337 )
             
Pro Forma Net Income
  $ 12,005     $ 3,294  
             
Net Income per common share:
               
Basic, as reported
  $ 0.33     $ 0.12  
Basic, pro forma
  $ 0.21     $ 0.09  
Diluted, as reported
  $ 0.31     $ 0.10  
Diluted, pro forma
  $ 0.19     $ 0.07  
      The fair value of option grants in 2004 and 2003 were estimated on the grant date using the Black-Scholes option pricing model with the following weighted average assumptions:
                 
Range of volatility
    101-105 %     91-103 %
Risk-free interest rate
    3.0 %     3.0 %
Dividend rate
    0.0 %     0.0 %
Expected life of options
    1.5 to 3 years       3 years  
Basic
    57,232,329       37,889,640  
Diluted
    62,319,590       46,598,312  
r.     Income Per Common Share
      The Company accounts for earnings per share in accordance with SFAS No. 128, “Earnings per Share.” Basic income per share is computed by dividing net income by the weighted average number of common shares outstanding during the periods presented. Diluted income per share reflects the potential dilution that

F-11


Table of Contents

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)
could occur if outstanding stock options were exercised. The calculation of the weighted average number of shares outstanding and earnings per share are as follows:
                 
    Earnings Per Share For the
    Year Ended December 31,
     
    2004   2003
         
Numerator for basic and diluted earnings per share
               
Net Income
  $ 19,124,808     $ 4,453,690  
             
Denominator for basic earnings per share — weighted average shares outstanding
    57,232,329       37,889,640  
Dilutive effect of shares issuable under stock options outstanding
    5,087,261       8,708,672  
             
Denominator for diluted earnings per share — adjusted weighted average shares
    62,319,590       46,598,312  
             
Net Income per common share
               
Basic
  $ 0.33     $ 0.12  
Diluted
  $ 0.31     $ 0.10  
      Basic net income per share is based upon the weighted average number of common shares outstanding during the period.
s.     Recent Accounting Pronouncements
      In November 2003, the EITF issued EITF 00-21, “Revenue Arrangements with Multiple Deliverables,” EITF 00-21 prescribes a method to account for contracts that have multiple elements or deliverables. It provides guidance on how to allocate the value of a contract to its different deliverables, as well as guidance on when to recognize revenue allocated to each deliverable over its performance period. The Company is required to adopt EITF 00-21 for revenue arrangements entered into in fiscal periods beginning after June 15, 2003. EITF 00-21 was used as the basis for the deferral of revenue relating to the sale of X26 C TASER devise which had multiple deliverables. As stated earlier, the Company is deferring the revenue associated with the one-on-one training included with the purchase of an X26 C device, the revenue associated with conducting background checks on purchasers of the X26 C devices, and training for Federal Firearms Licensed dealers who will sell the X26 C device at their location. At December 31, 2004, the Company had deferred approximately $168,000 of revenue associated with these future deliverables.
      In November 2004, the FASB issued SFAS No. 151, “Inventory Costs, an amendment of ARB No. 43, Chapter 4.” SFAS No. 151 amends the guidance in ARB No. 43, “Inventory Pricing,” for abnormal amounts of idle facility expense, freight, handling costs, and wasted material (spoilage) requiring that those items be recognized as current-period expenses regardless of whether they meet the criterion as “so abnormal.” This statement also requires that allocation of fixed production overheads to the costs of conversion be based on the normal capacity of the production facilities. The statement is effective for inventory costs incurred after June 15, 2005. Management does not expect this statement to have a material impact on the Company’s financial position or results of operations.
      In December 2004, the FASB issued SFAS No. 153, “Exchanges of Nonmonetary Assets, an amendment of APB Opinion No. 29, “Accounting for Nonmonetary Transactions,” is based on the principle that exchanges of nonmonetary assets should be measured based on the fair value of the assets exchanged. SFAS No. 153 amends APB Opinion No. 29, eliminating the exception to fair value accounting for nonmonetary exchanges of similar productive assets and replaces it with a general exception of fair value accounting for nonmonetary exchanges that do not have a commercial substance. A nonmonetary exchange has commercial substance if the future cash flows of the entity are expected to change significantly as a result

F-12


Table of Contents

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)
of the exchange. The statement is effective for nonmonetary asset exchanges occurring in fiscal periods beginning after June 15, 2005. Management does not expect this statement to have a material impact on the Company’s financial position or results of operations.
      In December 2004, the FASB issued SFAS No. 123R, “Share-based Payment.” This standard is a revision of SFAS No. 123, Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation, and supersedes Accounting Principles Board Opinion No. 25, Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees, and its related implementation guidance. SFAS No. 123R requires the measurement of the cost of employees services received in exchange for an award of the entity’s equity instruments based on the grant-date fair value of the award. The cost will be recognized over the period during which an employee is required to provide service in exchange for the award. No compensation cost is recognized for equity instruments for which employees do not render service. SFAS No. 123R also requires the benefits of tax deductions in excess of recognized compensation cost be reported as a financing cash flow rather than as an operating cash flow as required under current literature. This requirement will reduce net cash flows from operating activities in periods after the adoption. The Company will adopt SFAS No. 123R on July 1, 2005, which will require stock-based compensation expense to be recognized in earnings for the portion of outstanding unvested awards, based on the grant date fair value of those awards. The Company is currently evaluating the transition provisions of this standard; and to what extent the Company’s equity instruments will be used in the future for employees’ services. Therefore, the impact on the Company’s financial statements of the adoption of SFAS No. 123R cannot be predicted with certainty.
      Reclassifications: certain reclassifications were made to the 2003 amounts to conform to the 2004 presentation.
3. Property and Equipment
      Property and equipment consist of the following at December 31, 2004 and 2003:
                     
    Estimated        
    Useful Life   2004   2003
             
Leasehold Improvements
  Lease Term   $ 90,658     $ 56,198  
Land
        2,899,962       2,899,962  
Building/ Construction in Progress
        8,689,046       131,980  
Production Equipment
  5 Years     1,555,988       1,159,886  
Telephone Equipment
  5 Years     35,555       35,555  
Computer Equipment
  3-5 Years     2,501,928       812,869  
Furniture and Office Equipment
  5-7 Years     834,728       189,117  
                 
Total Cost
        16,607,865       5,285,567  
Less: Accumulated Depreciation
        1,851,353       1,338,686  
                 
Net Property and Equipment
      $ 14,756,512     $ 3,946,881  
                 
      Depreciation expense for the years ended December 31, 2004 and 2003 was $512,668 and $363,899, respectively.

F-13


Table of Contents

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)
4. Intangible Assets
      Intangible assets consist of the following at December 31, 2004 and 2003:
                     
    Useful Life   2004   2003
             
TASER.com Domain Name
  5 Years   $ 60,000     $ 60,000  
U.S. Patents
  6.5 to 14 Years     128,360       128,360  
Patents Pending
  17 Years     232,147       36,750  
Non Compete Agreement
  7 Years     50,000       50,000  
TASER Trademark
  Indefinite     900,000       900,000  
                 
Total Cost
        1,370,507       1,175,110  
Less: Accumulated Amortization
        91,391       52,266  
                 
Net Intangible Assets
      $ 1,279,116     $ 1,122,844  
                 
      Intangible assets with finite lives are being amortized over a period of 5 to 17 years depending upon their estimated useful lives. Amortization expense for the years ended December 31, 2004 and 2003 was $39,125 and $29,669, respectively. In June 2003, the remaining balance on the Company’s 2002 TASER trademark was written down to zero because clear title to the mark could not be established. Subsequently, in 2003, as a result of the acquisition of the assets of Tasertron, as described in Note 8, the Company obtained clear title to the TASER trademarks.
      Estimated amortization for intangible assets for the next five years is as follows:
         
2005
  $ 39,125  
2006
    31,125  
2007
    27,126  
2008
    27,126  
2009
    15,267  
5. Commitments and Contingencies
a.     Operating Leases
      The Company has entered into operating leases for office space and equipment. Rent expense under these leases for the years ended December 31, 2004 and 2003, was $339,524 and $162,743, respectively.
      Future Minimum lease payments under operating leases as of December 31, 2004, are as follows for the years ending December 31:
         
2005
  $ 197,400  
2006
    19,788  
2007
    4,113  
2008
     
Thereafter
     
       
    $ 221,301  
       
b.     Purchase Commitments
      The Company has approximately $3,344,000 remaining on the contract to construct its new manufacturing and headquarters facility. The amount due is expected to be paid during 2005.

F-14


Table of Contents

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)
c.     Litigation
Securities Litigation
      On January 10, 2005, a securities class action lawsuit was filed in the United States District Court for the District of Arizona against the Company and certain of its officers and directors, captioned Malasky v. TASER International, Inc., et al. , Case No. 2:05 CV 115. Since then, numerous other securities class action lawsuits were filed against the Company and certain of its officers and directors. The majority of these lawsuits were filed in the District of Arizona. Four actions were filed in the United States District Court for the Southern District of New York. The parties in three of the New York actions have agreed to transfer the cases to the District of Arizona, and defendants are in the process of seeking the transfer of the fourth New York action to the District of Arizona. The parties’ have submitted a proposed order to consolidate all actions in the District of Arizona under the Malasky case file.
      These actions are filed on behalf of the purchasers of the Company’s stock in various class periods, beginning as early as May 29, 2003 and ending as late as January 14, 2005. The complaints allege, among other things, violations of Section 10(b) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and Rule 10b-5, promulgated there under, and seeks unspecified monetary damages and other relief against all defendants. The complaints allege generally that the Company and the individual defendants made false or misleading public statements regarding, among other things, the safety of the Company’s products and the Company’s ability to meet its sales goals, including the validity of a $1.5 million sales order with one of the Company’s distributors in the fourth quarter of 2004.
      Pursuant to a proposed order, which has been submitted to the court, defendants need not respond to any of the complaints originally filed in these actions. Plaintiffs will file an amended consolidated complaint after lead plaintiff and lead counsel are chosen. Defendants will then respond to the amended consolidated complaint.
Shareholder Derivative Litigation
      On January 11, 2005, a shareholder derivative lawsuit was filed in the United States District Court for the District of Arizona purportedly on behalf of the Company and against certain of its officers and directors, captioned Goldfine v. Culver, et al. , Case No. 2:05 CV 123. Since then, five other shareholder derivative lawsuits were filed in the District of Arizona, two shareholder derivative lawsuits were filed in the Arizona Superior Court, Maricopa County, and one shareholder derivative lawsuit was filed in the Delaware Chancery Court. On February 9, 2005, the shareholder derivative actions pending in federal court were consolidated into a single action under the caption, In re TASER International Shareholder Derivative Litigation, Case No. 2:05 CV 123. Pursuant to the consolidating order, defendants will not respond to any of the complaints originally in these actions. Instead, defendants will respond to plaintiffs’ consolidated amended complaint. Defendants have not responded to the cases filed in the Arizona Superior Court or in Delaware Chancery Court.
      The complaints in the shareholder derivative lawsuits generally allege that the defendants breached the fiduciary duties owed to the Company and its shareholders by reason of their positions as officers and/or directors of the Company. The complaints claim that such duties were breached by defendants’ disclosure of allegedly false or misleading statements about the safety and effectiveness of Company products and the Company’s financial prospects. The complaints also claim that fiduciary duties were breached by defendants’ alleged use of non-public information regarding the safety of Company products and the Company’s financial condition and future business prospects for personal gain through the sale of the Company’s stock. The Company is named solely as a nominal defendant against which no recovery is sought.

F-15


Table of Contents

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)
Securities and Exchange Commission Informal Inquiry
      The Securities and Exchange Commission has initiated an informal inquiry into Taser with respect to the basis for the Company’s public statements concerning the safety and performance of the Company’s products, disclosure issues and the accounting for certain transactions. The inquiry is ongoing.
Contract Litigation
      In March 2000, Thomas N. Hennigan, a distributor of our products from late 1997 through early 2000, sued us in the United States District Court, Southern District of New York. We had previously sued him in February of that year but had not served him. After the New York case was dismissed in February 2001 for lack of personal jurisdiction, Mr. Hennigan brought a counterclaim in the United States District Court for the District of Arizona. Mr. Hennigan claims the exclusive right to sell our products to many of the largest law enforcement, corrections, and military agencies in the United States. He seeks monetary damages that may amount to as much as $400 million against us allegedly arising in connection with his service to us as a distributor. His claims rest on theories of our failure to pay commissions, breach of contract, promissory estoppel, breach of fiduciary duty, and on related theories. No written contract was ever signed with Mr. Hennigan. We also believe that he has no reasonable basis for claims based on informal or implied contractual rights and will be unable to prove his damages with reasonable certainty. Mr. Hennigan died in April 2001 and the case is now being prosecuted by his estate. On May 24, 2002, H.A. Russell was permitted to proceed as an additional defendant-counterclaimant. The Company filed various motions in November 2002 for partial summary judgment including one to dismiss his claims. On September 30, 2003, the Court issued an order granting the Company’s motion for partial summary judgment to dismiss Mr. Russell’s claims and struck Hennigan’s jury demand. On April 14, 2004, the Court issued an opinion partially granting the Company’s motion for partial summary judgment on certain joint venture, post-termination, post-death and exclusivity claims. A pretrial conference was held on February 18, 2005 and no trial date has been set.
      In September 2004 the Company was served with a summons and complaint in the matter of Roy Tailors Uniform Co., Inc. v. TASER International in which the plaintiff alleges that it is entitled to commissions for disputed sales that were made to customers that are claimed to be plaintiff’s customers for which plaintiff is seeking monetary damages. Plaintiff failed to sign a distributor agreement with the Company and did not have distribution rights with the Company. This case is in the discovery phase and a trial date has not been set.
Product Liability Litigation
      From April 2003 to March 2005, the Company was named as a defendant in 18 lawsuits in which the plaintiffs alleged either wrongful death or personal injury in situations in which the TASER device was used by law enforcement officers or during training exercises. One case has been dismissed with prejudice, another case has been dismissed without prejudice and the balance of the cases are pending. With respect to each of these 18 cases, the table below lists the name of plaintiff, the date of the suit, the jurisdiction in which the case is pending, the type of claim and the status of the matter. In each of these lawsuits, the plaintiff is seeking monetary damages from the Company. We have submitted the defense of each of these lawsuits to our insurance carriers as we maintained during these periods and continue to maintain product liability insurance coverage with varying limits and deductibles. The Company’s product liability insurance coverage during these periods ranged from $5,000,000 to $10,000,000 in coverage limits and from $10,000 to $250,000 in deductibles. The Company is defending each of these lawsuits vigorously. Although the Company does not expect the outcome in any individual case to be material, the outcome of any litigation is inherently uncertain and there can be no assurance that any liability that may ultimately result from the resolution of these matters

F-16


Table of Contents

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)
will not be in excess of amounts provided by insurance coverage and will not have a material adverse effect on our business, operating results or financial condition.
                                 
    Month            
Plaintiff   Served   Jurisdiction   Claim Type   Status
                 
Del’Ostia
    3/2004       US District Court, SD FL       Wrongful Death       Dismissed With Prejudice  
Alvarado
    4/2003       CA Superior Court       Wrongful Death       Discovery Phase  
City of Madera
    6/2003       CA Superior Court       Wrongful Death       Discovery Phase  
Borden
    9/2004       US District Court, SD IN       Wrongful Death       Discovery Phase  
Thompson
    9/2004       MI Circuit Court       Wrongful Death       Discovery Phase  
Pierson
    11/2004       US District Court, CD CA       Wrongful Death       Discovery Phase  
Glowczenski
    10/2004       US District Court, ED NY       Wrongful Death       Discovery Phase  
LeBlanc
    12/2004       US District Court, CD CA       Wrongful Death       Discovery Phase  
Elsholtz
    12/2004       TX District Court       Wrongful Death       Discovery Phase  
Kerchoff
    6/2004       US District Court, ED MI       Training Injury       Dismissed Without Prejudice  
Powers
    11/2003       AZ Superior Court       Training Injury       June 2005 Trial Scheduled  
Cook
    8/2004       NV District Court       Training Injury       Discovery Phase  
Stevens
    10/2004       OH Court Common Pleas       Training Injury       Discovery Phase  
Eckenroth
    11/2004       AZ Superior Court       Training Injury       Discovery Phase  
Lipa
    2/2005       MI Circuit Court       Training Injury       Discovery Phase  
Dimiceli
    3/2005       FL Circuit Court       Training Injury       Discovery Phase  
Cosby
    8/2004       US District Court, SD NY       Injury During Arrest       Discovery Phase  
Blair
    5/2005       US District Court, MD NC       Injury During Detention       Discovery Phase  
Other Litigation
      In January 2005 the Company filed litigation in U.S. District Court for the Western District of North Carolina against Stinger Systems, Inc. and Robert Gruder alleging false advertising and a violation of the Lanham Act. The defendants have filed a counterclaim against the Company alleging defamation. This case is in the discovery phase and no trial date has been set.
      In February 2005 the Company filed litigation in Superior Court for Maricopa County, Arizona against its former patent attorney, Thomas G. Watkins III, alleging breach of fiduciary duty and estoppel arising out of ownership and inventorship claims Mr. Watkins has made against a patent he filed for the Company for certain technology utilized in the TASER X26 product.
d.     Employment Agreements
      The Company has employment agreements with its President, Chief Executive Officer, Chief Operating Officer, Chief Financial Officer, Vice President of Research and Development and Vice President and General Counsel. The Company may terminate the agreements with or without cause. Should the Company terminate the agreements without cause, upon a change of control of the Company or death of the employee, the employees are entitled to additional compensation. Under these circumstances, these officers and employees may receive the amounts remaining under their contracts upon termination, which would total $1,042,500 in the aggregate at December 31, 2004.

F-17


Table of Contents

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)
6.     Income Taxes
      Significant components of the Company’s deferred tax assets and liabilities are as follows:
                 
    December 31,
     
    2004   2003
         
Current Deferred Income Tax Assets
               
Net operating loss carryforward
  $ 10,494,462     $ 693,756  
Reserves and accruals
    405,684       217,501  
Non-employee stock option expense
    183,276          
Inventory cost capitalization
          225,939  
             
Total Deferred Income Tax Assets
  $ 11,083,422     $ 1,137,196  
             
Long-term Deferred Income Tax Assets (Liabilities)
               
Net operating loss carryforward
  $ 12,346,542     $  
Depreciation
    (185,309 )     (45,102 )
Amortization
    (34,468 )     4,981  
             
Net Deferred Income Tax Asset (Liability)
  $ 12,126,765     $ (40,121 )
             
      At December 31, 2004, the Company has net operating loss carry forwards (“NOL”) for federal and state income tax purposes of approximately $59,165,520. The Company’s federal NOL carryforward expires in 2024. The Company’s state NOL carryforward expires in 2009.
      SFAS 109 requires the reduction of deferred tax assets by a valuation allowance if, based on the weight of all available evidence, it is more likely than not that some or all of the deferred tax asset may not be realized. The Company has determined that no such valuation allowance is necessary.
      Significant components of the federal and state income tax expense are as follows:
                 
    For the Year Ended
    December 31,
     
    2004   2003
         
Current
               
Federal
  $ 9,905,621     $ 2,899,474  
State
    1,557,487       383,754  
             
Total Current
    11,463,108       3,283,228  
             
Deferred
               
Federal
    627,985       (339,350 )
State
    99,907       (30,277 )
             
Total Deferred
    727,892       (369,627 )
             
Provision for Income Taxes
  $ 12,191,000     $ 2,913,601  
             
      A reconciliation of the Company’s effective income tax rate to the federal statutory rate follows:
                 
Federal statutory rate
    35.0%       34.5%  
State tax, net of federal benefit
    3.4%       4.0%  
Nondeductible lobbying expenses
    0.5%       1.0%  
             
Effective income tax rate
    38.9%       39.5%  
             

F-18


Table of Contents

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)
7.     Line of Credit
      On July 13, 2004, the Company entered into a new line of credit agreement to replace its existing line. The new agreement has a total availability of $10 million. The line is secured primarily by the Company’s accounts receivable and inventory and bears interest at varying rates of interest, ranging from LIBOR plus 1.5% to prime. The availability under this line is computed on a monthly borrowing base. The line of credit matures on July 13, 2006 and requires monthly payments of interest only. At December 31, 2004, the available borrowing under the existing line of credit was $6.5 million, and there was no amount outstanding under the line of credit. There were no borrowings under the line during the year ended December 31, 2004.
      The Company’s agreement with the bank requires the Company to comply with certain financial and other covenants including maintenance of minimum tangible net worth and fixed charge coverage. For the year ended December 31, 2004, the Company was in compliance with all requirements.
8.     Notes Payable and Capital Lease Commitments
      At December 31, 2004 and 2003 debt obligations were as follows:
                   
    2004   2003
         
Note Payable, 2003 asset acquisition, 0% interest, balance due on January 2, 2004
  $     $ 250,000  
Capital leases, interest at varying rates of 7% to 23%, due in monthly installments through December 2005, secured by equipment
    4,642       18,878  
             
      4,642       268,878  
Less: current portion
    (4,642 )     (265,223 )
             
 
Total
  $     $ 3,655  
             
      In June 2003, the Company acquired the assets of a competitor who held the TASER trademark. The purchase price for this transaction was $1.0 million. The first $500,000 was paid in cash, and the remaining $500,000 was secured by a note payable backed by an irrevocable letter of credit in the amount of $500,000. The note was to be paid in two equal payments of $250,000. The first was paid on October 1, 2003, the remaining balance was paid on January 2, 2004.
      Certain officers and a director of the Company have personally guaranteed the Company’s capital leases.
9.     Stockholders’ Equity
a.     Common Stock
      Concurrent with its re-incorporation in Delaware in February 2001, the Company adopted a certificate of incorporation and authorized the issuance of two classes of stock to be designated “common stock” and “preferred stock,” provided that both common and preferred stock shall have a par value of $0.00001 per share and authorized the Company to issue 50 million shares of common stock and 25 million shares of preferred stock.
      On August 26, 2004, the Company held a special meeting of stockholders to amend its Certificate of Incorporation to increase the authorized shares of common stock to 200 million shares. The increase in authorized shares was approved to enable the Board of Directors to effect a future stock split in the form of a stock dividend. Under the previous Certificate of Incorporation, the Board of Directors could not authorize future stock splits or declare additional stock dividends without first soliciting and obtaining stockholder approval if following such action the total number of shares of common stock outstanding and reserved for issuance would exceed 50,000,000 shares. Under the Certificate of Incorporation, as amended, the Board of

F-19


Table of Contents

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)
Directors has the ability to authorize future stock splits in the form of a stock dividend up to the maximum amount permitted under the Certificate of Incorporation.
      On January 14, 2004, the Company announced a three-for-one stock split in the form of a stock dividend. Under the terms of the stock split, the Company’s shareholders of record as of January 26, 2004 would receive two shares of common stock for every one share of common stock held on that date. The stock split was effected on February 11, 2004 from authorized but unissued shares of common stock of the Company.
      On April 6, 2004, the Company announced a two-for-one stock split in the form of a stock dividend. Under the terms of the stock split, the Company’s shareholders of record as of April 15, 2004 would receive one share of common stock for every one share of common stock held on that date. The stock split was effected on April 29, 2004 from authorized but unissued shares of common stock of the Company.
      On November 4, 2004, the Company announced a two-for-one stock split in the form of a stock dividend. Under the terms of the stock split, the Company’s shareholders of record as of November 15, 2004 would receive one share of common stock for every one share of common stock held on that date. The stock split was effected on November 29, 2004 from authorized but unissued shares of common stock of the Company.
      Under the Company’s Certificate of Incorporation, the Company’s stockholders do not have preemptive rights with respect to common stock. Thus, should the Board of Directors elect to issue additional shares of common stock, existing stockholders would not have any preferential rights to purchase such shares. In addition, if the Board of Directors elects to issue additional shares of common stock, such issuance could have a dilutive effect on earnings per share, voting power, and share holdings of current stockholders.
      The number of shares, per share amounts, conversion amounts and stock option and warrant data of the Company’s common stock have been retroactively restated for all periods presented for the stock dividends and stock splits discussed above.
b.     Preferred Stock
      The Company is authorized to issue up to 25 million shares of preferred stock, $0.00001 par value. The Board of Directors may authorize the issuance of shares of preferred stock of any class or any series of any class and establish designations, voting powers, preferences, and relative participating, optional or other rights, if any, or the qualifications, limitations, or restrictions applicable to such shares.
c.     Warrants
      At December 31, 2003, the Company had warrants outstanding to purchase 855,972 shares of common stock at prices ranging from $1.10 to $7.00 per share with an average exercise price of $3.06 per share and a weighted average remaining life of 2.2 years.
      On February 2, 2004, the Company announced that it had achieved the basic net income per share requirements to redeem the remaining public warrants, and gave formal written notice to all remaining public warrant holders that it would call the warrants at the redemption price of $0.25 per warrant if not redeemed prior to March 31, 2004.
      On March 30, 2004, the Company announced that it would extend the redemption period of its publicly traded warrants to April 28, 2004. During that period, each warrant continued to be exercisable for three shares of common stock (one share of common stock plus two additional shares as a stock dividend) at $9.53 per warrant. The warrant exercise price of $9.53 is the pre-split price; although the price of the warrants was not affected by the stock splits, the underlying number of shares was affected. The result was that each warrant became convertible into one share of common stock and an additional five shares as a stock dividend. After that time, the warrants were no longer exercisable, and holders had the right to receive only the

F-20


Table of Contents

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)
redemption price of $0.25 per TASER warrant. All but four of the public warrants were exercised. On December 31, 2004, no warrants were outstanding.
d.     Stock Option Plan
      The Company has historically issued stock options to various equity owners and key employees as a means of attracting and retaining quality personnel. The option holders have the right to purchase a stated number of shares at the market value on the grant date. The options issued under the Company’s 1999 Stock Option Plan (the “1999 Plan”) generally vest over a three-year period. The options issued under the Company’s 2001 Stock Option Plan (the “2001 Plan”) generally vest over a three-year period. The options issued under the Company’s 2004 Stock Option Plan (the “2004 Plan”) generally vest over a one-year period. The shares issuable under each of the plans were registered on Form S-8 with the United States Securities and Exchange Commission. The total number of shares registered under these plans were 9,952,500 under the Company’s 1999 Plan, and 6,600,000 under the 2001 Plan, and 6,800,000 under the 2004 Plan. These plans provide for officers, key employees and consultants to receive nontransferable stock options to purchase an aggregate of 23,352,500 shares of the Company’s common stock. As of December 31, 2004, 16,697,408 options had been granted at prices equal to or greater than the fair market value of the stock, 10,588,796 of the options granted had been exercised, and 6,832,750 options are remaining for future grants. During 2003 and 2004, the Company granted options to consultants at an exercise price equal to or greater than the value of the common stock on the date of grant. The options vest over a three-year period. The total compensation cost associated with the options granted to consultants was $177,142 in 2003 and approximately $625,714 in 2004.
      A summary of the Company’s stock options, adjusted for stock splits in the form of stock dividends, at December 31, 2004 and 2003 and for the years then ended is presented in the table below:
                                   
    2004   2003
         
        Weighted       Weighted
        Average       Average
    Options   Exercise Price   Options   Exercise Price
                 
Options outstanding, beginning of year
    10,283,808     $ 0.91       9,467,100     $ 0.77  
 
Granted
    2,451,260     $ 8.94       3,758,400     $ 0.85  
 
Exercised
    (6,912,892 )   $ 1.85       (2,941,692 )   $ 0.62  
 
Expired/terminated
    (177,658 )   $ 2.90                
                         
Options outstanding, end of year
    5,644,518     $ 3.19       10,283,808     $ 0.91  
                         
Exercisable at end of year
    2,898,472     $ 4.25       4,027,392     $ 0.97  
Options available for grant at end of year
    6,832,750               2,306,352          
Weighted average fair value of options granted during the year
          $ 4.42             $ 0.53  
      Stock options outstanding and exercisable, adjusted for stock splits made in the form of stock dividends, at December 31, 2004 are as follows:
                                         
        Weighted           Weighted
        Average           Average
    Options   Exercise   Average   Options   Exercise
Range of Exercise Price   Outstanding   Price   Life(a)   Exercisable   Price
                     
$ 0.28-$ 0.99
    2,099,371     $ 0.40       5.8       540,513     $ 0.46  
$ 1.03-$ 2.41
    2,180,297     $ 1.63       5.1       1,278,547     $ 1.56  
$ 7.08-$11.27
    1,042,930     $ 7.44       6.9       883,574     $ 7.47  
$13.52-$18.95
    243,320     $ 16.84       9.5       166,994     $ 17.22  
$19.18-$24.90
    59,500     $ 21.25       9.0       27,868     $ 20.90  
$25.26-$29.83
    19,100     $ 27.03       9.4       976     $ 28.38  
                               
$ 0.28-$29.83
    5,644,518     $ 3.19       6.3       2,898,472     $ 4.25  
                               
 
(a) Weighted average remaining contractual life in years.

F-21


Table of Contents

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)
10. Related Party Transactions
      The Company occasionally charters an aircraft for business travel from Four Futures Corporation, which is wholly owned by Thomas P. Smith, President of the Company, and his family. For the year ended December 31, 2004, the Company incurred expenses of $154,432 from Four Futures Corporation. No expense was incurred during the year ended December 31, 2003. The Company believes that the rates charged by Four Futures Corporation are equal to or below commercial rates the Company would pay to charter similar aircraft from independent charter companies.
      The Company also occasionally charters an aircraft for business travel from Thundervolt, LLC, which is wholly owned by Patrick W. Smith, CEO of the Company, and Phillips W. Smith, Chairman of the Company’s Board. For the year ended December 31, 2004, the Company incurred expenses of $191,100 from Thundervolt, LLC. No expense was incurred during the year ended December 31, 2003. The Company believes that the rates charged by Thundervolt, LLC are equal to or below commercial rates the Company would pay to charter similar aircraft from independent charter companies.

F-22


Table of Contents

EXHIBIT INDEX
             
Exhibit    
Number   Description
     
  3.1         Company’s Certificate of Incorporation, as amended (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.1 to Registration Statement on Form SB-2, effective May 11, 2001 (Registration No. 333-55658), as amended)
  3.2         Company’s Bylaws, as amended (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.2 to Registration Statement on Form SB-2, effective May 11, 2001 (Registration No. 333-55658), as amended)
  3.3         Certificate of Amendment to Certificate of Incorporation dated September 1, 2004
  4.1         Reference is made to pages 1 — 4 of Exhibit 3.1 and pages 1 — 5 and 12 — 14 of Exhibit 3.2
  4.2         Form of Common Stock Certificate (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.2 to Registration Statement on Form SB-2, effective May 11, 2001 (Registration No. 333-55658), as amended)
  10.1*         Employment Agreement with Patrick W. Smith, dated July 1, 1998 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 to Registration Statement on Form SB-2, effective May 11, 2001 (Registration No. 333-55658), as amended)
  10.2*         Employment Agreement with Thomas P. Smith, dated November 15, 2000 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2 to Registration Statement on Form SB-2 effective May 11, 2001 (Registration No. 333-55658), as amended)
  10.3*         Employment Agreement with Kathleen C. Hanrahan, dated November 15, 2000 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.3 to Registration Statement on Form SB-2 effective May 11, 2001 (Registration No. 333-55658), as amended)
  10.4*         Form of Indemnification Agreement between the Company and its directors (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.4 to Registration Statement on Form SB-2 effective May 11, 2001 (Registration No. 333-55658), as amended)
  10.5*         Form of Indemnification Agreement between the Company and its officers (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.5 to Registration Statement on Form SB-2, effective May 11, 2001 (Registration No. 333-55658), as amended)
  10.6*         1999 Employee Stock Option Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.6 to Registration Statement on Form SB-2, effective May 11, 2001 (Registration No. 333-55658), as amended)
  10.7*         2001 Stock Option Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.7 to Registration Statement on Form SB-2, effective May 11, 2001 (Registration No. 333-55658), as amended)
  10.8*         Form of Warrant issued to Bruce Culver and Phil Smith (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.8 to Registration Statement on Form SB-2 effective May 11, 2001 (Registration No. 333-55658), as amended)
  10.9         Lease between the Company and Norton P. Remes and Joan A. Remes Revocable Trust, dated November 17, 2000 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.14 to Registration Statement on Form SB-2 effective May 11, 2001 (Registration No. 333-55658), as amended
  10.10         Form of Sales Representative Agreement with respect to services by and between the Company and Sales Representatives (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.15 to the Annual Report on Form 10-KSB, filed March 15, 2002), as amended
  10.11         Lease Agreement, dated April 17, 2001, payable to GE Capital Corporation in the amount of $37,945 (incorporated by referenced to Exhibit 10.13 to the Annual Report on Form 10-KSB, filed March 15, 2002), as amended
  10.12*         Employment Agreement with Douglas E. Klint, dated December 15, 2002 (incorporated by referenced to Exhibit 10.14 to the Annual Report on Form 10-KSB, filed March 15, 2002), as amended
  10.13         Credit Agreement dated July 13, 2004, between the Company and Bank One
  10.14         Employment Agreement with Daniel Behrendt, dated April 28, 2004
  10.15         2004 Stock Option Plan
  10.16         TASER 2004 Outside Directors Stock Option Plan
  14.1         Code of Ethics, as adopted by the Board of Directors
  23.1         Consent of Deloitte & Touche, LLP, independent auditors
  31.1         Chief Executive Officer Certification pursuant to Rule 13a-14(a) or Rule 15d-14(a)


Table of Contents

             
Exhibit    
Number   Description
     
  31.2         Chief Financial Officer Certification pursuant to Rule 13a-14(a) or Rule 15d-14(a)


Table of Contents

             
Exhibit    
Number   Description
     
  32.1         Chief Executive Officer Certification pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350 as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.
  32.2         Chief Financial Officer Certification pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350 as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.
  99.1         Certain Factors to Consider in Connection with Forward-Looking Statements
 
Management contract or compensatory plan or arrangement
 

Exhibit 3.1

STATE OF DELAWARE
CERTIFICATE OF AMENDMENT
OF CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION
FOR TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.

The corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware does hereby certify:

FIRST: That at a meeting of the Board of Directors of TASER International, Inc. resolutions were duly adopted setting forth a proposed amendment of the Certificate of Incorporation of said corporation, declaring said amendment to be advisable and calling a meeting of the stockholders of said corporation for consideration thereof. The resolution setting forth the proposed amendment is as follows:

RESOLVED, that the Certificate of Incorporation of this corporation be amended by changing the Article thereof numbered “4(a)” so that, as amended, said Article shall be and read as follows:

4. (a) The Corporation is authorized to issue a total of 225,000,000 shares of two classes of stock: 200,000,000 shares of Common Stock, par value $.00001 per share; and 25,000,000 shares of Preferred Stock, par value $.00001 per share.

SECOND: That thereafter, pursuant to resolution of its Board of Directors, a special meeting of the stockholders of said corporation was duly called and held upon notice in accordance with Section 222 of the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware at which meeting the necessary number of shares as required by statute were voted in favor of the amendment.

THIRD: That said amendment was duly adopted in accordance with the provisions of Section 242 of the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware.

FOURTH: That the capital of said corporation shall not be reduced under or by reason of said amendment.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, said corporation has caused this certificate to be signed this 1st day of September, 2004.

         
  (-S- DOUGLAS E. KLINT)    
By:
       
       
Authorized Officer
Title: Vice President, Corporate Secretary and General Counsel
Name: Douglas E. Klint

EXHIBIT 10.13

(BANK ONE LOGO) CREDIT AGREEMENT

This agreement dated as of June 22, 2004 between Bank One, NA, with its main office, in Chicago, IL, and its successors and assigns, (the "Bank"), whose address is 201 N. Central Ave, 21st Floor, AZ1-1178, Phoenix, AZ 85004, and TASER International, Inc. (the "Borrower"), whose address is 7860 East McClan Drive #2, Scottsdale, AZ 85260-1627.

1. CREDIT FACILITIES.

1.1 SCOPE. This agreement governs Facility A, and, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the Bank and the Borrower or prohibited by applicable law, governs the Credit Facilities.

1.2 FACILITY A (LINE OF CREDIT). The Bank has approved a credit facility to the Borrower in the principal sum not to exceed $10,000,000.00 in the aggregate at any one time outstanding ("Facility A"). Credit under Facility A shall be repayable as set forth in a Line of Credit Note executed concurrently with this agreement, and any renewals, modifications or extensions thereof. The proceeds of Facility A shall be used for the following purpose: finance on going working capital requirements and general corporate purposes.

NON USAGE FEE. The Borrower shall pay to the Bank a non-usage fee (the "Non-Usage Fee") with respect to each calendar quarter during the term of Facility A, based on the unused amount of Facility A. The Non-Usage Fee shall be an amount equal to A x (B - C) x (D/E), where A equals the Applicable Fee Sate; B equals the maximum amount of Facility A; C equals the average daily used portion (i.e., the sum of the aggregate principal amount of advances outstanding, the aggregate amount available to be drawn under all outstanding letters of credit issued under the letter of credit sub-limit described below, plus the aggregate amount drawn and unreimbursed under letters of credit issued under that sub-limit) of Facility A, during the calendar quarter; D equals the actual number of days elapsed during the calendar quarter; and E equals 360. Each Non-Usage Fee shall be due and payable to the Bank quarterly, in arrears, within fifteen (15) days after Borrower's receipt of an invoice for the Non-Usage Fee from the Bank.

LETTER OF CREDIT SUB-LIMIT. At any time the Borrower is entitled to an advance under Facility A, the Bank agrees to issue letters of credit for the account of the Borrower in an amount not in excess of the maximum advance that the Borrower would then be entitled to obtain under Facility A, provided that (a) the aggregate maximum amount which is drawn and remains unreimbursed under all letters of credit plus the aggregate maximum available amount which may be drawn under all letters of credit which are outstanding at any time, including without limitation all letters of credit issued for the account of the Borrower which arc outstanding on the date of the Line of Credit Note, shall not exceed $5,000,000.00, (b) the issuance of any letter of credit with an expiration date beyond the maturity date of the Line of Credit Note shall be entirely at the discretion of the Bank, (c) any letter of credit shall be a standby or commercial letter of credit and the form of the requested letter of credit shall be satisfactory to the Bank, in the Bank's sole discretion, and (d) the Borrower shall have executed an application and reimbursement agreement for any letter of credit in the Bank's standard form. While any letter of credit is outstanding, the maximum amount of advances that may be outstanding under the Line of Credit Note shall be automatically reduced by the maximum amount available to be drawn under any and all such letters of credit plus the aggregate of the amounts which have been drawn and remain unreimbursed under all letters of Credit. The Borrower shall pay the Bank a fee for each standby letter of credit that is issued, calculated at the Applicable Fee Rate per annum of the original maximum amount available of such standby letter of credit, with such fee being calculated on the basis of a 360-day year and the actual number of days in the period during which the standby letter of credit will be outstanding; provided, however, that such fee shall not be less than $100.00 for each letter of credit. The Borrower shall pay the Bank a fee for each commercial letter of credit that is issued, equal to the greater of $100.00 or 1.00% per annum of the original maximum available amount of such commercial letter of credit. No credit shall be given for fees paid due to early termination of any letter of credit. The Borrower shall also pay the Bank's standard transaction fees with respect to any transactions occurring on an account of any letter of credit. Each fee shall be payable when the related letter of credit is issued, and transaction fees shall be payable upon completion of the transaction as to which they are charged. All fees may be debited by the Bank to any deposit account of the Borrower carried with the Bank without further authority and, in any event, shall be paid by the Borrower within ten (10) days following billing.

1.3 BORROWING BASE. The aggregate principal amount of advances outstanding at any one time under Facility A, plus the aggregate amount available to be drawn under all outstanding letters of credit issued under the letter of credit sub-limit described above, plus the aggregate amount drawn and unreimbursed under letters of credit issued under that sub-limit (the "Aggregate Outstanding Amount") shall not exceed the Borrowing Base or the maximum principal amount then available under the Line of Credit Note (and any renewals, modifications or extensions thereof) evidencing Facility A, whichever is less (the "Maximum Available Amount"). If at any time the Aggregate


Outstanding Amount exceeds the Maximum Available Amount, the Borrower shall immediately pay the Bank an amount equal to such excess. "Borrowing Base" means the aggregate of:

A. 80% of Eligible Accounts; plus

B. 50% of Eligible Inventory, not to exceed 50% of Margined Eligible Accounts.

Upon the request of the Borrower, the Borrowing Base may also include additional amounts with respect to deposit accounts, certificates of deposit or time deposit receipt accounts with the Bank and acceptable marketable securities, in which Borrower has granted to the Bank a perfected, first priority security interest securing the Credit Facilities. The inclusion of such additional amounts shall be on such terms and conditions as the Bank may determine in its sole discretion, including without limitation the percentages of such assets upon which the calculation of such additional amounts shall be based, and the execution and delivery of such agreements and the provision of such additional assurances as the Bank may reasonably require.

2. DEFINITIONS. As used in this agreement, the following terms have the following respective meanings:

2.1 "Credit Facilities" means all extensions of credit from the Bank to the Borrower, whether now existing or hereafter arising, including but not limited to those described in Section 1.

2.2 "Liabilities" means all obligations, indebtedness and liabilities of the Borrower to any one or more of the Bank, BANK ONE CORPORATION, and any of their subsidiaries, affiliates or successors, now existing or later arising, including, without limitation, all loans, advances, interest, costs, overdraft indebtedness, credit card indebtedness, lease obligations, or obligations relating to any Rate Management Transaction, all monetary obligations incurred or accrued during the pendency of any bankruptcy, insolvency, receivership or other similar proceedings, regardless of whether allowed or allowable in such proceeding, and all renewals, extensions, modifications, consolidations or substitutions of any of the foregoing, whether the Borrower may be liable jointly with others or individually liable as a debtor, maker, co-maker, drawer, endorser, guarantor, surety or otherwise, and whether voluntarily or involuntarily incurred, due or not due, absolute or contingent, direct or indirect, liquidated or unliquidated. The term "Rate Management Transaction" in this agreement means any transaction (including an agreement with respect thereto) now existing or hereafter entered into among the Borrower, the Bank or BANK ONE CORPORATION, or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates or their successors, which is a rate swap, basis swap, forward rate transaction, commodity swap, commodity option, equity or equity index swap, equity or equity index option, bond option, interest rate option, foreign exchange transaction, cap transaction, floor transaction, collar transaction, forward transaction, currency swap transaction, cross-currency rate swap transaction, currency option or any other similar transaction (including any option with respect to any of these transactions) or any combination thereof, whether linked to one or more interest rates, foreign currencies, commodity prices, equity prices or other financial measures.

2.3 "Notes" means the Line of Credit Note(s) described in Section 1, and all promissory notes, instruments and/or contracts evidencing the terms and conditions of the Liabilities.

2.4 "Account" means a trade account, account receivable, other receivable, or other right to payment for goods sold or leased or services rendered owing to the Borrower (or to a third party grantor acceptable to the Bank).

2.5 "Account Debtor" means the person or entity obligated upon an Account.

2.6 "Affiliate" means any person, corporation or other entity directly or indirectly controlling, controlled by or under common control with the Borrower and any director or officer of the Borrower or any subsidiary of the Borrower.

2.7 "Applicable Fee Rate" means with respect to any standby letter of credit fee or Non-Usage Fee, as the case may be, the rate per annum set forth below opposite the applicable Leverage Ratio (hereinafter defined in Section 5.2 (J).

                                                            Applicable Fee Rate
                                                      -------------------------------
                   Leverage Ratio                     Standby LOC Fee   Non-Usage Fee
                   --------------                     ---------------   -------------
Greater than 0.75 to 1.00                                  2.00%            0.20%
Less than or equal to 0.75 to 1.00 but greater than
   0.25 to 1.00                                            1.75%            0.15%
Less than or equal to 0.25 to 1.00                         1.50%            0.10%

2

The Applicable Fee Rate shall, in each case, be determined and adjusted quarterly on the first day of the month after the date of delivery of the quarterly and annual financial statements required by this agreement, provided, however, that if such financial statements are not delivered within two Business Days after the required date (each, a "Fee Determination Date"), the Applicable Fee Rate shall increase to the maximum percentage amount set forth in the table above from the date such financial statements were required to be delivered to the Bank until received by the Bank. The Applicable Fee Rate shall be effective from a Fee Determination Date until the next Fee Determination Date. Such determinations by the Bank shall be conclusive absent manifest error. The initial Applicable Fee Rate for the standby letter of credit fee is 1.50% and for the Non-usage Fee is 0.10%.

2.8 "Distributions" means all dividends and other distributions made by the Borrower to its shareholders, partners, owners or members, as the case may be, other than salary, bonuses, and other compensation for services expended in the current accounting period.

2.9 "Eligible Accounts" means, at any time, all of the Borrower's Accounts which contain selling terms and conditions acceptable to the Bank. The net amount of any Eligible Account against which the Borrower may borrow shall exclude all returns, discounts, credits, and offsets of any nature. Unless otherwise agreed to by the Bank in writing, Eligible Accounts do not include Accounts: (1) with respect to which the Account Debtor is an employee or agent of the Borrower; (2) with respect to which the Account Debtor is affiliated with or related to the Borrower; (3) with respect to which goods are placed on consignment, guaranteed sale, or other terms by reason of which the payment, by the Account Debtor may be conditional; (4) with respect to which the Account Debtor is not a resident of the United States, except to the extent such Accounts are supported by insurance, bonds or other assurances satisfactory to the Bank; (5) with respect to which the Borrower is or may become liable to the Account Debtor for goods sold or services rendered by the Account Debtor to the Borrower;
(6) which are subject to dispute, counterclaim, or setoff; (7) with respect to which the goods have not been shipped or delivered, or the services have not been rendered, to the Account Debtor; (8) with respect to which the Bank, in its sole discretion, deems the creditworthiness or financial condition of the Account Debtor to be unsatisfactory; (9) of any Account Debtor who has filed or has had filed against it a petition in bankruptcy or an application for relief under any provision of any state or federal bankruptcy, insolvency, or debtor-in-relief acts; or who has had appointed a trustee, custodian, or receiver for the assets of such Account Debtor; or who has made an assignment for the benefit of creditors or has become insolvent or fails generally to pay its debts (including its payrolls) as such debts become due; (10) with respect to which the Account Debtor is the United States government or any department or agency of the United States; (11) which have not been paid in full within ninety (90) days from the invoice date; and (12) due from any one Account Debtor to the extent such Accounts constitute more than 5% of all Eligible Accounts. In no event will the balance of any Account of any single Account Debtor be eligible whenever the portion of the Account which has not been paid within ninety (90) days from the invoice date is in excess of 25% of the total amount outstanding on the Account.

2.10 "Eligible Inventory" means, at any time, all of the Borrower's Inventory except: (1) Inventory which is not owned by the Borrower free and clear of all security interests, liens, encumbrances, and claims of third parties, except the Bank; (2) Inventory which the Bank, in its sole discretion; deems to be obsolete, unsalable, damaged, defective, perishable, or unfit for further processing; (3) work in process; (4) Inventory subject to consignment or otherwise in the possession of a third party, unless otherwise agreed to by the Bank in writing; (5) Inventory in transit or located outside of the United States; (6) Inventory identified to be purchased under a contract under which the Borrower has received, or is entitled to receive, an advance payment; (7) Inventory determined by the Bank in its sole discretion to be ineligible due to licensing, intellectual property, or legal or regulating issues which exist making it difficult to resell such Inventory; and (8) Inventory which is comprised of samples, returns, rejected items, re-work items, non-standard items, odd-lots, or which is otherwise deemed ineligible by the Bank in its sole discretion; provided, however, that transportation and storage charges shall be excluded from amounts otherwise included in Eligible Inventory.

2.11 "Inventory" means all of the Borrower's raw materials, work in process, finished goods, merchandise, parts and supplies, of every kind and description, and goods held for sale or lease or furnished under contracts of service in which the Borrower now has or hereafter acquires any right, whether held by the Borrower or others, and all documents of title, warehouse receipts, bills of lading, and all other documents of every type covering all or any part of the foregoing. Inventory includes inventory temporarily out of the Borrower's custody or possession and all returns on Accounts.

2.12 "Intangible Assets" means the aggregate amount of: (1) all assets classified as intangible assets under generally accepted accounting principles, including, without limitation, goodwill, trademarks, patents, copyrights, organization expenses, franchises, licenses, trade names, brand names, mailing lists, catalogs, excess of cost over book value of assets acquired, and bond discount and underwriting expenses; and (2) loans or advances to, investments in, or receivables from (i) Affiliates, officers, directors, employees or shareholders of the Borrower or

3

(ii) any person or entity if such loan, advance, investment or receivable is outside the Borrower's normal course of business.

2.13 "Margined Eligible Accounts" means 80% of Eligible Accounts.

2.14 "Tangible Net Worth" means total assets less the sum of Intangible Assets and total liabilities.

3. CONDITIONS PRECEDENT.

3.1 CONDITIONS PRECEDENT TO INITIAL EXTENSION OF CREDIT. Before the first extension of credit governed by this agreement, whether by disbursement of a loan, issuance of a letter of credit, or otherwise, the Borrower shall deliver to the Bank, in form and substance satisfactory to the Bank:

A. LOAN DOCUMENTS. The Notes, and as applicable, the letter of credit applications, the security agreements, the pledge agreements, financing statements, mortgages or deeds of trust, the guaranties, the subordination agreements, and any other loan documents which the Bank may reasonably require to give effect to the transactions described in this agreement;

B. EVIDENCE OF DUE ORGANIZATION AND GOOD STANDING. Evidence, satisfactory to the Bank, of the due organization and good standing of the Borrower and every other business entity that is a party to this agreement or any other loan document required by this agreement; and

C. EVIDENCE OF AUTHORITY TO ENTER INTO LOAN DOCUMENTS. Evidence that
(i) each party to this agreement and any other loan document required by this agreement is authorized to enter into the transactions described in this agreement and the other loan documents, and (ii) the person signing on behalf of each such party is authorized to do.

3.2 CONDITIONS PRECEDENT TO EACH EXTENSION OF CREDIT. Before any extension of credit governed by this agreement, whether by disbursement of a loan, issuance of a letter of credit or otherwise, the following conditions must be satisfied-

A. REPRESENTATIONS. The representations of the Borrower are true on and as of the date of the extension of credit;

B. NO EVENT OF DEFAULT. No default has occurred in any provision of this agreement, the Notes or any agreement related to the Credit Facilities and is continuing or would result from the extension of credit, and no event has occurred which would constitute the occurrence of any default but for the lapse of time until the end of any grace or cure period; and

C. ADDITIONAL APPROVALS, OPINIONS, AND DOCUMENTS. The Bank has received any other approvals, opinions and documents as it may reasonably request.

4. AFFIRMATIVE COVENANTS. The Borrower shall:

4.1 INSURANCE. Maintain insurance with financially sound and reputable insurers covering its properties and business against those casualties and contingencies and in the types and amounts as are in accordance with sound business and industry practices.

4.2 EXISTENCE. Maintain its existence and business operations as presently in effect in accordance with all applicable laws and regulations, pay its debts and obligations when due under normal terms, and pay on or before their due date, all taxes, assessments, fees and other governmental monetary obligations, except as they may be contested in good faith if they have been properly reflected on its books and, at the Bank's request, adequate funds or security has been pledged to insure payment,

4.3 FINANCIAL RECORDS. Maintain proper books and records of account, in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and consistent with financial statements previously submitted to the Bank.

4.4 INSPECTION. Permit the Bank to inspect and copy the Borrower's business records at such times and at such intervals as the Bank may reasonably require, and to discuss the Borrower's business, operations, and financial condition with the Borrower's officers and accountants.

4

4.5 FINANCIAL REPORTS. Furnish to the Bank whatever information, books and records the Bank may from time to time reasonably request, including at a minimum:

A. Via either the EDGAR System or its Home Page, within forty-five
(45) days after the filing of its Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the fiscal quarter then ended with the Securities and Exchange Commission, but in no event later than forty-five (45) days after the end of such fiscal quarter, copies of the financial statements for such fiscal quarter as contained in such Quarterly Report, on Form 10-Q, and, as soon as it shall become available, a quarterly report to shareholders of the Borrower for the fiscal quarter then ended.

B. Via either the EDGAR System or its Home Page, within ninety (90) days after filing of its Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year then ended with the Securities and Exchange Commission, but in no event later than ninety (90) days after the end of such fiscal year, the financial statements for such fiscal year as contained in such Annual Report on Form 10-K and, as soon as it shall become available, the annual report to shareholders of the Borrower for the fiscal year then ended.

If for any reason the EDGAR System and/or its Home Page are not available to the Borrower as is required for making available the financial statements or reports referred to above, the Borrower shall then furnish a copy of such financial Statements or reports to the Bank.

For the purposes of this section "EDGAR System" means the Electronic Data Gathering Analysis and Retrieval System owned and operated by the United States Securities and Exchange Commission or any replacement system, and "Home Page" means the Borrower's corporate home page on the World Wide Web accessible through the Internet via the universal resource locator (URL) identified as www.TASER.com or such other universal resource locator that the borrower shall designate in writing to the Bank as its corporate home page on the World Wide Web.

C. Within thirty (30) days after and as of the end of each calendar month in which there was an outstanding advance of principal or an outstanding letter of credit under Facility A on the last day of such calendar month, the following lists, each certified as correct by one of its authorized agents:

(1) a list of accounts receivable, aged from date of invoice, and

(2) a list of inventory, valued at the lower of cost (determined using the first-in, first-out method of inventory accounting) or wholesale market value.

D. A borrowing base certificate, in the form of Exhibit A attached hereto, along with such supporting documentation as the Bank may request, at the following times: (A) within thirty (30) days after and as of the end of each calendar month in which there was an outstanding advance of principal or an outstanding letter of credit under Facility A on the last day of such calendar month, and (B) if no borrowing base certificate has been provided or is otherwise due as of the end of the immediately preceding calendar month, with any request of an advance under the Credit Facilities or for the issuance of a letter of credit.

4.6 NOTICES OF CLAIMS, LITIGATION, DEFAULTS, ETC. Promptly inform the Bank in writing of (1) all existing and all threatened litigation, claims, investigations, administrative proceedings and similar actions affecting the Borrower which could materially affect the financial condition of the Borrower; (2) the occurrence of any event which gives rise to the Bank's option to terminate the Credit Facilities; (3) the institution of steps by the Borrower to withdraw from, or the institution of any steps to terminate, any employee benefit plan as to which the Borrower may have liability; (4) any additions to or changes in the locations of the Borrower's businesses; and (5) any alleged breach of any provision of this agreement or of any other agreement related to the Credit Facilities by the Bank.

4.7 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. Furnish such additional information and statements, as the Bank may request, from time to time.

4.8 INSURANCE REPORTS. Furnish to the Bank, upon request of the Bank, reports on each existing, insurance policy showing such information as the Bank may reasonably request.

4.9 OTHER AGREEMENTS. Comply with all terms and conditions of all other agreements, whether now or hereafter existing, between the Borrower and any other party.

4.10 TITLE TO ASSETS AND PROPERTY. Maintain good and marketable title to all of the Borrower's assets and properties.

5

4.11 ADDITIONAL ASSURANCES. Make, execute and deliver to the Bank such other agreements as the Bank may reasonably request to evidence the Credit Facilities and to perfect any security interests.

4.12 EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS. Maintain each employee benefit plan as to which the Borrower may have any liability, in compliance with all applicable requirements of law and regulations.

4.13 DEPOSITORY RELATIONSHIP. Maintain its primary banking depository relationship with the Bank and establish such accounts and maintain balances therein with the Bank sufficient to cover the cost of all the Bank's services provided; provided, however, that nothing herein shall require the Borrower to keep and maintain a specific minimum balance in such accounts.

5. NEGATIVE COVENANTS.

5.1 Unless otherwise noted, the financial requirements set forth in this section will be computed in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles applied on a basis consistent with, financial statements previously Submitted by the Borrower to the Bank.

5.2 Without the written consent of the Bank, the Borrower will not:

A. DIVIDENDS. Acquire or retire any of its shares of capital stock; or declare or pay dividends or make any other distributions upon any of its shares of capital stock, except in the absence of the occurrence of any default, dividends in its capital stock.

B. SALE OF SHARES. Issue, sell or otherwise dispose of any shares of its capital stock or other securities, or rights, warrants or options to purchase or acquire those shares or securities, except that Borrower can issue and permit the exercise of employee, director, and consultant stock options in the ordinary course of business

C. DEBT. Incur, contract for, assume, or permit to remain outstanding, indebtedness for borrowed money, installment obligations, or obligations under capital leases or operating leases, other than (1) unsecured trade debt incurred in the ordinary course of business, (2) indebtedness owing to the Bank, (3) indebtedness reflected in the latest financial statement of the Borrower furnished to the Bank prior to execution of this agreement and that is not to be paid with proceeds of borrowings under the Credit Facilities, and (4) indebtedness, outstanding as of the date hereof that has been disclosed to the Bank in writing and that is not to be paid with proceeds of borrowings under the Credit Facilities.

D. GUARANTIES. Guarantee or otherwise become or remain secondarily liable on the undertaking of another, except for endorsement of drafts for deposit and collection in the ordinary course of business.

E. LIENS. Create or permit to exist any lien on any of its property, real or personal, except: existing liens known to the Bank; liens to the Bank; liens incurred in the ordinary course of business securing current non-delinquent liabilities for taxes, worker's compensation, unemployment insurance, social security and pension liabilities.

F. USE OF PROCEEDS. Use, or permit any proceeds of the Credit Facilities to be used, directly or indirectly, for the purpose of "purchasing or carrying any margin stock" within the meaning of Federal Reserve Board Regulation U. At the Bank's request, the Borrower will furnish a completed Federal Reserve Board Form U-l.

G. CONTINUITY OF OPERATIONS. (1) Engage in any business activities substantially different from those in which the Borrower is presently engaged; (2) cease operations, liquidate, merge, transfer, acquire or consolidate with any other entity, change its name, dissolve, or sell any assets out of the ordinary course of business; or (3) enter into any arrangement with any person providing for the leasing by the Borrower or any subsidiary of real or personal property which has been sold or transferred by the Borrower or subsidiary to such person.

H. LIMITATION ON NEGATIVE PLEDGE CLAUSES. Enter into any agreement with any person other than the Bank which prohibits or limits the ability of the Borrower or any of its subsidiaries to create or permit to exist any lien on any of its property, assets or revenues, whether now owned or hereafter acquired.

I. CONFLICTING AGREEMENTS. Enter into any agreement containing any provision which would be violated or breached by the performance of the Borrower's obligations under this agreement.

J. LEVERAGE RATIO. Permit as of each fiscal quarter end, its ratio of total liabilities to Tangible Net Worth to be greater than 1.00 to 1.00.

6

K. FIXED CHARGE COVERAGE RATIO. Permit as of each fiscal quarter end, its ratio of net income before taxes, plus amortization, depreciation, interest expense, rent and operating lease payments minus any Distributions, for the twelve month period then ending to prior period current maturities of long term debt and capital leases, interest expense, taxes, rent and operating lease payments for the same such, period to be less than 1.25 to 1.00.

L. GOVERNMENT REGULATION. (1) Be or become Subject at any time to any law, regulation, or list of any government agency (including, without limitation, the U.S. Office of Foreign Asset Control list) that prohibits or limits Bank from making any advance or extension of credit to Borrower or from otherwise conducting business with Borrower, or (2) fail to provide documentary and other evidence of Borrower's identity as may be requested by Bank at any time to enable Bank to verify Borrower's identity or to comply with any applicable law or regulation, including, without limitation, Section 326 of the USA Patriot Act of 2001, 31 U.S.C. Section 5318.

6. REPRESENTATIONS.

6.1 REPRESENTATIONS BY THE BORROWER. Each Borrower represents that: (a) the execution and delivery of this agreement and the Notes, and the performance of the obligations they impose, do not violate any law, conflict with any agreement by which it is bound, or require the consent or approval of any governmental authority or other third party, (b) this agreement and the Notes are valid and binding agreements, enforceable according to their terms, (c) all balance sheets, profit and loss statements, and other financial statements and other information furnished to the Bank in connection with the Liabilities are accurate and fairly reflect the financial condition of the organizations and persons to which they apply on their effective dates, including contingent liabilities of every type, which financial condition has not changed materially and adversely since those dates,
(d) no litigation, claim, investigation, administrative proceeding or similar action (including those for unpaid taxes) against the Borrower is pending or threatened, and no other event has occurred which may in any one case or in the aggregate materially adversely affect the Borrower's financial condition and properties, other than litigation, claims, or other events, if any, that have been disclosed to and acknowledged by the Bank in writing, (e) all of the Borrower's tax returns and reports that are or were required to be filed, have been filed, and all taxes, assessments and other governmental charges have been paid in full, except those presently being contested by the Borrower in good faith and for which adequate reserves have been provided, (f) the Borrower is not an "investment company" or a company "controlled" by an "investment company", within the meaning of the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended, (g) the Borrower is not a "holding company", or a "subsidiary company" of a "holding company" or an "affiliate" of a "holding company" or of a "subsidiary company" of a "holding company" within the meaning of the Public Utility Holding Company Act of 1935, as amended, (h) there are no defenses or counterclaims, offsets or adverse claims, demands or actions of any kind, personal or otherwise, that the Borrower could assert with respect to this agreement or the Credit Facilities, (i) the Borrower owns, or is licensed to use, all trademarks, trade names, copyrights, technology, know-how and processes necessary for the conduct of its business as currently conducted, and (j) no part of the proceeds of the Credit Facilities will be used for "purchasing" or "carrying" any "margin stock" within the respective meanings of each of the quoted terms under Regulation U of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System of the United States (the "Board") as now and from time to time hereafter in effect or for any purpose which violates the provisions of any regulations of the Board. Each Borrower, other than a natural person, further represents that: (a) it is duly organized, existing and in good standing pursuant to the laws under which it is organized, and (b) the execution and delivery of this agreement and the Notes and the performance of the obligations they impose (i) are within its powers, (ii) have been duly authorized by all necessary action of its governing body, and (iii) do not contravene the terms of its articles of incorporation or organization, its by-laws, or any partnership, operating or other agreement governing its affairs.

[THIS SPACE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

7

6.2 REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING ASSETS. With respect to any asset of the Borrower utilized in the calculation of the Borrowing Base set forth in this agreement, the Borrower represents and warrants to the Bank:
(1) each asset represented by the Borrower to be eligible for Borrowing Base purposes of this agreement conforms to the eligibility definitions set forth in this agreement (2) all asset values delivered to the Bank will be true and correct, subject to immaterial variance; and be determined on a consistent accounting basis; (3) except as agreed to the contrary by the Bank in writing, each asset is now and at all times hereafter will be in the Borrower's physical possession and shall not be held by others on consignment, sale or approval, or sale or return; (4) except as reflected in schedules delivered to (the Bank, each asset is now and at all times hereafter will be of good and merchantable quality, free from defects; (5) each asset is not now and will not at any time hereafter be stored with a bailee, warehouseman, or similar party without the Bank's prior written consent, and in such event, the Borrower will concurrently at the time of bailment cause any such bailee, warehouseman, or similar party to issue and deliver to the Bank, warehouseman receipts in the Bank's name evidencing the storage of the assets; and (6) the Bank, its assigns, or agents shall have the right at any time and at the Borrower's expense to inspect, examine and audit the Borrower's records, and if Accounts are included in the calculation of Borrowing Base, confirm with Account Debtors the accuracy of such Accounts, and inspect and examine the assets and to check and test the same as to quality, quantity, value, and condition.

7. DEFAULT/REMEDIES. If any of the Credit Facilities are not paid at maturity, whether by acceleration or otherwise, or if a default by anyone occurs under the terms of this agreement, the Notes or any agreement related to the Credit Facilities, then the Bank shall have all of the rights and remedies provided by any law or agreement.

8. MISCELLANEOUS.

8.1 NOTICE. Any notices and demands under or related to this document shall be in writing and delivered to the intended party at its address stated herein, and if to the Bank, at its main office if no other address of the Bank is specified herein, by one of the following means: (a) by hand, (b) by a nationally recognized overnight courier service, or (c) by certified mail, postage prepaid, with return receipt requested. Notice shall be deemed given: (a) upon receipt if delivered by hand, (b) on the Delivery Day after the day of deposit with a nationally recognized courier service, or (c) on the third Delivery Day after the notice is deposited in the mail. "Delivery Day" means a day other than a Saturday, a Sunday or any other day on which national banking associations are authorized to be closed. Any party may change its address for purposes of the receipt of notices and demands by giving notice of such change in the manner provided in this provision.

8.2 NO WAIVER. No delay on the part of the Bank in the exercise of any right or remedy waives that right or remedy. No single or partial exercise by the Bank of any right or remedy precludes any other future exercise of it or the exercise of any other right or remedy. No waiver or indulgence by the Bank of any default is effective unless it is in writing and signed by the Bank, nor shall a waiver on one occasion bar or waive that right on any future occasion.

8.3 INTEGRATION. This agreement, the Notes, and any agreement related to the Credit Facilities embody the entire agreement and understanding between the Borrower and the Bank and supersede all prior agreements and understandings relating to their subject matter. If any one or more of the obligations of the Borrower under this agreement or the Notes is invalid, illegal or unenforceable in any jurisdiction, the validity, legality and enforceability of the remaining obligations of the Borrower shall not in any way be affected or impaired, and the invalidity, illegality or uncnforceability in one jurisdiction shall not affect the validity, legality or enforceability of the obligations of the Borrower under this agreement or the Notes in any other jurisdiction.

8.4 JOINT AND SEVERAL LIABILITY. Each Borrower, if more than one, is jointly and severally liable.

8.5 GOVERNING LAW AND VENUE. This agreement is delivered in the State of Arizona and governed by Arizona law (without giving effect to its laws of conflicts). The Borrower agrees that any legal action or proceeding with respect to any of its obligations under this agreement may be brought by the Bank in any state or federal court located in the State of Arizona, as the Bank in its sole discretion may elect. By the execution and delivery of this agreement, the Borrower submits to and accepts, for itself and in respect of its property, generally and unconditionally, the non exclusive jurisdiction of those courts. The Borrower waives any claim that the State of Arizona is not a convenient forum or the proper venue for any such suit, action or proceeding.

8

8.6 CAPTIONS. Section headings are for convenience of reference only and do not affect the interpretation of this agreement.

8.7 SUBSIDIARIES AND AFFILIATES OF THE BORROWER. To the extent the context of any provisions of this agreement makes it appropriate, including without limitation any representation, warranty or covenant, the word "Borrower" as used in this agreement shall include all of the Borrower's subsidiaries and affiliates. Notwithstanding the foregoing, however, under no circumstances shall this agreement be construed to require the Bank to make any loan or other financial accommodation to any of the Borrower's subsidiaries or affiliates.

8.8 SURVIVAL OF REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES. The Borrower understands and agrees that in extending the Credit Facilities, the Bank is relying on all representations, warranties, and covenants made by the Borrower in this agreement or in any certificate or other instrument delivered by the Borrower to the Bank under this agreement. The Borrower further agrees that regardless of any investigation made by the Bank, all such representations, warranties and covenants will survive the making of the Credit Facilities and delivery to the Bank of this agreement, shall be continuing in nature, and shall remain in full force and effect until such time as the Borrower's indebtedness to the Bank shall be paid in full.

8.9 NON-LIABILITY OF THE BANK. The relationship between the Borrower and the Bank created by this agreement is strictly a debtor and creditor relationship and not fiduciary in nature, nor is the relationship to be construed as creating any partnership or joint venture between the Bank and the Borrower. The Borrower is exercising the Borrower's own judgement with respect to the Borrower's business. All information supplied to the Bank is for the Bank's protection only and no other party is entitled to rely on such information. There is no duty for Bank to review, inspect, supervise or inform the Borrower of any matter with respect to the Borrower's business. The Bank and the Borrower intend that the Bank may reasonably rely on all information supplied by the Borrower to the Bank, together with all representations and warranties given by the Borrower to the Bank, without investigation or confirmation by the Bank and that any investigation or failure to investigate will not diminish the Bank's right to so rely.

8.10 INDEMNIFICATION OF THE BANK. The Borrower agrees to indemnify, defend and hold the Bank and BANK ONE CORPORATION, or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates or their successors, and each of their respective shareholders, directors, officers, employees and agents (collectively, the "Indemnified Persons") harmless from any and all obligations, claims, liabilities, losses, damages, penalties, fines, forfeitures, actions, judgments, suits, costs, expenses and disbursements of any kind or nature (including, without limitation, any Indemnified Person's, attorneys' reasonable fees) (collectively, the "Claims") which may be imposed upon, incurred by or assessed against any Indemnified Person arising out of or relating to this agreement; the exercise of the rights and remedies granted under this agreement (including, without limitation, the enforcement of this agreement and the defense of any Indemnified Person's action or inaction in connection with this agreement); and in connection with the Borrower's failure to perform all of the Borrower's obligations under this agreement, except to the limited extent that the Claims against any such Indemnified Person are proximately caused by such Indemnified Person's gross negligence or willful misconduct. The indemnification provided for in this section shall survive the termination of this agreement and shall extend to and continue to benefit each individual or entity who is or has at any time been an Indemnified Person.

The Borrower's indemnity obligations under this section shall not in any way be affected by the presence or absence of covering insurance, or by the amount of such insurance or by the failure or refusal of any insurance carrier to perform any obligation on its part under any insurance policy or policies affecting the Borrower's assets or the . Borrower's business activities. Should any Claim be made or brought against any Indemnified Person by reason of any event as to which the Borrower's indemnification obligations apply, then, upon any Indemnified Person's demand, the Borrower, at its sole cost and expense, shall defend such Claim in the Borrower's name, if necessary, by the attorneys for the Borrower's insurance carrier (if such Claim is covered by insurance), or otherwise by such attorneys as any Indemnified Person shall approve. Any Indemnified Person may also engage its own attorneys at its reasonable discretion to defend the Indemnified Person and to assist in its defense and the Borrower agrees to pay the reasonable fees and disbursements of such attorneys.

8.11 COUNTERPARTS. This agreement may be executed in multiple counterparts, each of which, when so executed, shall be deemed an original, but all such counterparts, taken together, shall constitute one and the same agreement.

8.12 SOLE DISCRETION OF THE BANK. Whenever the Bank's consent or approval is required under this agreement, the decision as to whether or not to consent or approve shall be in the sole and exclusive discretion of the Bank and the Bank's decision shall be final and conclusive.

9

8.13 ADVICE OF COUNSEL. The Borrower acknowledges that it has been advised by counsel, or had the opportunity to be advised by counsel, in the negotiation, execution and delivery of this agreement and any documents executed and delivered in connection with the Credit facilities.

8.14 RECOVERY OF ADDITIONAL COSTS. If the imposition of or any change in any law, rule, regulation, or guideline, or the interpretation or application of any thereof by any court or administrative or governmental authority (including any request or policy not having the force of law) shall impose, modify, or make applicable any taxes (except federal, state, or local income or franchise taxes imposed on the Bank), reserve requirements, capital adequacy requirements, or other obligations which would (A) increase the cost to the Bank for extending or maintaining the Credit Facilities, (B) reduce the amounts payable to the Bank under the Credit Facilities, or (C) reduce the rate of return on the Bank's capital as a consequence of the Bank's obligations with respect to the Credit Facilities, then the Borrower agrees to pay the Bank such additional amounts as will compensate the Bank therefor, within five (5) days after the Bank's written demand for such payment. The Bank's demand shall be accompanied by an explanation of such imposition or charge and a calculation in reasonable detail of the additional amounts payable by the Borrower, which explanation and calculations shall be conclusive in the absence of manifest error.

8.15 CONFLICTING TERMS. If this agreement is inconsistent with any provision in any agreement related to the Credit Facilities, the Bank shall determine, in the Bank's sole and absolute discretion, which of the provisions shall control any such inconsistency.

8.16 EXPENSES. The Borrower agrees to pay or reimburse the Bank for all its out-of-pocket costs and expenses and reasonable attorneys' fees (including the fees of in-house counsel) incurred in connection with the development, preparation and execution of, and in connection with the enforcement or preservation of any rights under, this agreement, any amendment, supplement, or modification thereto, and any other documents prepared in connection herewith or therewith. These costs and expenses include without limitation any costs or expenses incurred by the Bank in any bankruptcy, reorganization, insolvency or other similar proceeding.

9. USA PATRIOT ACT NOTIFICATION. The following notification is provided to Borrower pursuant to Section 326 of the USA Patriot Act of 2001, 31 U.S.C.
Section 5318:

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT PROCEDURES FOR OPENING A NEW ACCOUNT. To help the government fight the funding of terrorism and money laundering activities, Federal law requires all financial institutions to obtain, verify, and record information that identifies each person or entity that opens an account, including any deposit account, treasury management account, loan, other extension of credit, or other financial services product. What this means for Borrower: When Borrower opens an account, if Borrower is an individual Bank will ask for Borrower's name, taxpayer identification number, residential address, date of birth, and other information that will allow Bank to identify Borrower, and if Borrower is not an individual Bank will ask for Borrower's name, taxpayer identification number, business address, and other information that will allow Bank to identify Borrower. Bank may also ask, if Borrower is an individual to see Borrower's driver's license or other identifying documents, and if Borrower is not an individual to see Borrower's legal organizational documents or other identifying documents.

[THIS SPACE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

10

10. WAIVER OF SPECIAL DAMAGES. THE BORROWER WAIVES, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, ANY RIGHT THE UNDERSIGNED MAY HAVE TO CLAIM OR RECOVER FROM THE BANK IN ANY LEGAL ACTION OR PROCEEDING ANY SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

11. JURY WAIVER. THE BORROWER AND THE BANK HEREBY VOLUNTARILY, KNOWINGLY, IRREVOCABLY AND UNCONDITIONALLY WAIVE ANY RIGHT TO HAVE A JURY PARTICIPATE IN RESOLVING ANY DISPUTE (WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE) BETWEEN THE BORROWER AND THE BANK ARISING OUT OF OR IN ANY WAY RELATED TO THIS DOCUMENT. THIS PROVISION IS A MATERIAL INDUCEMENT TO THE BANK TO PROVIDE THE FINANCING DESCRIBED HEREIN.

ADDRESS(ES) FOR NOTICES:                BORROWER:

7860 East McClan Drive #2               TASER International Inc.
Scottsdale, AZ 85260-1627

Attn: DAN BEHRENDT
                                        By: /s/ Daniel M Behrendt
                                            ------------------------------------
                                            DANIEL M BEHRENDT
                                            Printed Name                   Title

                                        Date Signed: July 12, 2004


ADDRESS FOR NOTICES:                    BANK:

201N. Central Ave, 21st Floor,          Bank One, NA, with main office in
AZ1-1178 Phoenix, AZ 85004              Chicago, IL


Attn:                                   By: /s/ Steven J. Krakoski
      -------------------------------       ------------------------------------
                                            STEVEN J. KRAKOSKI, FVP
                                            Printed Name                   Title

                                        Date Signed: July 13, 2004

11

(BANK ONE LOGO)                                              LINE OF CREDIT NOTE

                                                                  $10,000,000.00
DUE: JUNE 30,2006                                            DATE: JUNE 22, 2004

PROMISE TO PAY. On or before June 30, 2006, for value received, TASER International, Inc. (the "Borrower") promises to pay to Bank One, NA, with its main office in Chicago, IL, whose address is 201 N. Central Ave, 21st Floor, AZ1-1178, Phoenix, AZ 85004 (the "Bank") or order, in lawful money of the United States of America, the sum of Ten Million and 00/100 Dollars ($10,000,000.00) or such lesser sum as is indicated on Bank records, plus interest as provided below.

DEFINITIONS. As used in this Note, the following terms have the following respective meanings:

"ADVANCE" means a Eurodollar Advance or a Prime Rate Advance and "ADVANCES" means all Eurodollar Advances and all Prime Rate Advances under this Note.

"APPLICABLE MARGIN" means with respect to any Prime Rate Advance or Eurodollar Advance, as the case may be, the rate per annum set forth below opposite the applicable Leverage Ratio. Leverage Ratio is defined in the Credit Agreement.

                                                Applicable Margin
                                     ---------------------------------------
          Leverage Ratio             Prime Rate Advance   Eurodollar Advance
          --------------             ------------------   ------------------
Greater than 0.75 to 1.00                   0.50%                2.00%
Less than or equal to 0.75 to 1.00
   but greater than 025 to 1.00             0.75%                1.75%
Less than or equal to 0.25 to 1.00          1.00%                1.50%

The Applicable Margin shall, in each case, be determined and adjusted quarterly on the first day of the month after the date of delivery of the quarterly and annual financial statements required by the Credit Agreement, provided, however, that if such financial statements are not delivered within two Business Days after the required date (each, an "Interest Determination Date"), the Applicable Margin shall increase to the maximum percentage amount set forth in the table above from the date such financial statements were required to be delivered to the Bank until received by the Bank. The Applicable Margin shall be effective from an Interest Determination Date until the next Interest Determination Date. Such determinations by the Bank shall be conclusive absent manifest error. The initial Applicable Margin for Prime Rate Advances is 1.00% and for Eurodollar Advances is 1.50%.

"CREDIT AGREEMENT" means a certain Credit Agreement, dated June 22,2004, between the Borrower and the Bank.

"BUSINESS DAY" means (i) with respect to any borrowing, payment or rate selection of Eurodollar Advances, a day (other than a Saturday or Sunday) on which banks generally are open in Arizona and/or New York for the conduct of substantially all of their commercial lending activities and on which dealings in United States dollars are carried on in the London interbank market and (ii) for all other purposes, a day other than a Saturday, Sunday or any other day on which national banking associations are authorized to be closed.

"EURODOLLAR BASE RATE" means, with respect to the relevant Interest Period, the applicable British Bankers' Association LIBOR rate for deposits in U.S. dollars as reported by any generally recognized financial information service as of 11:00 a.m. (London time) two Business Days prior to the first day of such Interest Period, and having a maturity equal to such Interest Period, provided that, if no such British Bankers' Association LIBOR rate is available to the Bank, the applicable Eurodollar Base Rate for the relevant Interest Period shall instead be the rate determined by the Bank to be the rate at which BANK ONE CORPORATION or one of its affiliate banks offers to place deposits in U.S. dollars with first-class banks in the London interbank market at approximately 11:00 a.m. (London time) two Business Days prior to the first day of such Interest Period, in the approximate amount of the principal amount outstanding on such date and having a maturity equal to such Interest Period.

"EURODOLLAR ADVANCE" means any borrowing under this Note when and to the extent that its interest rate is determined by reference to the Eurodollar Rate.

"EURODOLLAR RATE" means, with respect to a Eurodollar Advance for the relevant Interest Period, the sum of (i) the Applicable Margin plus (ii) the quotient of
(a) the Eurodollar Base Rate applicable to such Interest Period, divided by (b) one minus the Reserve Requirement (expressed as a decimal) applicable to such Interest Period.


"INTEREST PERIOD" means, with respect to a Eurodollar Advance, a period of one
(1), two (2), three (3), six (6), nine (9) or twelve (12) month(s) commencing on a Business Day selected by the Borrower pursuant to this Note. Such Interest Period shall end on the day which corresponds numerically to such date one (l), two (2), three (3), six (6), nine (9) or twelve (12) month(s) thereafter, as applicable, provided, however, that if there is no such numerically corresponding day in such first, second, third, sixth or twelfth succeeding month(s), as applicable, such Interest Period shall end on the last Business Day of such first, second, third, sixth or twelfth succeeding month(s), as applicable. If an Interest Period would otherwise end on a day which is not a Business Day, such Interest Period shall end on the next succeeding Business Day, provided, however, that if said next succeeding Business Day falls in a new calendar month, such Interest Period shall end on the immediately preceding Business Day.

"PRIME RATE" means a rate per annum equal to the prime rate of interest announced from time to time by the Bank or its parent (which is not necessarily the lowest rate charged to any customer), changing when and as said prime rate changes.

"PRIME RATE ADVANCE" means any Advance under this Note when and to the extent that its interest rate is determined by reference to the Prime Rate.

"PRINCIPAL PAYMENT DATE" is defined in the paragraph entitled "Principal Payments" below.

"REGULATION D" means Regulation D of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System as from time to time in effect and any successor thereto or other regulation or official interpretation of said Board of Governors relating to reserve requirements applicable to member banks of the Federal Reserve System.

"RESERVE REQUIREMENT" means, with respect to an Interest Period, the maximum aggregate reserve requirement (including all basic, supplemental, marginal and other reserves) which is imposed under Regulation D.

INTEREST RATES. The Advance(s) evidenced by this Note may be drawn down and remain outstanding as up to five (5) Eurodollar Advances and/or a Prime Rate Advance. The Borrower shall pay interest to the Bank on the outstanding and unpaid principal amount of each Prime Rate Advance at the Prime Rate minus the Applicable Margin and each Eurodollar Advance at the Eurodollar Rate. Interest shall be calculated on the basis of the actual number of days elapsed in a year of 360 days. In no event shall the interest rate applicable to any Advance exceed the maximum rate allowed by law. Any interest payment which would for any reason be deemed unlawful under applicable law shall be applied to principal.

Borrower hereby agrees to pay an effective rate of interest that is the sum of the interest rate provided for in this Note together with any additional rate of interest resulting from any other charges of interest or in the nature paid or to be paid in connection with this Note or the Related Documents.

BANK RECORDS. The Bank shall, in the ordinary course of business, make notations in its records of the date, amount, interest rate and Interest Period of each Advance hereunder, the amount of each payment on the Advances, and other information. Such records shall, in the absence of manifest error, be conclusive as to the outstanding principal balance of and interest rate or rates applicable to this Note.

NOTICE AND MANNER OF ELECTING INTEREST RATES ON ADVANCES. The Borrower shall give the Bank written notice (effective upon receipt) of the Borrower's intent to draw down an Advance under this Note no later than 11:00 a.m. Mountain time, one (1) Business Day before disbursement, if the full amount of the drawn Advance is to be disbursed as a Prime Rate Advance and three (3) Business Days before disbursement, if any part of such Advance is to be disbursed as a Eurodollar Advance. The Borrower's notice must specify; (a) the disbursement date, (b) the amount of each Advance, (c) the type of each Advance (Prime Rate Advance or Eurodollar Advance), and (d) for each Eurodollar Advance, the duration of the applicable Interest Period; provided, however, that the Borrower may not elect an Interest Period ending after the maturity date of this Note. Each Eurodollar Advance shall be in a minimum amount of Five Hundred Thousand and 00/100 Dollars ($500,000.00). All notices under this paragraph are irrevocable. By the Bank's close of business on the disbursement date and upon fulfillment of the conditions set forth herein and in any other of the Related Documents, the Bank shall disburse the requested Advances in immediately available funds by crediting the amount of such Advances to the Borrower's account with the Bank.

CONVERSION AND RENEWALS. The Borrower may elect from time to time to convert one type of Advance into another or to renew any Advance by giving the Bank written notice no later than 11:00 a.m. Mountain time, one (1) Business Day before conversion into a Prime Rate Advance and three (3) Business Days before conversion into or renewal of a Eurodollar Advance, specifying: (a) the renewal or conversion date, (b) the amount of the Advance to be converted or renewed,
(c) in the case of conversion, the type of Advance to be converted into (Prime Rate Advance or Eurodollar Advance), and (d) in the case of renewals of or conversion into a Eurodollar Advance, the applicable Interest Period, provided that (i) the minimum principal amount of each Eurodollar Advance outstanding after a renewal or conversion shall be Five Hundred Thousand and 00/100 Dollars ($500,000.00); (ii) a Eurodollar Advance can only be converted on the last day of the Interest Period for the Advance; and (iii) the Borrower may not elect an Interest Period ending after the maturity data of this Note. All notices given under this paragraph are irrevocable. If the Borrower fails to give

2

the Bank the notice specified above for the renewal or conversion of a Eurodollar Advance by 11:00 a.m. Mountain time three (3) Business Days before the end of the Interest Period for that Advance, the Advance shall automatically be converted to a Prime Rate Advance on the last day of the Interest Period for the Advance.

INTEREST PAYMENTS. Interest on the Advances shall be paid as follows:

A. For each Prime Rate Advance, on the last day of each month beginning with the first month following disbursement of the Advance or following conversion of an Advance into a Prime Rate Advance, and at the maturity or conversion of the Advance into a Eurodollar Advance;

B. For each Eurodollar Advance, on the last day of the Interest Period for the Advance and, if the Interest Period is longer than three months, at three-month intervals beginning with the day three months from the date the Advance is disbursed.

PRINCIPAL PAYMENTS. All outstanding principal and interest is due and payable in full on June 30, 2006, which is defined herein as the "Principal Payment Date".

DEFAULT RATE OF INTEREST. After a default has occurred under this Note, whether or not the Bank elects to accelerate the maturity of this Note because of such default, all Advances outstanding under this Note, including all Eurodollar Advances, shall bear interest at a per annum rate equal to the Prime Rate, plus the Applicable Margin for a Prime Rate Advance, plus three percent (3.00%) from the date the Bank elects to impose such rate. Imposition of this rate shall not affect any limitations contained in this Note on the Borrower's right to repay principal on any Eurodollar Advance before the expiration of the Interest Period for that Advance.

PREPAYMENT. The Borrower may prepay all or any part of any Prime Rate Advance at any time without premium or penalty. The Borrower may prepay any Eurodollar Advance only at the end of an Interest Period.

FUNDING LOSS INDEMNIFICATION. Upon the Bank's request, the Borrower shall pay the Bank amounts sufficient (in the Bank's reasonable opinion) to compensate it for any loss, cost, or expense incurred as a result of:

A. Any payment of a Eurodollar Advance on a date other than the last day of the Interest Period for the Advance, including, without limitation, acceleration of the Advances by the Bank pursuant to this Note or the Related Documents; or

B. Any failure by the Borrower to borrow or renew a Eurodollar Advance on the date specified in the relevant notice from the Borrower to the Bank.

ADDITIONAL COSTS. If any applicable domestic or foreign law, treaty, government rule or regulation now or later in effect (whether or not it now applies to the Bank) or the interpretation or administration thereof by a governmental authority charged with such interpretation or administration, or compliance by the Bank with any guideline, request or directive of such an authority (whether or not having the force of law), shall (a) affect the basis of taxation of payments to the Bank of any amounts payable by the Borrower under this Note or the Related Documents (other than taxes imposed on the overall net income of the Bank by the jurisdiction or by any political subdivision or taxing authority of the jurisdiction in which the Bank has its principal office), or (b) impose, modify or deem applicable any reserve, special deposit or similar requirement against assets of, deposits with or for the account of, or credit extended by the Bank, or (c) impose any other condition with respect to this Note or the Related Documents and the result of any of the foregoing is to increase the cost to the Bank of maintaining any Eurodollar Advance or to reduce the amount of any sum receivable by the Bank on such an Advance, or (d) affect the amount of capital required or expected to be maintained by the Bank (or any corporation controlling the Bank) and the Bank determines that the amount of such capital is increased by or based upon the existence of the Bank's obligations under this Note or the Related Documents and the increase has the effect of reducing the rate of return on the Bank's (or its controlling corporation's) capital as a consequence of the obligations under this Note or the Related Documents to a level below that which the Bank (or its controlling corporation) could have achieved but for such circumstances (taking into consideration its policies with respect to capital adequacy) by an amount deemed by the Bank to be material, then the Borrower shall pay to the Bank, from time to time, upon request by the Bank, additional amounts sufficient to compensate the Bank for the increased cost or reduced sum receivable. Whenever the Bank shall learn of circumstances described in this section which are likely to result in additional costs to the Borrower, the Bank shall give prompt written notice to the Borrower of the basis for and the estimated amount of any such anticipated additional costs. A statement as to the amount of the increased cost or reduced sum receivable, prepared in good faith and in reasonable detail by the Bank and submitted by the Bank to the Borrower, shall be conclusive and binding for all purposes absent manifest error in computation.

ILLEGALITY. If any applicable domestic or foreign law, treaty, rule or regulation now or later in effect (whether or not it now applies to the Bank) or the interpretation or administration thereof by a governmental authority charged with such interpretation or administration, or compliance by the Bank with any guideline, request or directive of such an authority (whether or not having the force of law), shall make it unlawful or impossible for the Bank to maintain or fund the Eurodollar Advances, then, upon notice to the Borrower by the Bank, the outstanding principal amount of the Eurodollar Advances, together with accrued interest and any other

3

amounts payable to the Bank under this Note or the Related Documents on account of the Eurodollar Advances shall be repaid (a) immediately upon the Bank's demand if such change or compliance with such requests, in the Bank's judgment, requires immediate repayment, or (b) at the expiration of the last Interest Period to expire before the effective date of any such change or request provided, however, that subject to the terms and conditions of this Note and the Related Documents the Borrower shall be entitled to simultaneously replace the entire outstanding balance of any Eurodollar Advance repaid in accordance with this section with a Prime Rate Advance in the same amount.

INABILITY TO DETERMINE INTEREST RATE. If the Bank determines that (a) quotations of interest rates for the relevant deposits referred to in the definition of Eurodollar Rate are not being provided in the relevant amounts or for the relevant maturities for purposes of determining the interest rate on a Eurodollar Advance as provided in this Note, or (b) the relevant interest rates referred to in the definition of Eurodollar Rate do not accurately cover the cost to the Bank of making or maintaining Eurodollar Advances, then the Bank shall forthwith give notice of such circumstances to the Borrower, whereupon (i) the obligation of the Bank to make Eurodollar Advances shall be suspended until the Bank notifies the Borrower that the circumstances giving rise to the suspension no longer exists, and (ii) the Borrower shall repay in full the then outstanding principal amount of each Eurodollar Advance, together with accrued interest, on the last day of the then current Interest Period applicable to the Advance, provided, however, that, subject to the terms and conditions of this Note and the Related Documents, the Borrower shall be entitled to simultaneously replace the entire outstanding balance of any Eurodollar Advance repaid in accordance with this section with a Prime Rate Advance in the same amount.

OBLIGATIONS DUE ON NON-BUSINESS DAY. Whenever any payment under this Note becomes due and payable on a day that is not a Business Day, if no default then exists under this Note, the maturity of the payment shall be extended to the next succeeding Business Day, except, in the case of a Eurodollar Advance, if the result of the extension would be to extend the payment into another calendar month, the payment must be made on the immediately preceding Business Day.

MATTERS REGARDING PAYMENT. The Borrower will pay the Bank at the Bank's address shown above or at such other place as the Bank may designate. Payments shall be allocated among principal, interest and fees at the discretion of the Bank unless otherwise agreed or required by applicable law. Acceptance by the Bank of any payment which is less than the payment due at the time shall not constitute a waiver of the Bank's right to receive payment in full at that time or any other time.

LATE FEE. If any payment is not received by the Bank within ten (10) days after its due date, the Bank may assess and the Borrower agrees to pay a late fee equal to the greater of: (a) five percent (5.00%) of the past due amount or (b) Twenty Five and 00/100 Dollars ($25.00), up to the maximum amount of One Thousand Five Hundred and 00/100 Dollars ($1,500.00) per late charge.

BUSINESS LOAN. The Borrower acknowledges and agrees that this Note evidences a loan for a business, commercial, agricultural or similar commercial enterprise purpose, and that all advances made under this Note shall not be used for any personal, family or household purpose.

CREDIT FACILITY. The Bank has approved a credit facility to the Borrower in a principal amount not to exceed the face amount of this Note. The credit facility is in the form of advances made from time to time by the Bank to the Borrower. This Note evidences the Borrower's obligation to repay those advances. The aggregate principal amount of debt evidenced by this Note is the amount reflected from time to time in the records of the Bank. Until the earliest of maturity, the occurrence of any default, or the occurrence of any event that would constitute a default but for the giving of notice or the lapse of time or both until the end of any grace or cure period, the Borrower may borrow, pay down and reborrow under this Note subject to the terms of the Related Documents.

LIABILITIES. The term "Liabilities" in this Note means all obligations, indebtedness and liabilities of the Borrower to any one or more of the Bank, BANK ONE CORPORATION, and any of their subsidiaries, affiliates or successors, now existing or later arising, including, without limitation, all loans, advances, interest, costs, overdraft indebtedness, credit card indebtedness, lease obligations, or obligations relating to any Rate Management Transaction, all monetary obligations incurred or accrued during the pendency of any bankruptcy, insolvency, receivership or other similar proceedings, regardless of whether allowed or allowable in such proceeding, and all renewals, extensions, modifications, consolidations or substitutions of any of the foregoing, whether the Borrower may be liable jointly with others or individually liable as a debtor, maker, co-maker, drawer, endorser, guarantor, surety or otherwise, and whether voluntarily or involuntarily incurred, due or not due, absolute or contingent, direct or indirect, liquidated or unliquidated. The term "Rate Management Transaction" in this Note means any transaction (including an agreement with respect thereto) now existing or hereafter entered into among the Borrower the Bank or BANK ONE CORPORATION, or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates or their successors, which is a rate swap, basis swap, forward rate transaction, commodity swap, commodity option, equity or equity index swap, equity or equity index option, bond option, interest rate option, foreign exchange transaction, cap transaction, floor transaction, collar transaction, forward transaction, currency swap transaction, cross-currency rate swap transaction, currency option or any other similar transaction (including any option with respect to any of these transactions) or any combination thereof, whether linked to one or more interest rates, foreign currencies, commodity prices, equity prices or other financial measures.

4

RELATED DOCUMENTS. The term "Related Documents" in this Note means all loan agreements, credit agreements, reimbursement agreements, security agreements, mortgages, deeds of trust, pledge agreements, assignments, guaranties, or any other instrument or document executed in connection with this Note or in connection with any of the Liabilities.

SECURITY. The term "Collateral" in this Note means all real or personal property described in all security agreements, pledge agreements, mortgages, deeds of trust, assignments, or other instruments now or hereafter executed in connection with this Note or in connection with any of the Liabilities. If applicable, the Collateral secures the payment of this Note and the Liabilities.

BANK'S RIGHT OF SETOFF. In addition to the Collateral, if any, the Borrower grants to the Bank a security interest in, and the Bank is authorized to setoff and apply, all Accounts, Securities and Other Property, and Bank Debt against any and all Liabilities of the Borrower. This right of setoff may be exercised at any time and from time to time, and without prior notice to the Borrower. This security interest and right of setoff may be enforced or exercised by the Bank regardless of whether or not the Bank has made any demand under this paragraph or whether the Liabilities are contingent, matured, or unmatured. Any delay, neglect or conduct by the Bank in exercising its rights under this paragraph will not be a waiver of the right to exercise this right of setoff or enforce this security interest. The rights of the Bank under this paragraph are in addition to other rights the Bank may have in the Related Documents or by law. In this paragraph: (a) the term "Accounts" means any and all accounts and deposits of the Borrower (whether general, special, time, demand, provisional or final) at any time held by the Bank (including all Accounts held jointly with another, but excluding any IRA or Kcogh Account, or any trust Account in which a security interest would be prohibited by law); (b) the term "Securities and Other Property" means any and all securities and other property of the Borrower in the custody, possession or control of the Bank (other than property held by the Bank in a fiduciary capacity); and (c) the term "Bank Debt" means all indebtedness at any time owing by the Bank, to or for the credit or account of the Borrower.

REPRESENTATIONS BY BORROWER. Each Borrower represents that: (a) the execution and delivery of this Note and the performance of the obligations it imposes do not violate any law, conflict with any agreement by which it is bound, or require the consent or approval of any governmental authority or other third party; (b) this Note is a valid and binding agreement, enforceable according to its terms; and (c) all balance sheets, profit and loss statements, and other financial statements furnished to the Bank in connection with the Liabilities are accurate and fairly reflect the financial condition of the organizations and persons to which they apply on their effective dates, including contingent liabilities of every type, which financial condition has not changed materially and adversely since those dates. Each Borrower, other than a natural person, further represents that: (a) it is duly organized, existing and in good standing pursuant to the laws under which it is organized; and (b) the execution and delivery of this Note and the performance of the obligations it imposes (i) are within its powers and have been duly authorized by all necessary action of its governing body, and (ii) do not contravene the terms of its articles of incorporation or organization, its by-laws, or any partnership, operating or other agreement governing its affairs.

EVENTS OF DEFAULT/ACCELERATION. If any of the following events occurs this Note shall become due immediately, without notice, at the Bank's option:

1. The Borrower, or any guarantor of this Note (the "Guarantor"), fails to pay when due any amount payable under this Note, under any of the Liabilities, or under any agreement or instrument evidencing debt to any creditor.

2. The Borrower or any Guarantor (a) fails to observe or perform any other term of this Note; (b) makes any materially incorrect or misleading representation, warranty, or certificate to the Bank; (c) makes any materially incorrect or misleading representation in any financial statement or other information delivered to the Bank; or (d) defaults under the terms of any agreement or instrument relating to any debt for borrowed money (other than the debt evidenced by this Note) and the effect of such default will allow the creditor to declare the debt due before its maturity.

3. In the event (a) there is a default under the terms of any Related Document, (b) any guaranty of the loan evidenced by this Note is terminated or becomes unenforceable in whole or in part, (c) any Guarantor fails to promptly perform under its guaranty, or (d) the Borrower fails to comply with, or pay, or perform under any agreement, now or hereafter in effect, between the Borrower and BANK ONE CORPORATION, or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates or their successors.

4. There is any loss, theft, damage, or destruction of any Collateral not covered by insurance.

5. A "reportable event" (as defined in the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 as amended) occurs that would permit the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation to terminate any employee benefit plan of the Borrower or any affiliate of the Borrower.

6. The Borrower or any Guarantor becomes insolvent or unable to pay its debts as they become due.

7. The Borrower or any Guarantor (a) makes an assignment for the benefit of creditors; (b) consents to the appointment of a custodian, receiver, or trustee for itself or for a substantial part of its assets; or (c) commences any proceeding under any bankruptcy, reorganization, liquidation, insolvency or similar laws of any jurisdiction.

8. A custodian, receiver, or trustee is appointed for the Borrower or any Guarantor or for a substantial part of its assets without its consent.

9. Proceedings are commenced against the Borrower or any Guarantor under any bankruptcy, reorganization, liquidation, or similar laws of any jurisdiction, and they remain undismissed for thirty (30) days after commencement; or the Borrower or the Guarantor consents to the commencement of those proceedings.

5

10. Any judgment is entered against the Borrower or any Guarantor, or any attachment, levy, or garnishment is issued against any property of the Borrower or any Guarantor.

11. The Borrower or any Guarantor dies, or a guardian or conservator is appointed for the Borrower or any Guarantor or all or any portion of the Borrower's assets, any Guarantor's assets, or the Collateral.

12. The Borrower or any Guarantor, without the Bank's written consent (a) is dissolved, (b) merges or consolidates with any third party, (c) leases, sells or otherwise conveys a material part of its assets or business outside the ordinary course of its business, (d) leases, purchases, or otherwise acquires a material part of the assets of any other business entity, except in the ordinary course of its business, or (e) agrees to do any of the foregoing (notwithstanding the foregoing, any subsidiary may merge or consolidate with any other subsidiary, or with the Borrower, so long as the Borrower is the survivor).

13. There is a substantial change in the existing or prospective financial condition of the Borrower or any Guarantor that the Bank in good faith determines to be materially adverse.

14. The Bank in good faith deems itself insecure.

CURE PERIODS. Except as expressly provided to the contrary in this Note or any of the Related Documents, no condition, event or occurrence shall constitute the occurrence of a default under this Note, of a default under any of the Liabilities or of a default under any of the Related Documents unless: (a) the Bank has notified the Borrower of such condition, event or occurrence in writing (a "Default Notice"); and (b) such condition, event, or occurrence has not been fully cured (i) within five (5) days after the Borrower's receipt of a Default Notice, if the condition, event or occurrence giving rise to such Default Notice can be cured by the payment of money, or (ii) within-ten (10) days after the Borrower's receipt of a Default Notice, if the condition, event or occurrence giving rise to such Default Notice is of a nature that it can be cured only by means other than the payment of money.

Provided, however, that the Borrower shall have no notice and cure rights under this section if: (a) the condition, event or occurrence giving rise to the occurrence of a default under this Note, of a default under the Liabilities or of a default under the Related Documents (i) is a condition, event or occurrence described in any of clauses 3(b), (6), (7), (8), (9), (11) or (12) of the section captioned Events of Default/Acceleration section above or (ii) constitutes a breach of any covenant in any Related Document prohibiting the sale or transfer of (1) any assets of any Borrower, Mortgagor, Pledgor, Debtor, Assignor, Trustor or any similar pledging or borrowing party or (2) any of the Collateral; or (b) the Borrower, during the twelve (12) month period immediately preceding any Default Notice, has been given either (i) any other Default Notice covering the same condition, event or occurrence or (ii) three (3) or more other Default Notices of any nature.

REMEDIES. If this Note is not paid at maturity, whether by acceleration or otherwise, the Bank shall have all of the rights and remedies provided by any law or agreement. The Bank is authorized to cause all or any part of the Collateral to be transferred to or registered in its name or in the name of any other person or business entity, with or without designating the capacity of that nominee. Without limiting any other available remedy, the Borrower is liable for any deficiency remaining after disposition of any Collateral. The Borrower is liable to the Bank for all reasonable costs and expenses of every kind incurred in the making or collection of this Note, including without limitation reasonable attorneys' fees and court costs. These costs and expenses include without limitation any costs or expenses incurred by the Bank in any bankruptcy, reorganization, insolvency or other similar proceeding.

WAIVERS. Any party liable on this Note waives (a) to the extent permitted by law, all rights and benefits under any laws or statutes regarding sureties, as may be amended; (b) any right to receive notice of the following matters before the Bank enforces any of its rights: (i) the Bank's acceptance of this Note,
(ii) any demand, diligence, presentment, dishonor and protest, or (iii) any action that the Bank takes regarding the Borrower, anyone else, any Collateral, or any of the Liabilities, that it might be entitled to by law or under any other agreement; (c) any right to require the Bank to proceed against the Borrower, any other obligor or guarantor of the Liabilities, or any Collateral, or pursue any remedy in the Bank's power to pursue; (d) any defense based on any claim that any endorser or other parties' obligations exceed or are more burdensome than those of the Borrower; (e) the benefit of any statute of limitations affecting liability of any endorser or other party liable hereunder or the enforcement hereof; (f) any defense arising by reason of any disability or other defense of the Borrower or by reason of the cessation from any cause whatsoever (other than payment in full) of the obligation of the Borrower for the Liabilities; and (g) any defense based on or arising out of any defense that the Borrower may have to the payment or performance of the Liabilities or any portion thereof. Any party liable on this Note consents to any extension or postponement of time of its payment without limit as to the number or period, to any substitution, exchange or release of all or any part of the Collateral, to the addition of any other party, and to the release or discharge of, or suspension of any lights and remedies against, any person who may be liable for the payment of this Note. The Bank may waive or delay enforcing any of its rights without losing them. Any waiver affects only the specific terms and time period stated in the waiver. No modification or waiver of any provision of this Note is effective unless it is in writing and signed by the party against whom it is being enforced. Without limiting any foregoing waiver, consent or agreement, any party liable on this Note further waives any and all benefits under. Arizona Revised Statutes Sections 12-1641 through 12-1646, inclusive, and Rule 17(f) of the Arizona Rules of Civil Procedure, including any revision or replacement of such statutes or rules hereafter enacted.

SUBORDINATION. Any rights of any party liable on this Note, whether now existing or hereafter arising, to receive payment on account of any indebtedness (including interest) owed to any party liable on this Note by the Borrower, or to withdraw capital invested by it in the Borrower, or to receive distributions from the Borrower, shall at all times be subordinate to the full and prior repayment to the

6

Bank of the Liabilities. No party liable on this Note shall be entitled to enforce or receive payment of any sums hereby subordinated until the Liabilities have been paid in full and any such sums received in violation of this paragraph shall be received by such party in trust for the Bank. Any party liable on this Note agrees to stand still with regard to the Bank's enforcement of its rights, including taking no action to delay, impede or otherwise interfere with the Bank's rights to realize on the Collateral. The foregoing notwithstanding, until the occurrence of any default, any party liable on this Note is not prohibited from receiving distributions from the Borrower in an amount equal to any income tax liability imposed on such party liable on this Note attributable to an ownership interest, if any, in the Borrower.

RIGHTS OF SUBROGATION. Any party liable on this Note waives and agrees not to enforce any rights of subrogation, contribution or indemnification that it may have against the Borrower, any person liable on the Liabilities, or the Collateral, until the Borrower and such party liable on this Note have fully performed all their obligations to the Bank, even if those obligations are not covered by this Note.

REINSTATEMENT. All parties liable on this Note agree that to the extent any payment is received by the Bank in connection with the Liabilities, and all or any part of such payment is subsequently invalidated, declared to be fraudulent or preferential, set aside or required to be repaid by the Bank or paid over to a trustee, receiver or any other entity, whether under any bankruptcy act or otherwise (any such payment is hereinafter referred to as a "Preferential Payment"), then this Note shall continue to be effective or shall be reinstated, as the case may be, and whether or not the Bank is in possession of this Note, and, to the extent of such payment or repayment by the Bank, the Liabilities or part thereof intended to be satisfied by such Preferential Payment shall be revived and continued in full force and effect as if said Preferential Payment had not been made.

GOVERNING LAW AND VENUE. This Note is delivered in the State of Arizona and governed by Arizona law (without giving effect to its laws of conflicts). The Borrower agrees that any legal action or proceeding with respect to any of its obligations under this Note may be brought by the Bank in any state or federal court located in the State of Arizona, as the Bank in its sole discretion may elect. By the execution and delivery of this Note, the Borrower submits to and accepts, for itself and in respect of its property, generally and unconditionally, the non-exclusive jurisdiction of those courts. The Borrower, waives any claim that the State of Arizona is not a convenient forum or the proper venue for any such suit, action or proceeding.

RENEWAL AND EXTENSION. This Note is given in replacement, renewal and/or extension of, but not extinguishing the indebtedness evidenced by, that Line of Credit Note dated May 31, 2003 executed by the Borrower in the original principal amount of Two Million Five Hundred Thousand and 00/100 Dollars ($2,500,000.00), including previous renewals or modifications thereof, if any (the "Prior Note"), and is not a novation thereof. All interest evidenced by the Prior Note shall continue to be due and payable until paid. If applicable, all Collateral continues to secure the payment of this Note and the Liabilities. The provisions of this Note are effective on June 30, 2004.

MISCELLANEOUS. The Borrower, if more than one, is jointly and severally liable for the obligations represented by this Note, the term "Borrower" means any one or more of them, and the receipt of value by any one of them constitutes the receipt of value by the others. This Note binds the Borrower and its successors, and benefits the Bank, its successors and assigns. Any reference to the Bank includes any holder of this Note. Section headings are for convenience of reference only and do not affect the interpretation of this Note. Any notices and demands under or related to this document shall be in writing and delivered to the intended party at its address stated herein, and if to the Bank, at its main office if no other address of the Bank is specified herein, by one of the following means: (a) by hand, (b) by a nationally recognized overnight courier service, or (c) by certified mail, postage prepaid, with return receipt requested. Notice shall be deemed given: (a) upon receipt if delivered by hand,
(b) on the Delivery Day after the day of deposit with a nationally recognized courier service, or (c) on the third Delivery Day after the notice is deposited in the mail "Delivery Day" means a day other than a Saturday, a Sunday, or any other day on which national banking associations are authorized to be closed. Any party may change its address for purposes of the receipt of notices and demands by giving notice of such change in the manner provided in this provision. This Note and any Related Documents embody the entire agreement between the Borrower and the Bank regarding the terms of the loan evidenced by this Note and supercede all oral statements and prior writings relating to that loan. If any provision of this Note cannot be enforced, the remaining portions of this Note shall continue in effect. The Borrower agrees that the Bank may provide any information or knowledge the Bank may have about the Borrower or about any matter relating to this Note or the Related Documents to BANK ONE CORPORATION, or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates or their successors, or to any one or more purchasers or potential purchasers of this Note or the Related Documents. The Borrower agrees that the Bank may at any time sell, assign or transfer one or more interests or participations in all or any part of its rights and obligations in this Note to one or more purchasers whether or not related to the Bank.

GOVERNMENT REGULATION. Borrower shall not (a) be or become subject at any time to any law, regulation, or list of any government agency (including, without limitation, the U.S. Office of Foreign Asset Control list) that prohibits or limits Bank from making any advance or extension of credit to Borrower or from otherwise conducting business with Borrower, or (b) fail to provide documentary and other evidence of Borrower's identity as may be requested by Bank at any time to enable Bank to verify Borrower's identity or to comply with any applicable law or regulation, including, without limitation, Section 326 of the USA Patriot Act of 2001, 31 U.S.C Section 5318.

7

USA PATRIOT ACT NOTIFICATION. The following notification is provided to Borrower pursuant to Section 326 of the USA Patriot Act of 2001,31 U.S.C. Section 53l8:

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT PROCEDURES FOR OPENING A NEW ACCOUNT. To help the government fight the funding of terrorism and money laundering activities, Federal law requires all financial institutions to obtain, verify, and record information that identifies each person or entity that opens an account, including any deposit account, treasury management account, loan, other extension of credit, or other financial services product. What this means for Borrower: When Borrower opens an account, if Borrower is an individual Bank will ask for Borrower's name, taxpayer identification number, residential address, date of birth, and other information that will allow Bank to identify Borrower, and if Borrower is not an individual Bank will ask for Borrower's name, taxpayer identification number, business address, and other information that will allow Bank to identify Borrower. Bank may also ask, if Borrower is an individual to see Borrower's driver's license or other identifying documents, and if Borrower is not an individual to see Borrower's legal organizational documents or other identifying documents.

WAIVER OF SPECIAL DAMAGES. THE BORROWER WAIVES, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, ANY RIGHT THE UNDERSIGNED MAY HAVE TO CLAIM OR RECOVER FROM THE BANK IN ANY LEGAL ACTION OR PROCEEDING ANY SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

JURY WAIVER. THE BORROWER AND THE BANK (BY ITS ACCEPTANCE HEREOF) HEREBY VOLUNTARILY, KNOWINGLY, IRREVOCABLY AND UNCONDITIONALLY WAIVE ANY RIGHT TO HAVE A JURY PARTICIPATE IN RESOLVING ANY DISPUTE (WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE) BETWEEN THE BORROWER AND THE BANK ARISING OUT OF OR IN ANY WAY RELATED TO THIS NOTE OR THE OTHER RELATED DOCUMENTS. THIS PROVISION IS A MATERIAL INDUCEMENT TO THE BANK TO PROVIDE THE FINANCING EVIDENCED BY THIS NOTE.

                                        Borrower:

Address: 7860 East McClan Drive #2      TASER International, Inc.
         Scottsdale, AZ 85260-1627

                                        By: /s/ Daniel M Behrendt
                                            ------------------------------------
                                            DANIEL M BEHRENDT
                                            Printed Name                   Title

                                        Date Signed: JULY 12, 2004

8

(BANK ONE LOGO) NEGATIVE PLEDGE AGREEMENT

Dated as of June 22, 2004

FOR VALUABLE CONSIDERATION, the undersigned, TASER International, Inc. (the "Pledgor"), agrees and pledges to Bank One, NA, with its main office in Chicago, IL, whose address is 201 N. Central Ave, 21st Floor, AZl-1178, Phoenix, AZ 85004 (the "Bank"), its successors and assigns, that from the date of this agreement until the "Liabilities" are paid in full, the Pledgor will not, without the express written consent of the Bank, which consent shall be at the sole discretion of the Bank, create or permit to exist any mortgage, pledge, title retention lien, or other encumbrance or security interest with respect to all assets now owned or hereafter acquired (the "Property"), except liens (i) securing indebtedness to the Bank, and (ii) of current taxes not delinquent or as security for taxes being contested in good faith, or in connection with worker's compensation insurance, unemployment insurance, or of mechanics and material men for sums not due or sums being contested in good faith.

BORROWER. The term "Borrower" in this agreement means TASER International, Inc.

LIABILITIES. The term "Liabilities" in this agreement means all obligations, indebtedness and Liabilities of the Borrower to any one or more of the Bank, BANK ONE CORPORATION, and any of their subsidiaries, affiliates or successors, now existing or later arising, including, without limitation, all loans, advances, interest, costs, overdraft indebtedness, credit card indebtedness, lease obligations, or obligations relating to any Rate Management Transaction, all monetary obligations incurred or accrued during the pendency of any bankruptcy, insolvency, receivership or other similar proceedings, regardless of whether allowed or allowable in such proceeding, and all renewals, extensions, modifications, consolidations or substitutions of any of the foregoing, whether the Borrower may be liable jointly with others or individually liable as a debtor, maker, co-maker, drawer, endorser, guarantor, surety or otherwise, and whether voluntarily or involuntarily incurred, due or not due, absolute or contingent, direct or indirect, liquidated or unliquidated. The term "Rate Management Transaction" in this agreement means any transaction (including an agreement with respect thereto) now existing or hereafter entered into among the Borrower, the Bank or BANK ONE CORPORATION, or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates or their successors, which is a rate swap, basis swap, forward rate transaction, commodity swap, commodity option, equity or equity index swap, equity or equity index option, bond option, interest rate option, foreign exchange transaction, cap transaction, floor transaction, collar transaction, forward transaction, currency swap transaction, cross-currency rate swap transaction, currency option or any other similar transaction (including any option with respect to any of these transactions) or any combination thereof, whether linked to one or more interest rates, foreign currencies, commodity prices, equity prices or other financial measures.

The Pledgor represents and warrants to the Bank that: (a) the Pledgor has disclosed to the Bank in writing any location(s) where the Property may be located; (b) the Property is free and clear of all security interests, and the Pledgor has not executed or recorded, or permitted others to execute or record, any security documents or financing statements relating to any of the Property (except, if applicable, to the Bank); and (c) all of the Property is titled in the Pledgor's legal name.

If the Pledgor defaults in the performance of any agreement set forth herein, the Bank may declare the Liabilities (notwithstanding any provision thereof) immediately due and payable, without demand or notice of any kind. The Bank shall promptly advise the Pledgor of any such declaration, but failure to do so shall not impair the effect of such declaration.

No delay on the part of the Bank in the exercise of any power or right shall operate as a waiver thereof, nor shall any single or partial exercise of any power or right preclude other or further exercise thereof, or the exercise of any other power or right.

Any notices and demands under or related to this document shall be in writing and delivered to the intended party at its address stated herein, and if to the Bank, at its main office if no other address of the Bank is specified herein, by one of the following means: (a) by hand, (b) by a nationally recognized overnight courier service, or (c) by certified mail, postage prepaid, with return receipt requested. Notice shall be deemed given: (a) upon receipt if delivered by hand, (b) on the Delivery Day after the day of deposit with a nationally recognized courier service, or (c) on the third Delivery Day after the notice is deposited in the mail. "Delivery Day" means a day other than a Saturday, a Sunday, or any other day on which national banking associations are authorized to be closed. Any party may change its address for purposes of the receipt of notices and demands by giving notice of such change in the manner provided in this provision.

GOVERNING LAW AND VENUE. This agreement is delivered in the State of Arizona and governed by Arizona law (without giving effect to its laws of conflicts). The Pledgor agrees that any legal action or proceeding with respect to any of its obligations under this agreement may be brought by the Bank in any state or federal court located in the State of Arizona, as the Bank in its sole discretion may elect. By the execution and delivery of this agreement, the Pledgor submits to and accepts, for itself and in respect of its property, generally and unconditionally, the non-exclusive jurisdiction of those courts. The Pledgor waives any claim that the State of Arizona is not a convenient forum or the proper venue for any such suit, action or proceeding.


WAIVER OF SPECIAL DAMAGES. THE PLEDGOR WAIVES, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, ANY RIGHT THE UNDERSIGNED MAY HAVE TO CLAIM OR RECOVER FROM THE BANK IN ANY LEGAL ACTION OR PROCEEDING ANY SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

JURY WAIVER. THE PLEDGOR AND THE BANK (BY ITS ACCEPTANCE HEREOF) HEREBY VOLUNTARILY, KNOWINGLY, IRREVOCABLY AND UNCONDITIONALLY WAIVE ANY RIGHT TO HAVE A JURY PARTICIPATE IN RESOLVING ANY DISPUTE (WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE) BETWEEN OR AMONG THE PLEDGOR AND THE BANK ARISING OUT OF OR IN ANY WAY RELATED TO THIS DOCUMENT. THIS PROVISION IS A MATERIAL INDUCEMENT TO THE BANK TO PROVIDE THE FINANCING DESCRIBED HEREIN.

This agreement shall be binding on the Pledgor and its successors and assigns; and shall inure to the benefit of the Bank and its successors and assigns.

PLEDGOR:

7860 East McClan Drive #2               TASER International, Inc.
Scottsdale, AZ 85260-1627

                                        By: /s/ Daniel M Behrendt
                                            ------------------------------------
                                            DANIEL M BEHRENDT
                                            Printed Name                   Title
Fax/Telex No.480 991 0791

                                        Date Signed: JULY 12, 2004

2

EXHIBIT 10.14

EXECUTIVE EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT

THIS EXECUTIVE EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT (the "Agreement") is made and entered into this 28th day of April, 2004, to be effective as of April 28, 2004 between TASER International, Incorporated (the "Company"), located at 7860 East McClain Drive, Suite 2, Scottsdale, Arizona 85260 and Daniel Behrendt (the "Executive").

RECITALS:

WHISEAS, the Company wishes to provide for the employment of Executive as its Chief Financial Officer for the term, and on the conditions, set forth herein; and

WHISEAS, Executive desires to be assured of certain minimum compensation from Company for Executive's services during the term hereof and to be protected, and compensated, in the event of any change in the control affecting the Company; and,

WHISEAS, Company desires reasonable protection of Company's confidential business and technical information which has been developed by the Company in recent years at substantial expense.

NOW, THISEFORE, in consideration of the mutual promises contained herein, the Company and Executive each intend to be legally bound, covenant and agree as follows:

1. EMPLOYMENT. Upon the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement, Company hereby employs Executive as its Chief Financial Officer, and Executive accepts such employment. Except as expressly provided herein, the termination of this Agreement by either party shall also terminate Executive's employment by Company.

2. DUTIES. Executive shall devote his full-time and best efforts to the Company and shall fulfill the duties of his position which shall include such duties as may, from time to time, be assigned to him by the Chief Executive or Board of Directors of the Company, provided such duties are reasonably consistent with Executive's education, experience and background.

3. TERM. Subject to the provisions of Sections 6 and 11 hereof, Executive's employment shall commence on the effective date hereof ("Employment Date") and continue for a period of one year, but shall be automatically extended, unless otherwise terminated in accordance herewith, for additional consecutive one year term on each anniversary date, thereafter, unless either party gives written notice to the other of termination in accordance herewith. In any event, the Agreement shall automatically terminate, without notice, when Executive reaches 70 years of age. If employment is


continued after the age of 70 by mutual agreement, it shall be terminable at will by either party.

4. COMPENSATION.

(a) 2004-2005 Annual Base Salary. For services rendered under this Agreement during the first year of this Agreement, Company shall pay Executive a minimum Base Salary ("Base Salary") (Base Salary shall mean regular cash compensation paid on a periodic basis exclusive of any and all benefits, bonuses or other incentive payments made or obligated by Company to Executive hereunder) at an annual rate of $200,000, payable in accordance with existing payroll practices of the Company.. In subsequent years, based upon extensions of this Agreement, Executive's Base Salary shall be adjusted annually based upon a performance and compensation review conducted by the Compensation Committee of the Company's Board of Directors and negotiated and mutually agreed to, in good faith, between Executive and the Company's Board of Directors. Such review will be based upon both individual and Company performance and shall be completed by the anniversary date of each subsequent year. The foregoing 2004-2005 minimum Base Salary for Executive shall not prohibit Company's Board of Directors (or the Compensation Committee of Company's Board of Directors ), to set Executive's Base Salary during such initial one year term at an annual rate greater than that prescribed above; however in no instance shall Executive's Base Salary be less than that set forth above.

(b) Annual Year-End Cash Bonus. Executive shall also be eligible to earn an annual year-end cash bonus which shall be determined by a review at the discretion of the Company's Board of Director.

(c) Fringe Benefits. In addition to the compensation and incentive payments payable to Executive as provided in Sections 4(a) and (b) above:

(i) Vacation. Executive shall be entitled to four (4) weeks paid vacation each calendar year. All such paid vacation shall accumulate, so that if Executive's full vacation is not taken in a particular calendar year, any unused portion shall be carried into subsequent years; however, such accumulation shall not exceed an aggregate of four
(4) calendar weeks.

(ii) Long Term Disability. The Company shall also maintain (so long as such insurance is available at commercially standard rates) long-term disability policy on Executive providing for the payment to age 65 of benefit equivalent to seventy percent (70%) of Executive's annual Base Salary in the event Executive becomes permanently disabled as defined in Section 6(b)(ii).


(iii) Other Benefits. The Executive shall be entitled to participate in all other benefit programs offered by the Company to its full-time executive employees, including, but not limited to, health, medical, dental and eye care.

5. BUSINESS EXPENSES. The Company shall, in accordance with, and to the extent of, its policies in effect from time to time, bear all customary business expenses (including the advancement of certain expenses) incurred by the Executive in performing his duties as an executive of the Company, provided that Executive accounts promptly such expenses to Company in the manner prescribed from time to time by the Company.

6. TERMINATION. Subject to the respective continuing obligations of the parties pursuant to Sections 7, 8, 9, 10,11, 12 and 13, this Agreement may be terminated prior to the expiration of its then remaining applicable term only as follows:

(a) By the Company. The Company may terminate this Agreement under the following circumstances:

(i) For "Cause". Company may terminate this Agreement on thirty
(30) days written notice to Executive for "cause", including, fraud, misrepresentation, theft or embezzlement of Company assets, material intentional violations of law or Company policies, or a material breach of the provisions of this Agreement, including specifically the repeated failure to perform his duties as required by Section 2 hereof after written notice of such failure from Company; however, in the event of termination related to Executive's performance, Executive's termination shall only be effective upon the expiration of a sixty (60) day cure period following a lack of corrective action having been undertaken by Executive during said cure period.

(ii) Without "Cause". The Company may terminate this Agreement upon twelve (12) months written notice without "cause." The Base Salary compensation due and owing by the Company to Executive following either of such early terminations of this Agreement shall be paid as set forth at Section 7(a)(iv) hereof.

(b) Death and Disability.


(i) Death. If Executive should die during the term of this Agreement, this Agreement shall thereupon terminate; provided, however, that the Company shall pay to the Executive's beneficiary or estate the compensation provided in Section 7(a)(ii) below.

(ii) Permanent Disability. In the event the Executive should become permanently disabled during the term of this Agreement, this Agreement shall also terminate. For the purposes hereof, a permanent disability shall mean that disability resulting from injury, disease or other cause, whether mental or physical, which incapacitates the Executive from performing his normal duties as an employee, appears to be permanent in nature and contemplates the continuous, necessary and substantially complete loss of all management and professional activities for a continuous period of six (6) months.

(iii) Partial Disability. If the Executive should become partially disabled, he shall be entitled to his salary as provided herein for a period of nine (9) months. At the end of said period of time, if such Executive remains partially disabled, the disabled Executive's salary shall be reduced according to the amount of time the disabled Executive is able to devote to the Company's business.

(iv) Temporary Disability. In the event the Executive should become disabled, but such disability is not permanent, as defined above, such disabled Executive shall be entitled to his salary for a period of nine (9) months. If such temporary disability continues longer than said period of time, then the disabled Executive shall be deemed to have become permanently disabled for the purposes of this Agreement at the end of said nine (9) month period.

7. COMPENSATION PAYABLE FOLLOWING EARLY TERMINATION.

(a) In the event of any termination pursuant to Section 6, Executive's Base Salary shall be paid as follows:

(i) In the event of termination pursuant to Section 6(a)(i) (for "cause"), Executive's Base Salary shall continue to be paid on a semi-monthly basis for sixty


(60) days from the effective date of such termination and Executive shall also be entitled to continue to participate in those benefit programs provided by subsections 4(e)(iv-viii) (inclusive), for twelve (12) months following such termination, at Executive's expense;

(ii) In the event of termination of this Agreement by reason of Executive's death, Executive's Base Salary shall terminate as of the end of the eighteenth (18th) month following the Executive's death;

(iii) In the event of termination of this Agreement by reason of disability, Executive's Base Salary shall be terminated as of the end the eighteenth (18th) month period following Executive's inability to perform his duties occurs; and

(iv) In the event of any termination by the Company pursuant to
Section 6(a)(ii) (without "cause"), Executive's Base Salary shall be continued to be paid on a semi-monthly basis, but shall terminate at the end of the twelve (12) month period following such written notice of termination by the Company. In lieu of such continued semi-monthly Base Salary, the Company and Executive may agree to a lump-sum distribution to Executive pursuant to such termination in a form, substance and manner mutually acceptable to Company and Executive, pursuant to a written Severance Agreement then mutually negotiated between the Company and Executive in connection with such termination.

(b) In the event of termination by reason of Executive's death, disability, termination without cause, or any Change in Control, as defined at Section 11:

(i) Executive shall receive a pro rata portion (prorated through the last day Base Salary is payable pursuant to clauses
(a)(ii), (a)(iii) and (a)(iv), respectively) of any bonus or incentive payment (for the year in which death, disability or termination occurred), to which he would have been entitled had he remained continuously employed for the full fiscal year in which death, disability or termination occurred and continued to perform his duties in the


same manner as they were performed immediately prior to the death, disability or termination;

(ii) The right to exercise any unexpired and non-vested stock options previously granted Executive shall immediately vest and accelerate; and

(iii) Any and all payments owing to Executive arising from a termination of this Agreement resulting from a permanent or partial disability of Executive shall first be provided and paid pursuant to the Company's existing disability policy, as then in effect, but shall be further supplemented to the extent provided by this Agreement but all such payments due and owing to Executive arising from such permanent or partial disability shall not be cumulative or aggregated.

8. CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION.

(a) For purposes of this Section 8, the term "Confidential Information" means information which is not generally known and which is proprietary to Company, including: (i) trade secret information about Company and its services; and (ii) information relating to the business of Company as conducted at any time within the previous two
(2) years or anticipated to be conducted by Company, and to any of its past, current or anticipated products, including, without limitation, information about Company's research, development, services, purchasing, accounting, engineering, marketing, selling, leasing or servicing. All information which Executive has a reasonable basis to consider Confidential Information or which is treated by Company as being Confidential Information shall be presumed to be Confidential Information, whethis originated by Executive, or by others, and without regard to the manner in which Executive obtains access to such information.

(b) Executive will not during the term of this Agreement and following expiration or termination of this Agreement, use or disclose any Confidential Information to any person not employed by Company without the prior authorization of Company and will use reasonably prudent care to safeguard, protect and to prevent the unauthorized disclosure of, all of such Confidential Information.

9. INVENTIONS.


(a) For purposes of this Section 9, the term "Inventions" means discoveries, improvements and ideas (whethis or not in writing or reduced to practice) and works of authorship, whethis or not patentable or copyrightable: (1) which relate directly to the business of Company, or to Company's actual or demonstrably anticipated research or development; (2) which result from any work performed by Executive for Company; (3) for which equipment, supplies, facilities or trade secret information of Company is utilized; or (4) which were conceived or developed during the time Executive was obligated to perform the duties described in Section 2.

(b) Executive agrees that all Inventions made, authored or conceived by Executive, either solely or jointly with others, during Executive's employment with Company (except as otherwise provided above), shall be the sole and exclusive property of Company. Upon termination of this Agreement, Executive shall turn over to a designated representative of Company all property in Executive's possession and custody belonging to Company. Executive shall not retain any copies or reproductions of correspondence, memoranda, reports, notebooks, drawings, photographs or other documents relating in any way to the affairs of Company which came into Executive's possession at any time during the term of this Agreement.

Executive is hereby notified that this Agreement does not apply to any invention for which no equipment, supplies, facility, or trade secret information of Company was used and which was developed initially on the Executive's own time and: (1) which does not relate: (a) directly to the business of Company; or (b) to Company's actual or demonstrably anticipated research or development; or (2) which does not result from any work performed by Executive for the Company.

10. NON-COMPETITION. Executive agrees that for a period of eighteen (18) months following termination of this Agreement for any reason (except in the case of termination of this Agreement pursuant to Section 11 because of a Change in Control or any Business Combination or any termination of this Agreement without cause), he will not directly or indirectly, alone or as a partner, officer, director, or shareholder of any other firm or entity, engage in any commercial activity in the United States in competition with any part of Company's business: (a) that was under the Executive's management or supervision during the last year of employment by Company; or (b) with respect to which Executive has Confidential Information as defined in Section 8 of this Agreement.


11. "BUSINESS COMBINATION" OR "CHANGE IN CONTROL".

(a) Change in Control. For purposes of this Section 11, a "Business Combination" or "Change in Control" with respect to, or concerning, the Company shall mean the following:

(i) the sale, lease, exchange or other transfer, directly or indirectly of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company (in one transaction or in a series of related transactions) to a person or entity that is not controlled by the Company;

(ii) the approval by the shareholders of the Company of any plan or proposal for the liquidation or dissolution of the Company;

(iii) a merger or consolidation to which the Company is a party if the shareholders of the Company immediately prior to effective date of such merger or consolidation have "beneficial ownership" (as defined in Rule 13d-3 under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the "Exchange Act")), immediately following the effective date of such merger or consolidation, of securities of the surviving corporation representing: (A) more than 50%, but not more than 80%, of the combined voting power of the surviving corporation's then outstanding securities ordinarily having the right to vote at elections of directors, unless such merger or consolidation has been approved in advance by the Incumbent Directors; or (B) 50% or less of the combined voting power of the surviving corporation's then outstanding securities ordinarily having the right to vote at elections of directors (regardless of any approval by the Incumbent Directors);

(iv) any person becomes after the effective date of this Agreement the "beneficial owner" (as defined in Rule 13d-3 of the Exchange Act), directly or indirectly, of: (A) 20% or more, but not 50% or more, of the combined voting power of the Company's outstanding securities ordinarily having the right to vote at elections of directors, unless the transaction resulting in such ownership has been approved in advance by the Incumbent Directors; or (B) 50% or more of the combined voting power of the Company's


outstanding securities ordinarily having the right to vote at elections of directors (regardless of any approval by the Incumbent Directors);

(v) the Incumbent Directors cease, for any reason, to constitute at least a majority of the Company's Board; or

(vi) a change in control of the Company of a nature that would be required to be reported pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Exchange Act, whether or not the Company is then subject to such reporting requirements.

(b) Incumbent Directors. For purposes of this Section 11, the term "Incumbent Directors" shall mean any individual who is a member of the Board of the Company on the effective date of this Agreement, as well as any individual who subsequently becomes a member of the Board whose election, or nomination for election by the Company's shareholders, was approved by a vote of at least a majority of the then Incumbent Directors (either by specific vote or by approval of the Proxy Statement of the Company in which such individual is named as a nominee for director without objection to such nomination).

(c) Executive's Option to Terminate This Agreement. It is expressly recognized by the parties that a Business Combination would necessarily result in material alteration or diminishment of Executive's position and responsibilities. Therefore, if, during the term of this Agreement, there shall occur, with or without the consent of Company, any Business Combination or Change in Control, Executive shall have an exclusive option to terminate this Agreement on twenty (20) calendar days' notice to the Company.

(d) Compensation Payable to Executive Upon Termination Following a Change in Control. It is expressly recognized that Executive's position with Company and agreement to be bound by the terms of this Agreement represent a commitment in terms of Executive's personal and professional career which cannot be reduced to monetary terms, and thus, necessarily constitutes a forbearance of options now and in the future open to Executive in Company's areas of endeavor. Accordingly, in the event Executive elects to terminate this Agreement in connection with any Business Combination or Change in Control under this Section 11:


(i) Executive shall be under no obligation whatever to seek other employment opportunities during any period between termination of this Agreement under this Section 11 and the expiration of Executive's then unexpired term of this Agreement as it existed at the time of termination, or twenty-four (24) months, whichever is longer, and Executive shall not be obligated to accept any other employment opportunity which may be offered to Executive during such period;

(ii) During such unexpired term of this Agreement, or for twelve
(12) months thereafter, whichever is longer, Executive shall continue to receive on a semimonthly basis, Executive's Base Salary then in effect upon the date of such notice to the Company hereunder;

(iii) In lieu of the continued cash compensation provided in Section 11(d)(ii) above, Executive may elect, in writing, to receive from the Company a lump sum cash settlement in an amount equal to 199% of Executive's then existing Base Salary for twelve (12) months (at the rate in effect immediately prior to such Business Combination); provided, however, Executive's election to receive a lump sum cash settlement from the Company, in lieu of the semi-monthly payments specified above, shall occur and be paid within 90 days of the termination of this Agreement arising from any such Business Combination or any Change in Control.

(iv) Executive's termination of this Agreement by reason of a Change in Control described in this Section 11 and the receipt by Executive of any amounts pursuant to subsection 11(d), shall not preclude Executive' continued employment with Company, or the surviving entity in any Business Combination, on such terms as shall then be mutually negotiated between Company (or any such surviving entity) and Executive following such termination;

(v) The right to exercise all unexpired and non-vested stock options in favor of Executive shall immediately vest and accelerate;

(vi) Executive shall be entitled to continue to participate in those benefit programs and perquisites provided by subsection 4(c) hereof, for twelve (12) months following termination, at the Company's expense; and


(vii) Notwithstanding any other provisions of this Agreement, or any other agreement, contract or understanding heretofore, or hereafter, entered into between the Company and Executive, if any "payments" (including without limitation, any benefits or transfers of property or the acceleration of the vesting of any benefits) and the nature of compensation under any arrangement that is considered contingent on a change in control for purpose of Section 2800 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the "Code"), together with any other payments that Executive has the right to receive from the Company, or any corporation that is a member of an "affiliated group" (as defined in Section 1504A of the Code without regard to
Section 1504B of the Code), of which the Company is a member, would constitute a "parachute payment" (as defined in Section 2800 of the Code), the aggregate amount of such payments shall be reduced to equal the largest amount as would result in no portion of such payments being subject to the excise tax imposed by Section 4999 of the Code; provided however, Executive shall be entitled to designate and select among such payments that will be reduced, and/or eliminated, in order to comply with the forgoing provision of the Code.

12. NO ADEQUATE REMEDY. The parties declare that is impossible to measure in money the damages which will accrue to either party by reason of a failure to perform any of the obligations under this Agreement. Therefore, if either party shall institute any action or proceeding to enforce the provisions hereof, such person against whom such action or proceeding is brought hereby waives the claim or defense that such party has an adequate remedy at law, and such person shall not urge in any such action or proceeding the claim or defense that such party has an adequate remedy at law.

13. MISCELLANEOUS.

(a) Successors and Assigns. This Agreement shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of all successors and assigns of the Company, whether by way of merger, consolidation, operation of law, assignment, purchase or other acquisition of substantially all of the assets or business of Company and shall only be assignable under the foregoing circumstances and shall be deemed to be materially breached by Company if any such successor or assign does not absolutely and unconditionally assume all of Company's obligations to Executive hereunder. Any such successor or assign shall be included in the term "Company" as used in this Agreement.


(b) Notices. All notices, requests and demands given to, or made, pursuant hereto shall, except as otherwise specified herein, be in writing and be delivered or mailed to any such party at its address which:

(i) In the case of Company shall be:

TASER International, Incorporated 7339 East Evans Road
Scottsdale, Arizona 85260

With a copy to:

Thomas P. Palmer, Esq.

Tonkon Torp, LLP

1600 Pioneer Tower
888 SW Fifth Avenue
Portland, Oregon 97204

(ii) In the case of the Executive shall be:

Daniel Behrendt
2126 Campus Road
Beachwood, OH 44122

Either party may, by notice hereunder, designate a change of address. Any notice, if mailed properly addressed, postage prepaid, registered or certified mail, shall be deemed dispatched on the registered date or that stamped on the certified mail receipt, and shall be deemed received within the fifth business day thereafter, or when it is actually received, whichever is sooner.

(c) Captions. The various headings or captions in this Agreement are for convenience only and shall not affect the meaning or interpretation of this Agreement.

(d) Governing Law. The validity, construction and performance of this Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Arizona. Any dispute involving or affecting this agreement, or the services to be performed shall be determined and resolved by binding arbitration in the County of Maricopa, State of Arizona, in accordance with the Commercial Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association.

(e) Construction. Wherever possible, each provision of this


Agreement shall be interpreted in such manner as to be effective and valid under applicable law, but if any provision of this Agreement shall be prohibited by or invalid under applicable law, such provision shall be ineffective only to the extent of such prohibition or invalidity without invalidating the remainder of such provision or the remaining provisions of this Agreement.

(f) Waivers. No failure on the part of either party to exercise, and no delay in exercising, any right or remedy hereunder shall operate as a waiver thereof, nor shall any single or partial exercise of any right or remedy hereunder preclude any other or further exercise thereof or the exercise of any right or remedy granted hereby or by any related document or by law.

(g) Modification. This Agreement may not be, and shall not be, modified or amended except by a written instrument signed by both parties hereto.

(h) No Conflicting Business. Executive agrees that he will not, during the term of this Agreement, transact business with the Company personally, or as an agent, owner, partner, shareholder of any other entity; provided, however, Executive may enter into any business transaction that is, in the opinion of the Company's Board of Directors, reasonable, prudent or beneficial to the Company, so long as any such business transaction is at arms-length as though between independent and prudent individuals and is ratified and approved by the designated members of the Company's Board of Directors.

(i) Entire Agreement. This Agreement constitutes the entire Agreement and understanding between the parties hereto in reference to all the matters herein agreed upon; provided, however, that this Agreement shall not deprive Executive of any other rights Executive may have now, or in the future, pursuant to law or the provisions of Company benefit plans.

(j) Counterparts. This Agreement shall be executed in at least two counterparts, each of which shall constitute an original, but both of which, when taken together, will constitute one in the same instrument.

(k) Amendment. This Agreement may be modified only by written agreement executed by both parties hereto.


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be duly executed and delivered the day and year first above written.

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INCORPORATED

Its: Chief Executive Officer

EXECUTIVE


Daniel Behrendt

Exhibit 10.15

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.

2004 STOCK OPTION PLAN

(APPROVED BY THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS ON JANUARY 30, 2004 AND
SUBJECT TO STOCKHOLDER APPROVAL AT THE 2004 ANNUAL MEETING)

SECTION 1. INTRODUCTION

Taser International, Inc. has adopted this 2004 Stock Option Plan providing for the grant of stock options to certain eligible individuals who have or will render services to the Company. This Plan has been approved by the Board of Directors of the Company effective January 30, 2004 and is subject to Stockholder approval at the 2004 Annual Meeting.

The purpose of the Plan is to advance the interests of the Company and its stockholders by enhancing the Company's ability to attract and retain qualified persons to perform services for the Company, by providing incentives to such persons to put forth maximum efforts for the Company and by rewarding persons who contribute to the achievement of the Company's economic objectives. The Plan seeks to achieve this purpose by providing for Options which may constitute Incentive Stock Options or Non-qualified Stock Options.

SECTION 2. ADMINISTRATION

SECTION 2.1 COMMITTEE COMPOSITION.

The Plan shall be administered by the Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors consisting of not less than three persons. Members of such committee shall be appointed from time to time by the Board, shall serve at the pleasure of the Board and may resign at any time upon written notice to the Board. As used in this Plan, the term "Committee" will refer to such Compensation Committee.

SECTION 2.2 COMMITTEE RESPONSIBILITIES.

(a) The Committee shall have the authority to recommend to the Board for its consideration and approval (i) the Employees, Outside Directors and Consultants who are to receive Options under the Plan, (ii) the time or times when Options will be granted, (iii) the type, number, exercise price, vesting requirements and other features and conditions of such Options, (iv) the duration of each Option, (v) the restrictions and conditions to which the exercisability of Options may be subject, and (vi) such other provisions of the Options as the Committee may deem necessary or desirable and as are consistent with the terms of the Plan. The Committee shall determine the form or forms of the Stock Option Agreements with Optionees which shall evidence the particular terms, conditions, rights and duties of the Company and the Optionees with respect to Options granted pursuant to the Plan, which agreement shall be consistent with the provisions of the Plan.

(b) With the consent of the Optionee affected thereby, and subject to the consideration and approval of the Board, the Committee may amend or modify the terms of any outstanding Option in any manner, provided that the amended or modified terms are permitted by the Plan as then in effect. Without

Stock Option Plan- Page 1


limiting the generality of the foregoing sentence, the Committee may, with the consent of the Optionee affected thereby and subject to consideration and approval of the Board, modify the exercise price, number of shares, or other terms and conditions of an Option, extend the term of an Option, accelerate the exercisability or vesting or otherwise terminate any restrictions relating to an Option, accept surrender of any outstanding Option, or, to the extent not previously exercised or vested, authorize the grant of new Options in substitution for surrendered Options.

(c) The Committee shall have the authority to interpret the Plan and, subject to the provisions of the Plan, to establish, adopt and revise such rules and regulations relating to the Plan as it may deem necessary or advisable for the administration of the Plan. The Committee's decisions and determinations under the Plan need not be uniform and may be made selectively among Optionees, whether or not such Optionees are similarly situated. Each determination, interpretation, or other action made or taken by the Committee pursuant to the provisions of the Plan shall be conclusive and binding for all purposes. No member of the Committee shall be liable for any action or determination made in good faith with respect to the Plan or any Option granted under the Plan.

SECTION 3. SHARES AVAILABLE FOR GRANTS

SECTION 3.1 BASIC LIMITATION.

The maximum number of shares of Common Stock that shall be authorized and reserved for issuance under the Plan shall be 1,500,000 shares, $.00001 par value on a post January 26, 2004 stock split basis. The limitation of this
Section 3.1 shall be subject to adjustment pursuant to Section 3.3.

SECTION 3.2 ADDITIONAL SHARES AVAILABLE FOR USE.

If Options are forfeited or terminate for any other reason before being exercised, then the corresponding Common Stock shall again become available for the grant of Options under the Plan. Also, previously acquired shares of Common Stock which are tendered by the Optionee to the Company in whole or partial satisfaction of the Exercise Price pursuant to Section 6.2, or in whole or partial satisfaction of withholding obligations pursuant to Section 10.2, shall become available for use under the Plan to the extent permitted by Rule 16b-3 of the Exchange Act. The aggregate number of shares of Common Stock that may be issued under the Plan upon the exercise of Incentive Stock Options shall in no event exceed 5,000,000 shares.

SECTION 3.3 ADJUSTMENT TO SHARES.

In the event of a stock split, any reorganization, merger, consolidation, recapitalization, liquidation, reclassification, stock dividend payable in Common Stock, extraordinary dividend or divestiture (including a spin-off), a combination or consolidation of the outstanding Common Stock (by reclassification or otherwise) into a lesser number of shares of Common Stock, or any other change in the corporate structure or shares of the Company, the Committee (or, if the Company is not the surviving corporation in any such transaction, the board of directors of the surviving corporation) shall make appropriate adjustments (which determination shall be conclusive) as to one or more of:

(a) The number of and kind of securities subject to and reserved under the Plan;

Stock Option Plan- Page 2


(b) In order to prevent dilution or enlargement of the rights of Optionees, the number, kind and Exercise Price of securities subject to outstanding Options;

(c) The limitations set forth in Section 5.2.

Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, in the event that any of such transactions are effected in such a way that holders of Common Stock shall be entitled to receive stock, securities, or assets, including cash, with respect to or in exchange for such Common Stock, all Optionees holding outstanding Options shall upon the exercise of such Options receive, in lieu of any shares of Common Stock they may be entitled to receive, such stock, securities, or assets, including cash, as would have been issued to such Optionees if their Options had been exercised and such Optionees had received Common Stock prior to such transaction.

Notwithstanding the provisions of this Section 3.3, there shall be no adjustment to the shares authorized pursuant to this Plan for an event described in Section 3.3 that occurs before or simultaneously with the effective date of this Plan.

Except as provided in this Section 3.3, an Optionee shall have no rights by reason of any issue by the Company of stock of any class or securities convertible into stock of any class, any subdivision or consolidation of shares of stock of any class, the payment of any stock dividend or any other increase or decrease in the number of shares of stock of any class.

SECTION 4. ELIGIBILITY

SECTION 4.1 NON-QUALIFIED STOCK OPTIONS.

Only Employees, Outside Directors and Consultants shall be eligible for the grant of NSOs.

SECTION 4.2 INCENTIVE STOCK OPTIONS.

Only Employees who are common-law employees of the Company, a Parent or a Subsidiary shall be eligible for the grant of Incentive Stock Options. In addition, an Employee who owns more than 10% of the total combined voting power of all classes of outstanding stock of the Company or any of its Parents or Subsidiaries shall not be eligible for the grant of an Incentive Stock Option unless the requirements set forth in Section 422(c)(6) of the Code are satisfied.

SECTION 5. STOCK OPTIONS

SECTION 5.1 STOCK OPTION AGREEMENT.

Each grant of an Option under the Plan shall be evidenced by a Stock Option Agreement between the Optionee and the Company. Such Option shall be subject to all applicable terms of the Plan and may be subject to any other terms that are not inconsistent with the Plan as shall be determined by the Committee in its discretion and upon consideration and approval of the Board. The provisions of the various Stock Option Agreements entered into under the Plan need not be identical. Options shall be granted for no cash consideration unless minimal cash consideration is required by applicable law.

Stock Option Plan- Page 3


SECTION 5.2 NUMBER OF SHARES.

Each Stock Option Agreement shall specify the number of Common Stock subject to the Option. Options granted to any Optionee in a single fiscal year of the Company shall not cover more than 225,000 shares of Common Stock, except that Options granted to a new Employee in the fiscal year of the Company in which his or her service as an Employee first commences shall not cover more than 300,000 shares of Common Stock. The limitations set forth in the preceding sentence shall be subject to adjustment in accordance with Section 3.3.

SECTION 5.3 EXERCISE PRICE.

(a) Incentive Stock Options.

The Exercise Price per share to be paid by the Optionee at the time an Incentive Stock Option is exercised shall be determined by the Committee, in its discretion and upon consideration and approval of the Board; provided, however that the such price shall not be less than (i) 100% of the Fair Market Value of one share of Common Stock on the date the Option is granted, or (ii) 110% of the Fair Market Value of one share of Common Stock on the date the Option is granted if, at the time the Option is granted, the Optionee owns, directly or indirectly (as determined pursuant to Section 424(d) of the Code), more than 10% of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or any Subsidiary or Parent corporation of the Company (within the meaning of Sections 424(f) and 424(e), respectively, of the Code).

(b) Non-qualified Stock Options.

The Exercise Price per share to be paid by the Optionee at the time an NSO is exercised shall be determined by the Committee, in its discretion and upon consideration and approval of the Board; provided, however that the such price shall not be less than 85% of the Fair Market Value of one share of Common Stock on the date the Option is granted.

SECTION 5.4 EXERCISABILITY AND TERM.

An Option shall become exercisable at such times and in such installments (which may be cumulative) as shall be determined by the Committee in its discretion at the time the Option is granted. Upon the completion of its term, an Option, to the extent not then exercised, shall expire.

(a) Incentive Stock Options.

The period during which an Incentive Stock Option may be exercised shall be fixed by the Committee in its discretion and upon consideration and approval of the Board at the time such Option is granted; provided that the term of an Incentive Stock Option shall in no event exceed (i) 10 years from the date of grant, or (ii) 5 years from the date of grant if, at the time the Option is granted, the Optionee owns, directly or indirectly (as determined pursuant to
Section 424(d) of the Code), more than 10% of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or any Subsidiary or Parent corporation of the Company (within the meaning of Sections 424(f) and 424(e), respectively, of the Code).

(a) Non-qualified Stock Options.

Stock Option Plan- Page 4


The period during which an NSO may be exercised shall be fixed by the Committee in its discretion and upon consideration and approval of the Board at the time such Option is granted.

SECTION 5.5 MANNER OF EXERCISE.

An Option may be exercised by an Optionee in whole or in part from time to time, subject to the conditions contained herein and in the Stock Option Agreement, by delivery, in person or through certified or registered mail, of written notice of exercise to the Company at its principal executive office (Attention: Chief Financial Officer), and by paying in full the total Option Exercise Price for the shares of Common Stock purchased. Such notice shall be in a form satisfactory to the Committee and shall specify the particular Option (or portion thereof) that is being exercised and the number of shares with respect to which the Option is being exercised. Subject to compliance with Section 11.1 of the Plan, the exercise of the Option shall be deemed effective upon receipt of such notice and payment complying with the terms of the Plan and the Stock Option Agreement.

As soon as practicable after the effective exercise of the Option, the Optionee shall be recorded on the stock transfer books of the Company as the owner of the shares purchased, and the Company shall deliver to the Optionee one or more duly issued stock certificates evidencing such ownership. If an Optionee exercises any Option with respect to some, but not all, of the shares of Common Stock subject to such Option, the right to exercise such Option with respect to the remaining shares shall continue until it expires or terminates in accordance with its terms. An Option shall only be exercisable with respect to whole shares.

SECTION 6. PAYMENT FOR OPTION SHARES

SECTION 6.1 GENERAL RULE.

The entire Exercise Price of Common Stock issued upon exercise of Options shall be payable in cash or cash equivalents at the time when such shares of Common Stock are purchased, provided, however, that the Committee, in its discretion upon the original grant or thereafter, and upon the consideration and approval of the Board, may allow such payments to be made in any form described in this
Section 6. In determining whether or upon what terms and conditions an Optionee will be permitted to pay the Exercise Price of an Option in a form other than cash, the Committee may consider all relevant facts and circumstances including, without limitation, the tax and securities law consequences to the Optionee and the Company and the financial accounting consequences to the Company.

SECTION 6.2 SURRENDER OF STOCK.

To the extent that this Section 6.2 is applicable, an Optionee may pay all or any part of the Exercise Price by surrendering, or attesting to the ownership of, shares of Common Stock that are already owned by the Optionee. Such shares of Common Stock shall be valued at their Fair Market Value on the date when the new shares of Common Stock are purchased under the Plan.

SECTION 6.3 EXERCISE/SALE.

To the extent that this Section 6.3 is applicable, an Optionee may pay all or any part of the Exercise Price and any withholding taxes by delivering (on a form prescribed by the Company) an irrevocable direction

Stock Option Plan- Page 5


to a securities broker approved by the Company to sell all or part of the Common Stock being purchased under the Plan and to deliver all or part of the sales proceeds to the Company.

SECTION 6.4 EXERCISE/PLEDGE.

To the extent that this Section 6.4 is applicable, all or any part of the Exercise Price and any withholding taxes may be paid by delivering (on a form prescribed by the Company) an irrevocable direction to pledge all or part of the Common Stock being purchased under the Plan to a securities broker or lender approved by the Company, as security for a loan, and to deliver all or part of the loan proceeds to the Company.

SECTION 6.5 PROMISSORY NOTE.

To the extent that this Section 6.5 is applicable, all or any part of the Exercise Price and any withholding taxes may be paid by delivering (on a form prescribed by the Company) a full-recourse promissory note. However, the par value of the Common Stock being purchased under the Plan, if newly issued, shall be paid in cash or cash equivalents.

SECTION 6.6 OTHER FORMS OF PAYMENT.

To the extent that this Section 6.6 is applicable, all or any part of the Exercise Price and any withholding taxes may be paid in any other form that is consistent with applicable laws, regulations and rules.

SECTION 6.7 DISPOSITION OF COMMON STOCK ACQUIRED PURSUANT TO THE EXERCISE OF INCENTIVE STOCK OPTIONS.

Prior to making a disposition (as defined in Section 424(c) of the Code) of any shares of Common Stock acquired pursuant to the exercise on an Incentive Stock Option granted under the Plan before the expiration of two years after its date of grant or before the expiration of one year after its date of exercise, the Optionee shall send written notice to the Company of the proposed date of such disposition, the number of shares to be disposed of, the amount of proceeds to be received from such disposition and any other information relating to such disposition that the Company may reasonably request. The right of an Optionee to make any such disposition shall be conditioned on the receipt by the Company of all amounts necessary to satisfy any federal, state or local withholding and employment-related tax requirements attributable to such disposition. The Committee shall have the right, in its sole discretion, to endorse the certificates representing such shares with a legend restricting transfer and to cause a stop transfer order to be entered with the Company's transfer agent until such time as the Company receives the amounts necessary to satisfy such withholding and employment-related tax requirements or until the later of the expiration of two years from its date of grant or one year from its date of exercise.

SECTION 6.8 AGGREGATE LIMITATION OF STOCK SUBJECT TO INCENTIVE STOCK OPTIONS.

To the extent that the aggregate Fair Market Value (determined as of the date an Incentive Stock Option is granted) of the shares of Common Stock with respect to which Incentive Stock Options (within the meaning of Section 422 of the Code) are exercisable for the first time by an Optionee during any calendar year (under the Plan and any other incentive stock option plans of the Company or any Subsidiary or any parent corporation of the Company) exceeds $100,000 (or such other amount as may be prescribed by the Code from time to time), such excess Options shall be treated as Non-qualified Stock Options. The determination shall be made by taking Incentive Stock Options into account in the order in which they were granted. If such excess only applies to a portion of an Incentive Stock Option, the Committee, in its

Stock Option Plan- Page 6


discretion, shall designate which shares shall be treated as shares acquired upon exercise of an Incentive Stock Option.

SECTION 7. EFFECT OF TERMINATION OF EMPLOYMENT OR OTHER SERVICE

SECTION 7.1 TERMINATION OF EMPLOYMENT OR OTHER SERVICE DUE TO DEATH, DISABILITY, OR RETIREMENT.

Except as otherwise provided in the Plan, or as otherwise determined by the Committee upon consideration and approval of the Board, either at the time an Option is granted or thereafter, in the event an Optionee's employment or other service with the Company and all Subsidiaries or Parent is terminated by reason of such Optionee's death, Disability or Retirement, all outstanding Options then held by the Optionee shall become immediately exercisable in full and remain exercisable after such termination for a period of three months in the case of Retirement and one year in the case of death or Disability (but in no event after the expiration date of any such Option).

SECTION 7.2 TERMINATION OF EMPLOYMENT OF OTHER SERVICE FOR REASONS OTHER THAN DEATH, DISABILITY OR RETIREMENT.

Except as otherwise provided in the Plan, or as otherwise determined by the Committee upon consideration and approval of the Board, either at the time an Option is granted or thereafter, in the event an Optionee's employment or other service with the Company and all Subsidiaries or Parent in relation to which the Option was granted is terminated for any reason other than death, Disability or Retirement, all rights of the Optionee shall immediately terminate without notice of any kind, and no Options then held by the Optionee shall thereafter be exercisable; provided, however, that if such termination is due to any reason other than termination by the Company or any Subsidiary or Parent for "cause," all outstanding Options then held by such Optionee shall remain exercisable for a period of three months after such termination (but in no event after the expiration date of any such Option). For purposes of this Section 7.2, "cause" shall be as defined in any employment or other agreement or policy applicable to the Optionee or, if no such agreement or policy exists, shall mean (a) the unauthorized use or disclosure of the confidential information or trade secrets of the Company, which use or disclosure causes material harm to the Company, (b) any material breach of a non-competition agreement entered into with the Company, (c) conviction of, or a plea of "guilty" or "no contest" to, a felony under the laws of the United States or any state thereof, (d) gross negligence or (d) continued failure to perform assigned duties after receiving written notification from the Board. The foregoing shall not be deemed an exclusive list of all acts or omissions that the Company (or a Parent or Subsidiary) may consider grounds for the discharge of the Optionee.

SECTION 7.3 MODIFICATION OF EFFECT OF TERMINATION.

Notwithstanding the provisions of this Section 7, upon an Optionee's termination of employment or other service with the Company and all Subsidiaries or Parent with respect to which Options were granted, the Committee may, in its sole discretion upon consideration and approval of the Board (which discretion may be exercised before or following such termination), cause Options, or any portions thereof, then held by such Optionee to become exercisable and remain exercisable following such termination in the manner determined by the Committee and approved by the Board; provided, however, that no Option shall be exercisable after the expiration date thereof, and any Incentive Stock Option that remains unexercised more than three months following employment termination by reason of Retirement or more than one

Stock Option Plan- Page 7


year following employment termination by reason of death or Disability shall thereafter be deemed to be a Non-qualified Stock Option.

SECTION 8. CHANGE OF CONTROL

SECTION 8.1 ACCELERATION OF VESTING.

If a Change of Control of the Company shall be about to occur or shall occur, the Committee, in its discretion and upon consideration and approval of the Board, may determine that all outstanding Options shall become immediately exercisable in full and shall remain exercisable during the remaining term thereof, regardless of whether the employment or other status of the Optionees with respect to which Options have been granted shall continue with the Company or any Subsidiary, subject to the following limitations: If the Company and the other party to the transaction constituting a Change in Control agree that such transaction is to be treated as a "pooling of interests" for financial reporting purposes, and if such transaction in fact is so treated, then the acceleration of exercisability shall not occur to the extent that the Company's independent accountants and such other party's independent accountants each determine in good faith that such acceleration would preclude the use of "pooling of interests" accounting.

SECTION 8.2 CASH PAYMENT.

If a Change in Control of the Company shall be about to occur or shall occur, then the Committee, in its discretion and upon consideration and approval of the Board and without the consent of any Optionee effected thereby, may determine that some or all Optionees holding outstanding Options shall receive, with respect to some or all of the shares of Common Stock subject to such Options, as of the effective date of any such Change of Control of the Company, cash in an amount equal to the excess of the Fair Market Value of such shares immediately prior to the effective date of such Change of Control over the Exercise Price of such Options.

SECTION 8.3 LIMITATION ON CHANGE OF CONTROL PAYMENTS.

Notwithstanding any provision of Sections 8.1 or 8.2 above to the contrary, if, with respect to an Optionee, the acceleration of the exercisability of an Option as provided for in Section 8.1 or the payment of cash in exchange for all or part of an Option as provided in Section 8.2 (which acceleration or payment could be deemed a "payment" within the meaning of Section 280G(b)(2) of the Code), together with any other payments which such Optionee has the right to receive from the Company or any corporation which is a member of an "affiliated group" (as defined in Section 1504(b) of the Code) of which the Company is a member, would constitute a "parachute payment" (as defined in Section 280G(b)(2) of the Code), then the acceleration of exercisability and the payments to such Optionee pursuant to Sections 8.1 and 8.2 above shall be reduced to the largest extent or amount as, in the sole judgment of the Committee, will result in no portion of such payments being subject to the excise tax imposed by Section 4999 of the Code.

Stock Option Plan- Page 8


SECTION 9. LIMITATION ON RIGHTS

SECTION 9.1 EMPLOYMENT OR SERVICE.

Nothing in the Plan shall interfere with or limit in any way the right of the Company or any Subsidiary or Parent to terminate the employment or service of any Employee, Outside Director or Consultant at any time, or confer upon any Employee, Outside Director or Consultant any right to continue in the employ or service of the Company or any Subsidiary or Parent.

SECTION 9.2 STOCKHOLDERS' RIGHTS.

An Optionee shall have no dividend rights, voting rights or other rights as a stockholder with respect to any Common Stock covered by his or her Option prior to the time when a stock certificate for such Common Stock is issued or, in the case of an Option, the time when he or she becomes entitled to receive such Common Stock by filing a notice of exercise and paying the Exercise Price. No adjustment shall be made for cash dividends or other rights for which the record date is prior to such time, except as expressly provided in the Plan.

SECTION 9.3 RESTRICTIONS ON TRANSFER.

Other than pursuant to a qualified domestic relations order (as defined by the Code), no right or interest of any Optionee in an Option prior to the exercise of such Option shall be assignable or transferable, or subjected to any lien, during the lifetime of the Optionee, either voluntarily or involuntarily, directly or indirectly, by operation of law or otherwise, including execution, levy, garnishment, attachment, pledge, divorce, or bankruptcy. In the event of an Optionee's death, such Optionee's rights and interest in Options shall be transferable by testamentary will or the laws of descent and distribution, any payment of any amounts due under the Plan shall be made to, and exercise of any Options (to the extent permitted pursuant to Section 7 of the Plan) may be made by the Optionee's legal representatives, heirs or legatees.

If, in the opinion of the Committee, an Optionee holding an Option is disabled from caring for his or her affairs because of a mental condition, physical condition, or age, any payments due the Optionee may be made to, and any rights of the Optionee under the Plan shall be exercised by, such Optionee's guardian, conservator, or other legal personal representative upon furnishing the Committee with evidence satisfactory to the Committee of such status.

SECTION 9.4 NON-EXCLUSIVITY OF THE PLAN.

Nothing contained in the Plan is intended to amend, modify, or rescind any previously approved compensation plans or programs entered into by the Company. The Plan will be construed to be in addition to any and all other such plans or programs. Neither the adoption of the Plan nor the submission of the Plan to the stockholders of the Company for approval will be construed as creating any limitations on the power or authority of the Board to adopt such additional or other compensation arrangements as the Board may deem necessary or desirable.

Stock Option Plan- Page 9


SECTION 10. WITHHOLDING TAXES

SECTION 10.1 GENERAL.

To the extent required by applicable federal, state, local or foreign law, an Optionee or his or her successor shall make arrangements satisfactory to the Company for the satisfaction of any withholding tax obligations that arise in connection with the Plan. The Company shall not be required to issue any Common Stock or make any cash payment under the Plan until such obligations are satisfied.

SECTION 10.2 SHARE WITHHOLDING.

The Committee, in its discretion and upon consideration and approval of the Board, may permit an Optionee to satisfy all or part of his or her withholding or income tax obligations by having the Company withhold all or a portion of any Common Stock that otherwise would be issued to him or her or by surrendering all or a portion of any Common Stock that he or she previously acquired. Such shares of Common Stock shall be valued at their Fair Market Value on the date when taxes otherwise would be withheld in cash.

SECTION 11. SECURITIES LAW RESTRICTIONS

SECTION 11.1 SHARE ISSUANCE.

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan or any agreements entered into pursuant hereto, the Company shall not be required to issue or deliver any certificate for shares of Common Stock under this Plan, and an Option shall not be considered to be exercised notwithstanding the tender by the Optionee of any consideration therefore, unless and until each of the following conditions has been fulfilled:

(a) (i) There has be in effect with respect to such shares a registration statement under the Securities Act and any applicable state securities laws if the Committee, in its sole discretion, shall have determined to file, cause to become effective, and maintain the effectiveness of such registration statement; or (ii) if the Committee has determined not to so register the shares of Common Stock to be issued under the Plan, (A) exemptions from registration under the Securities Act and applicable state securities laws shall be available for such issuance (as determined by counsel to the Company) and (B) there shall have been received from the Optionee (or, in the event of death or disability, the Optionee's heir(s) or legal representative(s)), any representations or agreements requested by the Company in order to permit such issuance to be made pursuant to such exemptions; and

(b) There shall have been obtained any other consent, approval, or permit from any state or federal governmental agency which the Committee shall, in its sole discretion upon the advise of counsel, deem necessary or advisable.

SECTION 11.2 SHARE TRANSFERS.

Shares of Common Stock issued pursuant to Options granted under the Plan may not be sold, assigned, transferred, pledged, encumbered, or otherwise disposed of, whether voluntarily or involuntarily, directly or indirectly, by operation of law or otherwise, except pursuant to registration under the Securities Act and applicable state securities laws or pursuant to exemptions from such registrations. The Company may condition the sale, assignment, transfer, pledge, encumbrance, or other disposition of such shares not

Stock Option Plan- Page 10


issued pursuant to an effective and current registration statement under the Securities Act and all applicable state securities laws on the receipt from the party to whom the shares of Common Stock are to be so transferred of any representations or agreements requested by the Company in order to permit such transfer to be made pursuant to exemptions from registration under the Securities Act and applicable state securities laws.

SECTION 11.3 HOLDING PERIOD REQUIREMENTS.

Any Options granted and any Common Stock acquired pursuant to the exercise of Options under this Plan may be subject to a six-month holding requirement from the grant date in order for the transaction to be exempt from the short-swing trading profits provision of Section 16(b) of the Exchange Act.

SECTION 11.4 LEGENDS.

(a) Unless a registration statement under the Securities Act and applicable state securities laws is in effect with respect to the issuance or transfer of shares of Common Stock under the Plan, each certificate representing any such shares shall be endorsed with a legend in substantially the following form, unless counsel for the Company is of the opinion as to any such certificate that such legend is unnecessary:

THE SECURITIES EVIDENCED HEREBY HAVE NOT BEEN REGISTERED UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933, AS AMENDED ("THE ACT"), OR UNDER APPLICABLE STATE SECURITIES LAWS. THESE SECURITIES HAVE BEEN ACQUIRED FOR INVESTMENT AND MAY NOT BE OFFERED FOR SALE, SOLD, ASSIGNED, TRANSFERRED, PLEDGED, ENCUMBERED, OR OTHERWISE DISPOSED OF EXCEPT PURSUANT TO AN EFFECTIVE REGISTRATION STATEMENT UNDER THE ACT AND SUCH STATE LAWS OR PURSUANT TO AN EXEMPTION FROM REGISTRATION UNDER THE ACT AND SUCH STATE LAWS, THE AVAILABILITY OF WHICH IS TO BE SOLELY ESTABLISHED TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE COMPANY AND ITS COUNSEL.

(b) The Committee, in its sole discretion, may endorse certificates representing shares issued pursuant to the exercise of Incentive Stock Options with a legend in substantially the following form:

THE SALE, EXCHANGE, PLEDGE, ASSIGNMENT, OR OTHER DISPOSITION OF THE SHARES REPRESENTED BY THIS CERTIFICATE IS SUBJECT TO THE TRANSFER RESTRICTIONS CONTAINED IN SECTION 5.05 OF THE BYLAWS OF THIS CORPORATION AND IN THE CORPORATION'S 2004 STOCK OPTION PLAN, AND REFERENCE SHOULD BE MADE TO THOSE DOCUMENTS FOR THE TERMS OF SUCH RESTRICTIONS.

SECTION 12. AMENDMENT, MODIFICATION AND TERMINATION

SECTION 12.1 TERM OF THE PLAN.

The Plan, as set forth herein, shall become effective on January 30, 2004, subject to approval by the stockholders at the 2004 Annual Meeting. The Plan shall remain in effect until it is terminated under Section 12.2, except that no Incentive Stock Options shall be granted on or after the 10th anniversary of the later of (a) the date when the Board adopted the Plan or (b) the date when the Board adopted the most

Stock Option Plan- Page 11


recent increase in the number of Common Stock available under Section 3 which was approved by the Company's stockholders.

SECTION 12.2 AMENDMENT OR TERMINATION.

The Board may, at any time and for any reason, amend, suspend or terminate the Plan or any portion thereof. An amendment of the Plan shall be subject to the approval of the Company's shareholders only to the extent required by applicable laws, regulations, rules or requirements of any applicable governmental authority or listing organization governing the trading of the Company's Stock. No Options shall be granted under the Plan after the termination thereof. No termination, suspension, or amendment of the Plan shall alter or impair any outstanding Option without the consent of the Optionee affected thereby; provided, however, that this sentence shall not impair the right of the Committee to take whatever action it deems appropriate under Section 3.3 or
Section 8 of the Plan.

SECTION 13. MISCELLANEOUS

SECTION 13.1 GOVERNING LAW.

The place of administration of the Plan shall be conclusively deemed to be within the State of Arizona, and the rights and obligations of any and all persons having or claiming to have had an interest under the Plan or any Stock Option Agreement shall be governed by and construed exclusively and solely in accordance with the laws of the State of Delaware without regard to the conflict of laws provisions of any jurisdictions. All parties agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the state and federal courts of Arizona with respect to matters relating to the Plan and agree not to raise or assert the defense that such forum is not convenient for such party.

SECTION 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS.

This Plan shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the successors and permitted assigns of the Company, including, without limitation, whether by way or merger, consolidation, operation of law, assignment, purchase, or other acquisition of substantially all of the assets or business of the Company, and any and all such successors and assigns shall absolutely and unconditionally assume all of the Company's obligations under the Plan.

SECTION 13.3 SURVIVAL OF PROVISIONS.

The rights, remedies, agreements, obligations, and covenants contained in or made pursuant to the Plan, any Stock Option Agreement, and any other notices or agreements in connection therewith, including, without limitation, any notice of exercise of an Option, shall survive the execution and delivery of such notices and agreements and the delivery and receipt of shares of Common Stock and shall remain in full force and effect.

SECTION 14. DEFINITIONS

SECTION 14.1 BOARD

Stock Option Plan- Page 12


Board means the Company's Board of Directors, as constituted from time to time.

SECTION 14.2 CHANGE IN CONTROL

Change in Control shall mean:

(a) The sale, lease, exchange or other transfer of all or substantially all of the Company's assets, in one transaction or in a series of related transactions;

(b) The approval by the stockholders of the Company of any plan or proposal for the liquidation or dissolution of the Company; or

(c) A change in the control of the Company of a nature that would be required to be reported (assuming such event had not been "previously reported") in response to Item 1(a) of the Current Report on Form 8-K, as in effect on the effective date of the Plan, pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Exchange Act, whether or not the Company is then subject to such reporting requirement; provided, however, that, without limitation, such Change in Control shall be deemed to have occurred at such time as:

(i) any Person becomes, after the effective date of the Plan, the "beneficial owner" (as defined in Rule 13d-3 under the Exchange Act), directly or indirectly, of 20% or more of the combined voting power of the Company's outstanding securities ordinarily having the right to vote at elections of directors, or

(ii) individuals who constitute the Board on the effective date of the Plan cease for any reason to constitute at least a majority thereof, provided that any person becoming a director subsequent to the effective date of the Plan whose election, or nomination for election by the Company's stockholders, was approved by a vote of at least a majority of the directors comprising or deemed pursuant hereto to comprise the Board on the effective date of the Plan (either by a specific vote or by approval of the proxy statement of the Company in which such person is named as a nominee for director) shall be, for purposes of this clause
(ii) and the following sentence, considered as though such person were a member of the Board on the effective date of the Plan. Notwithstanding anything in the foregoing to the contrary, no Change of Control shall be deemed to have occurred for purposes of Section 8 by virtue of any transaction which shall have been approved by the affirmative vote of at least a majority of the members of the Board or by the stockholders of the Company on the effective date of the Plan.

SECTION 14.3 CODE

Code means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

SECTION 14.4 COMMITTEE

Committee means a committee of the Board, as described in Section 2.

SECTION 14.5 COMMON STOCK

Stock Option Plan- Page 13


Common Stock means the common stock of the Company.

SECTION 14.6 COMPANY

Company means Taser International, Inc., a Delaware corporation.

SECTION 14.7 CONSULTANT

Consultant means a consultant or adviser who provides bona fide services to the Company, a Parent, or a Subsidiary as an independent contractor. Service as a Consultant shall be considered employment for all purposes of the Plan, except as provided in Section 4.2.

SECTION 14.8 DISABILITY

Disability means the permanent and total disability of the Optionee within the meaning of Section 22(e)(3) of the Code.

SECTION 14.9 EMPLOYEE

Employee means a common-law employee of the Company, a Parent, or Subsidiary.

SECTION 14.10 EXCHANGE ACT

Exchange Act means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended.

SECTION 14.11 EXERCISE PRICE

Exercise Price means the amount for which one share of Common Stock may be purchased upon exercise of such Option, as specified in the applicable Stock Option Agreement.

SECTION 14.12 FAIR MARKET VALUE

Fair Market Value means, with respect to the Common Stock, the following:

(a) If the Common Stock is listed or admitted to unlisted trading privileges on any national securities exchange or is not so listed or admitted but transactions in the Common Stock are reported on The NasdaqK Small Cap Market, the last sale price of the Common Stock on such exchange or reported by The NasdaqK Small Cap Market System as of such date (or, if no shares were traded on such day, as of the next preceding day on which there was such a trade).

(b) If the Common Stock is not so listed or admitted to unlisted trading privileges or reported on The NasdaqK Small Cap Market System, and bid and asked prices therefore in the over-the-counter market are reported by The NasdaqK Small Cap Market, the Nasdaq Bulletin Board, or the National Quotation Bureau, Inc. (or any comparable reporting service), the mean of the closing bid and asked prices as of such date, as so reported by the applicable NasdaqX system, or, if not so reported thereon, as reported by the National Quotation Bureau, Inc. (or such comparable reporting service).

(c) In all other cases, such price as the Committee determines in good faith in the exercise of its reasonable discretion.

Stock Option Plan- Page 14


SECTION 14.13 INCENTIVE STOCK OPTION

Incentive stock option means a stock option as described in Section 422(b) of the Code.

SECTION 14.14 NON-QUALIFIED STOCK OPTION

Non-qualified stock option means any option that is not an incentive stock option as described in Section 422 of the Code nor an option as described in
Section 423 of the Code.

SECTION 14.15 OPTION

Option means an Incentive Stock Option or Non-qualified Stock Option granted under the Plan and entitling the holder to purchase Common Stock.

SECTION 14.16 OPTIONEE

Optionee means an individual or estate who holds an Option.

SECTION 14.17 OUTSIDE DIRECTOR

Outside Director shall mean a member of the Board who is not an Employee. Service as an Outside Director shall be considered employment for all purposes of the Plan, except as provided in Section 4.2.

SECTION 14.18 PARENT

Parent means any corporation (other than the Company) in an unbroken chain of corporations ending with the Company, if each of the corporations other than the Company owns stock possessing 50% or more of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock in one of the other corporations in such chain. A corporation that attains the status of a Parent on a date after the adoption of the Plan shall be considered a Parent commencing as of such date.

SECTION 14.19 PERSON

Person means any individual, corporation, partnership, group, association, or other "person" (as such term is used in Section 14(d) of the Exchange Act), other than the Company, a wholly-owned Subsidiary of the Company, or any employee benefit plan sponsored by the Company or a wholly-owned Subsidiary of the Company.

SECTION 14.20 PLAN

Plan means this Taser International, Inc. 2004 Stock Option Plan, as amended from time to time.

SECTION 14.21 RETIREMENT

Retirement means the retirement of an Optionee pursuant to and in accordance with the regular retirement plan or practice of the Company or Subsidiary then covering the Optionee, or, if approved by the Board for purposes of the Plan, any early retirement plan or practice of the Company or Subsidiary then covering the Optionee.

Stock Option Plan- Page 15


SECTION 14.22 SECURITIES ACT

Securities Act means the Securities Act of 1933, as amended.

SECTION 14.23 STOCK OPTION AGREEMENT

Stock Option Agreement means the agreement between the Company and an Optionee that contains the terms, conditions and restrictions pertaining to his or her Option.

SECTION 14.24 SUBSIDIARY

Subsidiary means any corporation (other than the Company) in an unbroken chain of corporations beginning with the Company, if each of the corporations other than the last corporation in the unbroken chain owns stock possessing 50% or more of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock in one of the other corporations in such chain. A corporation that attains the status of a Subsidiary on a date after the adoption of the Plan shall be considered a Subsidiary commencing as of such date.

SECTION 15. EXECUTION

To record the adoption of the Plan by the Board, the Company has caused its duly authorized officer to execute this document in the name of the Company.

Taser International, Inc.

By:

Adoption by Board of Directors:           January 30, 2004

Ratification/Adoption by Stockholders:    _______, 2004


Stock Option Plan- Page 16


TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.
2004 STOCK INCENTIVE PLAN
NOTICE OF STOCK OPTION GRANT

You have been granted the following option to purchase Common Stock of TASER, International Inc. (the "Company"):

              NAME OF OPTIONEE:

TOTAL NUMBER OF SHARES GRANTED:

                TYPE OF OPTION:  [X] Incentive Stock Option

                                 [ ] Nonstatutory Stock Option

      EXERCISE PRICE PER SHARE:  $

                 DATE OF GRANT:

     VESTING COMMENCEMENT DATE:

              VESTING SCHEDULE:

               EXPIRATION DATE:

By your signature and the signature of the Company's representative below, you and the Company agree that this option is granted under and governed by the terms and conditions of the TASER International, Inc. 2004 Stock Incentive Plan (the "Plan") and the Stock Option Agreement, both of which are attached to and made a part of this document.

OPTIONEE: TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.

BY:

TITLE:

PRINT NAME

1

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.
2004 STOCK INCENTIVE PLAN
STOCK OPTION AGREEMENT

SECTION 1. TAX TREATMENT

This option is intended to be an incentive stock option under Section 422 of the Internal Revenue Code or a nonstatutory option, as provided in the Notice of Stock Option Grant.

SECTION 2. VESTING

This option becomes exercisable in installments, as shown in the Notice of Stock Option Grant. In addition, this option becomes exercisable in full if one of the following events occurs:

- Your service as an employee, consultant or director of the Company or a subsidiary of the Company terminates because of death, total and permanent disability, or retirement at or after age 65, or

- The Company is a party to a merger or other reorganization while you are an employee, consultant or director of the Company or a subsidiary of the Company, this option is not continued by the Company and is not assumed by the surviving corporation or its parent, and the surviving corporation or its parent does not substitute its own option for this option.

- The Company is subject to a "Change in Control" (as defined in the Plan) while you are an employee, consultant or director of the Company or a subsidiary of the Company and, within 12 months after the Change in Control, the surviving entity terminates your service without your consent. If the surviving entity demotes you to a lower position, materially reduces your authority or responsibilities, materially reduces your total compensation or announces its intention to relocate your principal place of work by more than 50 miles, then that action will be treated as a termination of your service.

In the event of a merger or other reorganization or a Change in Control, the following rules apply:

- If this option is designated as an incentive stock option in the Notice of Stock Option Grant, the acceleration of exercisability will not occur without your written consent.

- If the Company and the other party to the transaction agreed that the transaction is to be treated as a "pooling of interests" for financial reporting purposes, and if the transaction in fact was so treated, then the acceleration of exercisability will not occur to the extent that the surviving entity's independent public accountants determine in good faith that the acceleration would preclude the use of "pooling of interests" accounting.

No additional shares become exercisable after your service as an employee, consultant or director of the Company or a subsidiary of the Company has terminated for any reason.

2

SECTION 3. TERM

This option expires in any event at the close of business at Company headquarters on the day before the 10th anniversary of the Date of Grant, as shown in the Notice of Stock Option Grant. (It will expire earlier if your service terminates, as described below.)

SECTION 4. REGULAR TERMINATION

If your service as an employee, consultant or director of the Company or a subsidiary of the Company terminates for any reason except death or total and permanent disability, then this option will expire at the close of business at Company headquarters on the date three months after your termination date. The Company determines when your service terminates for this purpose.

SECTION 5. DEATH

If you die as an employee, consultant or director of the Company or subsidiary of the Company, then this option will expire at the close of business at Company headquarters on the date 12 months after the date of death.

SECTION 6. DISABILITY

If your service as an employee, consultant or director of the Company or a subsidiary of the Company terminates because of your total and permanent disability, then this option will expire on the date 12 months after your termination date.

For all purposes under this Agreement, "total and permanent disability" means that you are unable to engage in any substantial gainful activity by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment, which can be expected to result in death or which has lasted, or can be expected to last, for a continuous period of not less than one year.

SECTION 7. LEAVES OF ABSENCE

For purposes of this option, your service does not terminate when you go on a military leave, a sick leave or another bona fide leave of absence, if the leave was approved by the Company in writing and if continued crediting of service is required by the terms of the leave or by applicable law. But, your service terminates when the approved leave ends, unless you immediately return to active work.

SECTION 8. RESTRICTIONS ON EXERCISE

The Company will not permit you to exercise this option if the issuance of shares at that time would violate any law or regulation.

SECTION 9. NOTICE OF EXERCISE

When you wish to exercise this option, you must notify the Company by filing the proper "Notice of Exercise" form at the address given on the form. Your notice must specify how many shares you wish to purchase. Your notice must also specify how your shares should be registered (in your name only or in your and your spouse's names as community property or as joint tenants with right of survivorship.) This notice will be effective when it is received by the Company.

3

If someone else wants to exercise this option after your death, that person must prove to the Company's satisfaction that he or she is entitled to do so.

SECTION 10. FORM OF PAYMENT

When you submit your notice of exercise, you must include payment of the option exercise price for the shares you are purchasing. Payment may be made in one (or a combination of two or more) of the following forms:

- Your personal check, a cashier's check or a money order.

- Certificates for shares of Company stock that you own, along with any forms needed to effect a transfer of those shares to the Company. The value of the shares, determined as of the effective date of the option exercise, will be applied to the option exercise price. Instead of surrendering shares of Company stock, you may attest to the ownership of those shares on a form provided by the company and have the same number of shares subtracted from the option shares issued to you. However, you may not surrender, or attest to the ownership of, shares of Company stock in payment of the exercise price if your action would cause the Company to recognize compensation expense (or additional compensation expense) with respect to this option for financial reporting purposes.

- Irrevocable directions to a securities broker approved by the Company to sell all or part of your option shares and to deliver to the Company from the sale proceeds an amount sufficient to pay the option exercise price and any withholding taxes. (The balance of the sale proceeds, if any, will be delivered to you.) The directions must be given by signing a special "Notice of Exercise" form provided by the Company.

- Irrevocable directions to a securities broker or lender approved by the Company to pledge option shares as security for a loan and to deliver to the Company from the loan proceeds an amount sufficient to pay the option exercise price and any withholding taxes. The directions must be given by signing a special "Notice of Exercise" form provided by the Company.

SECTION 11. WITHHOLDING TAXES AND STOCK WITHHOLDING

You will not be allowed to exercise this option unless you make arrangements acceptable to the Company to pay any withholding taxes that may be due as a result of the option exercise. These arrangements may include withholding shares of Company stock that otherwise would be issued to you when you exercise this option. The value of these shares, determined as of the effective date of the option exercise, will be applied to the withholding taxes.

SECTION 12. RESTRICTIONS ON RESALE

By signing this Agreement, you agree not to sell any option shares at a time when applicable laws, Company policies or an agreement between the Company and its underwriters prohibit a sale. This restriction will apply as long as you are an employee, consultant or director of the Company or a subsidiary of the Company.

SECTION 13. TRANSFER OF OPTION

Prior to your death, only you may exercise this option. You cannot transfer or assign this option. For instance, you may not sell this option or use it as security for a loan. If you attempt to do any of these things, this option will immediately become invalid. You may, however dispose of this

4

option in your will or a written beneficiary designation. Such a designation must be filed with the Company on the proper form and will be recognized only if it is received at Company headquarters before your death.

Regardless of any marital property settlement agreement, the Company is not obligated to honor a notice of exercise from your former spouse, nor is the Company obligated to recognize your former spouse's interest in your option in any other way.

SECTION 14. RETENTION RIGHTS

Your option or this Agreement does not give you the right to be retained by the Company or a subsidiary of the Company in any capacity. The Company and it subsidiaries reserve the right to terminate your service at any time, with or without cause.

SECTION 15. STOCKHOLDER RIGHTS

You, or your estate or heirs, have no rights as a stockholder of the Company until you have exercised this option by giving the required notice to the Company and paying the exercise price. No adjustments are made for dividends or other rights if the applicable record date occurs before you exercise this option, except as described in the Plan.

SECTION 16. ADJUSTMENTS

In the event of a stock split, a stock dividend or a similar change in Company stock, the number of shares covered by this option and the exercise price per share may be adjusted pursuant to the Plan.

SECTION 17. APPLICABLE LAW

This Agreement will be interpreted and enforced under the laws of the State of Delaware (without regard to their choice-of-law provisions).

SECTION 18. THE PLAN AND OTHER AGREEMENTS

The text of the Plan is incorporated in this Agreement by reference.

This Agreement and the Plan constitute the entire understanding between you and the Company regarding this option. Any prior agreements, commitments or negotiations concerning this option are superseded. This Agreement may be amended only by another written agreement, signed by both parties.

BY SIGNING THE COVER SHEET OF THIS AGREEMENT,
YOU AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS DESCRIBED ABOVE AND IN
THE PLAN.

5

 

Exhibit 10.16

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.

2004 OUTSIDE DIRECTOR STOCK OPTION PLAN
(AS ADOPTED BY THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS ON JANUARY 30, 2004 AND APPROVED BY THE
STOCKHOLDERS AT THE APRIL 29, 2004 ANNUAL MEETING OF STOCKHOLDERS)

     1. Purposes of the Plan. The purposes of this 2004 Outside Director Stock Option Plan are to attract and retain the best available personnel for service as Outside Directors (as defined herein) of the Company, to provide additional incentive to the outside directors of the Company to serve as Directors, and to encourage their continued service on the Board.

     All options granted hereunder shall be nonstatutory stock options.

     2. Definitions. As used herein, the following definitions shall apply:

          (a) “Board” means the Board of Directors of the Company.

          (b) “Code” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

          (c) “Common Stock” means the Common Stock of the Company.

          (d) “Company” means TASER International, Inc., a Delaware corporation.

          (e) “Director” means a member of the Board.

          (f) “Employee” means any person, including officers and Directors, employed by the Company or any Parent or Subsidiary of the Company. The payment of a Director’s fee by the Company shall not be sufficient in and of itself to constitute “employment” by the Company.

          (g) “Exchange Act” means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended.

          (h) “Fair Market Value” means, as of any date, the value of Common Stock determined as follows:

               (i) If the Common Stock is listed on any established stock exchange or a national market system, including without limitation the NASDAQ National Market or The NASDAQ SmallCap Market of The NASDAQ Stock Market, its Fair Market Value shall be the closing sales price for such stock (or the closing bid, if no sales were reported) as quoted on such exchange or system for the last market trading day prior to the time of determination, as reported in The Wall Street Journal or such other source as the Administrator deems reliable;

               (ii) If the Common Stock is regularly quoted by a recognized securities dealer but selling prices are not reported, the Fair Market Value of a Share of Common Stock shall be the mean between the high bid and low asked prices for the Common Stock on the date of determination, as reported in The Wall Street Journal or such other source as the Board deems reliable, or;

               (iii) In the absence of an established market for the Common Stock, the Fair Market Value thereof shall be determined in good faith by the Board.

          (i) “Inside Director” means a Director who is an Employee.

D-1


 

          (j) “Option” means a stock option granted pursuant to the Plan.

          (k) “Optioned Stock” means the Common Stock subject to an Option.

          (l) “Optionee” means a Director who holds an Option.

          (m) “Outside Director” means a Director who is (i) not an Employee and (ii) not a partner nor a member of any venture capital firm or institutional investor which owns securities of the Company having more than five percent (5%) of the total voting power of the Company.

          (n) “Parent” means a “parent corporation,” whether now or hereafter existing, as defined in Section 424(e) of the Code.

          (o) “Plan” means this 2004 Director Stock Option Plan.

          (p) “Share” means a share of the Common Stock, as adjusted in accordance with Section 10 of the Plan.

          (q) “Subsidiary” means a “subsidiary corporation,” whether now or hereafter existing, as defined in Section 424(f) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986.

     3. Stock Subject to the Plan. Subject to the provisions of Section 10 of the Plan, the maximum aggregate number of Shares which may be optioned and sold under the Plan is 200,000 Shares of Common Stock (the “Pool”) on a post January 26, 2004 stock split basis. The Shares may be authorized, but unissued, or reacquired Common Stock.

     If an Option expires or becomes unexercisable without having been exercised in full, the unpurchased Shares which were subject thereto shall become available for future grant or sale under the Plan (unless the Plan has terminated). Shares that have actually been issued under the Plan shall not be returned to the Plan and shall not become available for future distribution under the Plan.

     4. Administration and Grants of Options under the Plan.

          (a) Procedure for Grants. All grants of Options to Outside Directors under this Plan shall be automatic and nondiscretionary and shall be made strictly in accordance with the following provisions:

               (i) No person shall have any discretion to select which Outside Directors shall be granted Options or to determine the number of Shares to be covered by Options granted to Outside Directors.

               (ii) Each new Outside Director shall be automatically granted an Option to purchase 15,000 Shares (the “First Option”) on the date on which the later of the following events occurs: (A) the effective date of this Plan, as determined in accordance with Section 6 hereof, or (B) the date on which such person first becomes an Outside Director, whether through election by the stockholders of the Company or appointment by the Board to fill a vacancy; provided, however, that an Inside Director who ceases to be an Inside Director but who remains a Director shall not receive a First Option.

               (iii) Each Outside Director shall be automatically granted an Option to purchase 6,000 Shares (a “Subsequent Option”) on the date of the annual meeting of stockholders of each year provided he or she is then an Outside Director and if as of such date, he or she shall have served on the Board for at least the preceding six (6) months.

               (iv) Notwithstanding the provisions of subsections (ii) and (iii) hereof, any exercise of an Option granted before the Company has obtained shareholder approval of the Plan in accordance with Section 16 hereof shall be conditioned upon obtaining such shareholder approval of the Plan in accordance with Section 16 hereof.

               (v) The terms of a First Option granted hereunder shall be as follows:

D-2


 

                    (A) the term of the First Option shall be ten (10) years.

                    (B) the First Option shall be exercisable only while the Outside Director remains a Director of the Company, except as set forth in Sections 8 and 10 hereof.

                    (C) the exercise price per Share shall be 100% of the Fair Market Value per Share on the date of grant of the First Option. In the event that the date of grant of the First Option is not a trading day, the exercise price per Share shall be the Fair Market Value on the next trading day immediately following the date of grant of the First Option.

                    (D) subject to Section 10 hereof, the First Option shall become exercisable as to 1/4th of the Shares subject to the First Option on the day before the annual meeting of stockholders of each year or, if no such meeting is held, on each anniversary of the date of grant, provided that the Optionee continues to serve as a Director on such dates.

               (vi) The terms of a Subsequent Option granted hereunder shall be as follows:

                    (A) the term of the Subsequent Option shall be ten (10) years.

                    (B) the Subsequent Option shall be exercisable only while the Outside Director remains a Director of the Company, except as set forth in Sections 8 and 10 hereof.

                    (C) the exercise price per Share shall be 100% of the Fair Market Value per Share on the date of grant of the Subsequent Option. In the event that the date of grant of the Subsequent Option is not a trading day, the exercise price per Share shall be the Fair Market Value on the next trading day immediately following the date of grant of the Subsequent Option.

                    (D) subject to Section 10 hereof, the Subsequent Option shall become exercisable as to 1/3 of the Shares subject to the Subsequent Option on the day before the annual meeting of stockholders of each year or, if no such meeting is held, on each anniversary of the date of grant, provided that the Optionee continues to serve as a Director on such dates.

               (vii) In the event that any Option granted under the Plan would cause the number of Shares subject to outstanding Options plus the number of Shares previously purchased under Options to exceed the Pool, then the remaining Shares available for Option grant shall be granted under Options to the Outside Directors on a pro rata basis. No further grants shall be made until such time, if any, as additional Shares become available for grant under the Plan through action of the Board or the stockholders to increase the number of Shares which may be issued under the Plan or through cancellation or expiration of Options previously granted hereunder.

     5. Eligibility. Options may be granted only to Outside Directors. All Options shall be automatically granted in accordance with the terms set forth in Section 4 hereof.

     The Plan shall not confer upon any Optionee any right with respect to continuation of service as a Director or nomination to serve as a Director, nor shall it interfere in any way with any rights which the Director or the Company may have to terminate the Director’s relationship with the Company at any time.

     6. Term of Plan. The Plan shall become effective upon the earlier to occur of its adoption by the Board or its approval by the stockholders of the Company as described in Section 16 of the Plan. It shall continue in effect for a term of ten (10) years unless sooner terminated under Section 11 of the Plan.

     7. Form of Consideration. The consideration to be paid for the Shares to be issued upon exercise of an Option, including the method of payment, shall consist of (i) cash, (ii) check, (iii) other shares which (x) in the case of Shares acquired upon exercise of an Option, have been owned by the Optionee for more than six (6) months on the date of surrender, and (y) have a Fair Market Value on the date of surrender equal to the aggregate exercise price of the Shares as to which said

D-3


 

Option shall be exercised, (iv) consideration received by the Company under a cashless exercise program implemented by the Company in connection with the Plan, or (v) any combination of the foregoing methods of payment.

     8. Exercise of Option.

          (a) Procedure for Exercise; Rights as a Shareholder. Any Option granted hereunder shall be exercisable at such times as are set forth in Section 4 hereof; provided, however, that no Options shall be exercisable until shareholder approval of the Plan in accordance with Section 16 hereof has been obtained.

     An Option may not be exercised for a fraction of a Share.

     An Option shall be deemed to be exercised when written notice of such exercise has been given to the Company in accordance with the terms of the Option by the person entitled to exercise the Option and full payment for the Shares with respect to which the Option is exercised has been received by the Company. Full payment may consist of any consideration and method of payment allowable under Section 7 of the Plan. Until the issuance (as evidenced by the appropriate entry on the books of the Company or of a duly authorized transfer agent of the Company) of the stock certificate evidencing such Shares, no right to vote or receive dividends or any other rights as a shareholder shall exist with respect to the Optioned Stock, notwithstanding the exercise of the Option. A share certificate for the number of Shares so acquired shall be issued to the Optionee as soon as practicable after exercise of the Option. No adjustment shall be made for a dividend or other right for which the record date is prior to the date the stock certificate is issued, except as provided in Section 10 of the Plan.

     Exercise of an Option in any manner shall result in a decrease in the number of Shares which thereafter may be available, both for purposes of the Plan and for sale under the Option, by the number of Shares as to which the Option is exercised.

          (b) Termination of Continuous Status as a Director. Subject to Section 10 hereof, in the event an Optionee’s status as a Director terminates (other than upon the Optionee’s death or total and permanent disability (as defined in Section 22(e)(3) of the Code)), the Optionee may exercise his or her Option, but only within three (3) months following the date of such termination, and only to the extent that the Optionee was entitled to exercise it on the date of such termination (but in no event later than the expiration of its ten (10) year term). To the extent that the Optionee was not entitled to exercise an Option on the date of such termination, and to the extent that the Optionee does not exercise such Option (to the extent otherwise so entitled) within the time specified herein, the Option shall terminate.

          (c) Disability of Optionee. In the event Optionee’s status as a Director terminates as a result of total and permanent disability (as defined in Section 22(e)(3) of the Code), the Optionee may exercise his or her Option, but only within twelve (12) months following the date of such termination, and only to the extent that the Optionee was entitled to exercise it on the date of such termination (but in no event later than the expiration of its ten (10) year term). To the extent that the Optionee was not entitled to exercise an Option on the date of termination, or if he or she does not exercise such Option (to the extent otherwise so entitled) within the time specified herein, the Option shall terminate.

          (d) Death of Optionee. In the event of an Optionee’s death, the Optionee’s estate or a person who acquired the right to exercise the Option by bequest or inheritance may exercise the Option, but only within twelve (12) months following the date of death, and only to the extent that the Optionee was entitled to exercise it on the date of death (but in no event later than the expiration of its ten (10) year term). To the extent that the Optionee was not entitled to exercise an Option on the date of death, and to the extent that the Optionee’s estate or a person who acquired the right to exercise such Option does not exercise such Option (to the extent otherwise so entitled) within the time specified herein, the Option shall terminate.

     9. Non-Transferability of Options. Unless otherwise determined by the Board, the Option may not be sold, pledged, assigned, hypothecated, transferred, or disposed of in any manner other than by will or by the laws of descent or distribution and may be exercised, during the lifetime of the Optionee, only by the Optionee.

     10. Adjustments Upon Changes in Capitalization, Dissolution, Merger or Asset Sale.

D-4


 

          (a) Changes in Capitalization. Subject to any required action by the stockholders of the Company, the number of Shares covered by each outstanding Option, the number of Shares which have been authorized for issuance under the Plan but as to which no Options have yet been granted or which have been returned to the Plan upon cancellation or expiration of an Option, as well as the price per Share covered by each such outstanding Option, and the number of Shares issuable pursuant to the automatic grant provisions of Section 4 hereof shall be proportionately adjusted for any increase or decrease in the number of issued Shares resulting from a stock split, reverse stock split, stock dividend, combination or reclassification of the Common Stock, or any other increase or decrease in the number of issued Shares effected without receipt of consideration by the Company; provided, however, that conversion of any convertible securities of the Company shall not be deemed to have been “effected without receipt of consideration.” Except as expressly provided herein, no issuance by the Company of shares of stock of any class, or securities convertible into shares of stock of any class, shall affect, and no adjustment by reason thereof shall be made with respect to, the number or price of Shares subject to an Option.

     (b) Dissolution or Liquidation. In the event of the proposed dissolution or liquidation of the Company, to the extent that an Option has not been previously exercised, it shall terminate immediately prior to the consummation of such proposed action.

     (c) Merger or Asset Sale. In the event of a merger of the Company with or into another corporation or the sale of substantially all of the assets of the Company, outstanding Options may be assumed or equivalent options may be substituted by the successor corporation or a Parent or Subsidiary thereof (the “Successor Corporation”). If an Option is assumed or substituted for, the Option or equivalent option shall continue to be exercisable as provided in Section 4 hereof for so long as the Optionee serves as a Director or a director of the Successor Corporation. Following such assumption or substitution, if the Optionee’s status as a Director or director of the Successor Corporation, as applicable, is terminated other than upon a voluntary resignation by the Optionee, the Option or option shall become fully exercisable, including as to Shares for which it would not otherwise be exercisable. Thereafter, the Option or option shall remain exercisable in accordance with Sections 8(b) through (d) above.

     If the Successor Corporation does not assume an outstanding Option or substitute for it an equivalent option, the Option shall become fully vested and exercisable, including as to Shares for which it would not otherwise be exercisable. In such event the Board shall notify the Optionee that the Option shall be fully exercisable for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of such notice, and upon the expiration of such period the Option shall terminate.

     For the purposes of this Section 10(c), an Option shall be considered assumed if, following the merger or sale of assets, the Option confers the right to purchase or receive, for each Share of Optioned Stock subject to the Option immediately prior to the merger or sale of assets, the consideration (whether stock, cash, or other securities or property) received in the merger or sale of assets by holders of Common Stock for each Share held on the effective date of the transaction (and if holders were offered a choice of consideration, the type of consideration chosen by the holders of a majority of the outstanding Shares). If such consideration received in the merger or sale of assets is not solely common stock of the successor corporation or its Parent, the Administrator may, with the consent of the successor corporation, provide for the consideration to be received upon the exercise of the Option, for each Share of Optioned Stock subject to the Option, to be solely common stock of the successor corporation or its Parent equal in fair market value to the per share consideration received by holders of Common Stock in the merger or sale of assets.

     11. Amendment and Termination of the Plan.

          (a) Amendment and Termination. The Board may at any time amend, alter, suspend, or discontinue the Plan, but no amendment, alteration, suspension, or discontinuation shall be made which would impair the rights of any Optionee under any grant theretofore made, without his or her consent. In addition, to the extent necessary and desirable to comply with any applicable law, regulation or stock exchange rule, the Company shall obtain shareholder approval of any Plan amendment in such a manner and to such a degree as required.

          (b) Effect of Amendment or Termination. Any such amendment or termination of the Plan shall not affect Options already granted and such Options shall remain in full force and effect as if this Plan had not been amended or terminated.

D-5


 

     12. Time of Granting Options. The date of grant of an Option shall, for all purposes, be the date determined in accordance with Section 4 hereof.

     13. Conditions Upon Issuance of Shares. Shares shall not be issued pursuant to the exercise of an Option unless the exercise of such Option and the issuance and delivery of such Shares pursuant thereto shall comply with all relevant provisions of law, including, without limitation, the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, the Exchange Act, the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder, state securities laws, and the requirements of any stock exchange upon which the Shares may then be listed, and shall be further subject to the approval of counsel for the Company with respect to such compliance.

     As a condition to the exercise of an Option, the Company may require the person exercising such Option to represent and warrant at the time of any such exercise that the Shares are being purchased only for investment and without any present intention to sell or distribute such Shares, if, in the opinion of counsel for the Company, such a representation is required by any of the aforementioned relevant provisions of law.

     Inability of the Company to obtain authority from any regulatory body having jurisdiction, which authority is deemed by the Company’s counsel to be necessary to the lawful issuance and sale of any Shares hereunder, shall relieve the Company of any liability in respect of the failure to issue or sell such Shares as to which such requisite authority shall not have been obtained.

     14. Reservation of Shares. The Company, during the term of this Plan, will at all times reserve and keep available such number of Shares as shall be sufficient to satisfy the requirements of the Plan.

     15. Option Agreement. Options shall be evidenced by written option agreements in such form as the Board shall approve.

     16. Shareholder Approval. Continuance of the Plan shall be subject to approval by the stockholders of the Company at or prior to the first annual meeting of stockholders held subsequent to the granting of an Option hereunder. Such shareholder approval shall be obtained in the degree and manner required under applicable state and federal law and any stock exchange rules.

D-6


 

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.

2004 DIRECTOR STOCK OPTION PLAN

DIRECTOR OPTION AGREEMENT

     TASER International, Inc., a Delaware corporation (the “Company”), has granted to                      (the “Optionee”), an option to purchase a total of [                      (       )] shares of the Company’s Common Stock (the “Optioned Stock”), at the price determined as provided herein, and in all respects subject to the terms, definitions and provisions of the Company’s 2004 Director Stock Option Plan (the “Plan”) adopted by the Company which is incorporated herein by reference. The terms defined in the Plan shall have the same defined meanings herein.

     1. Nature of the Option. This Option is a nonstatutory option and is not intended to qualify for any special tax benefits to the Optionee.

     2. Exercise Price. The exercise price is $                      for each share of Common Stock.

     3. Exercise of Option. This Option shall be exercisable during its term in accordance with the provisions of Section 8 of the Plan as follows:

          (a) Right to Exercise.

               (i) This Option shall become exercisable in installments cumulatively with respect to 1/4th of the Shares subject to the Option on the day before the annual meeting of stockholders of each year or, if no such meeting is held, on each anniversary of the date of grant, provided that the Optionee continues to serve as a Director on such dates; provided, however, that in no event shall any Option be exercisable prior to the date the stockholders of the Company approve the Plan.

               (ii) This Option may not be exercised for a fraction of a share.

               (iii) In the event of Optionee’s death, disability or other termination of service as a Director, the exercisability of the Option is governed by Section 8 of the Plan.

          (b) Method of Exercise. This Option shall be exercisable by written notice which shall state the election to exercise the Option and the number of Shares in respect of which the Option is being exercised. Such written notice, in the form attached hereto as Exhibit A, shall be signed by the Optionee and shall be delivered in person or by certified mail to the Secretary of the Company. The written notice shall be accompanied by payment of the exercise price.

     4. Method of Payment. Payment of the exercise price shall be by any of the following, or a combination thereof, at the election of the Optionee:

          (a) cash;

          (b) check;

          (c) surrender of other shares which (x) in the case of Shares acquired upon exercise of an Option, have been owned by the Optionee for more than six (6) months on the date of surrender, and (y) have a Fair Market Value on the date of surrender equal to the aggregate exercise price of the Shares as to which said Option shall be exercised; or

          (d) delivery of a properly executed exercise notice together with such other documentation as the Company and the broker, if applicable, shall require to effect an exercise of the Option and delivery to the Company of the sale or loan proceeds required to pay the exercise price.

 


 

     5. Restrictions on Exercise. This Option may not be exercised if the issuance of such Shares upon such exercise or the method of payment of consideration for such shares would constitute a violation of any applicable federal or state securities or other law or regulations, or if such issuance would not comply with the requirements of any stock exchange upon which the Shares may then be listed. As a condition to the exercise of this Option, the Company may require Optionee to make any representation and warranty to the Company as may be required by any applicable law or regulation.

     6. Non-Transferability of Option. This Option may not be transferred in any manner otherwise than by will or by the laws of descent or distribution and may be exercised during the lifetime of Optionee only by the Optionee. The terms of this Option shall be binding upon the executors, administrators, heirs, successors and assigns of the Optionee.

     7. Term of Option. This Option may not be exercised more than ten (10) years from the date of grant of this Option, and may be exercised during such period only in accordance with the Plan and the terms of this Option.

     8. Taxation Upon Exercise of Option. Optionee understands that, upon exercise of this Option, he or she will recognize income for tax purposes in an amount equal to the excess of the then Fair Market Value of the Shares purchased over the exercise price paid for such Shares. Since the Optionee is subject to Section 16(b) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, under certain limited circumstances the measurement and timing of such income (and the commencement of any capital gain holding period) may be deferred, and the Optionee is advised to contact a tax advisor concerning the application of Section 83 in general and the availability of a Section 83(b) election in particular in connection with the exercise of the Option. Upon a resale of such Shares by the Optionee, any difference between the sale price and the Fair Market Value of the Shares on the date of exercise of the Option, to the extent not included in income as described above, will be treated as capital gain or loss.
         
Date of Grant:                                             TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.,
a Delaware corporation
 
 
  By:      
       
       
 

     Optionee acknowledges receipt of a copy of the Plan, a copy of which is attached hereto, and represents that he or she is familiar with the terms and provisions thereof, and hereby accepts this Option subject to all of the terms and provisions thereof. Optionee hereby agrees to accept as binding, conclusive and final all decisions or interpretations of the Board upon any questions arising under the Plan.

             
Dated:            
             
          Optionee

-2-


 

EXHIBIT A

DIRECTOR OPTION EXERCISE NOTICE

TASER International, Inc.

Attention: Corporate Secretary

     1. Exercise of Option. The undersigned (“Optionee”) hereby elects to exercise Optionee’s option to purchase shares of the Common Stock (the “Shares”) of TASER International, Inc. (the “Company”) under and pursuant to the Company’s 2004 Director Stock Option Plan and the Director Option Agreement dated            (the “Agreement”).

     2. Representations of Optionee. Optionee acknowledges that Optionee has received, read and understood the Agreement.

     3. Federal Restrictions on Transfer. Optionee understands that the Shares must be held indefinitely unless they are registered under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “1933 Act”), or unless an exemption from such registration is available, and that the certificate(s) representing the Shares may bear a legend to that effect. Optionee understands that the Company is under no obligation to register the Shares and that an exemption may not be available or may not permit Optionee to transfer Shares in the amounts or at the times proposed by Optionee.

     4. Tax Consequences. Optionee understands that Optionee may suffer adverse tax consequences as a result of Optionee’s purchase or disposition of the Shares. Optionee represents that Optionee has consulted with any tax consultant(s) Optionee deems advisable in connection with the purchase or disposition of the Shares and that Optionee is not relying on the Company for any tax advice.

     5. Delivery of Payment. Optionee herewith delivers to the Company the aggregate purchase price for the Shares that Optionee has elected to purchase and has made provision for the payment of any federal or state withholding taxes required to be paid or withheld by the Company.

     6. Entire Agreement. The Agreement is incorporated herein by reference. This Exercise Notice and the Agreement constitute the entire agreement of the parties and supersede in their entirety all prior undertakings and agreements of the Company and Optionee with respect to the subject matter hereof. This Exercise Notice and the Agreement are governed by Delaware law except for that body of law pertaining to conflict of laws.

             
Submitted by:
  Accepted by:
 
           
OPTIONEE:
      TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.
 
           
 
           
      By:    
         
 
           
      Its:    
         
 
           
      Address:    
         
 
           
Dated:
                Dated:    
 
     

-3-

EXHIBIT 14.1

(TASER INTERNATIONAL LOGO)

TASER INTERNATIONAL, INC.

CODE OF BUSINESS CONDUCT AND ETHICS

I. INTRODUCTION

This Code of Business Conduct and Ethics helps ensure compliance with legal requirements and our standards of business conduct. All Company employees are expected to read and understand this Code of Business Conduct and Ethics, uphold these standards in day-to-day activities, comply with all applicable policies and procedures, and ensure that all agents and contractors are aware of, understand and adhere to these standards.

Because the principles described in this Code of Business Conduct and Ethics are general in nature, you should also review all applicable Company policies and procedures for more specific instruction, and contact the Company's Human Resource Department if you have any questions.

Nothing in this Code of Business Conduct and Ethics, in any company policies and procedures, or in other related communications (verbal or written) creates or implies an employment contract or term of employment.

We are committed to continuously reviewing and updating our policies and procedures. Therefore, this Code of Business Conduct and Ethics is subject to modification. This Code of Business Conduct and Ethics supersedes all other such codes, policies, procedures, instructions, practices, rules or written or verbal representations to the extent they are inconsistent.

Please sign the acknowledgment form at the end of this Code of Business Conduct and Ethics and return the form to Human Resources indicating that you have received, read, understand and agree to comply with the Code of Business Conduct and Ethics. The signed acknowledgment form will be located in your personnel file.

II. COMPLIANCE IS EVERYONE'S BUSINESS

Ethical business conduct is critical to our business. As an employee, your responsibility is to respect and adhere to these practices. Many of these practices reflect legal or regulatory requirements. Violations of these laws and regulations can create significant liability for you, the Company, its directors, officers, and other employees.

Part of your job and ethical responsibility is to help enforce this Code of Business Conduct and Ethics. You should be alert to possible violations and report possible violations to the Company's Legal Department or Human Resource Department. You must cooperate in any internal or external investigations of possible violations. Reprisal, threats, retribution or retaliation against any person who has in good faith reported a violation or a suspected violation of law, this Code of Business Conduct or other Company policies, or against any person who is assisting in any investigation or process with respect to such a violation, is prohibited.

Page 1

(TASER INTERNATIONAL LOGO)

Violations of law, this Code of Business Conduct and Ethics, or other Company policies or procedures should be reported to the Company's Legal Department.

Violations of law, this Code of Business Conduct and Ethics or other Company policies or procedures by Company employees can lead to disciplinary action up to and including termination.

In all cases, if you are unsure about the appropriateness of an event or action, please seek assistance in interpreting the requirements of these practices by contacting the Legal Department or Human Resource Department.

III. YOUR RESPONSIBILITIES TO THE COMPANY AND ITS STOCKHOLDERS

A. GENERAL STANDARDS OF CONDUCT

The Company expects all employees, agents and contractors to exercise good judgement to ensure the safety and welfare of employees, agents and contractors and to maintain a cooperative, efficient, positive, harmonious and productive work environment and business organization. These standards apply while working on our premises, at offsite locations where our business is being conducted, at Company-sponsored business and social events, or at any other place where you are a representative of the Company. Employees, agents or contractors who engage in misconduct or whose performance is unsatisfactory may be subject to corrective action, up to and including termination.

B. APPLICABLE LAWS

All Company employees, agents and contractors must comply with all applicable laws, regulations, rules and regulatory orders. Company employees working outside of the United States must comply with laws, regulations, rules and regulatory orders of the United States, including the Foreign Corrupt Practices Act and the U.S. Export Control Act, in addition to applicable local laws. Each employee, agent and contractor must acquire appropriate knowledge of the requirements relating to his or her duties sufficient to enable him or her to recognize potential dangers and to know when to seek advice from the General Counsel on specific Company policies and procedures. Violations of laws, regulations, rules and orders may subject the employee, agent or contractor to individual criminal or civil liability, as well as to discipline by the Company. Such individual violations may also subject the Company to civil or criminal liability or the loss of business.

C. CONFLICTS OF INTEREST

Each of us has a responsibility to the Company, our stockholders and each other. Although this duty does not prevent us from engaging in personal transactions and investments, it does demand that we avoid situations where a conflict of interest might occur or appear to occur. The Company is subject to scrutiny from many different individuals and organizations. We should always strive to avoid even the appearance of impropriety.

Page 2

(TASER INTERNATIONAL LOGO)

What constitutes conflict of interest? A conflict of interest exists where the interests or benefits of one person or entity conflict with the interests or benefits of the Company. Examples include:

(i) EMPLOYMENT/OUTSIDE EMPLOYMENT. In consideration of your employment with the Company, you are expected to devote your full attention to the business interests of the Company. You are prohibited from engaging in any activity that interferes with your performance or responsibilities to the Company or is otherwise in conflict with or prejudicial to the Company. Our policies prohibit any employee from accepting simultaneous employment with a Company supplier, customer, developer or competitor, or from taking part in any activity that enhances or supports a competitor's position. Additionally, you must disclose to the Company any interest that you have that may conflict with the business of the Company. If you have any questions on this requirement, you should contact your supervisor.

(ii) OUTSIDE DIRECTORSHIPS. It is a conflict of interest to serve as a director of any company that competes with the Company. Although you may serve as a director of a Company supplier, customer, developer, or other business partner, our policy requires that you first obtain approval from the Company's Chief Executive Officer or President before accepting a directorship in any of these companies. Any compensation you receive should be commensurate to your responsibilities. Such approval may be conditioned upon the completion of specified actions.

(iii) BUSINESS INTERESTS. If you are considering investing in a Company customer, supplier, developer or competitor, you must first take great care to ensure that these investments do not compromise your responsibilities to the Company. Many factors should be considered in determining whether a conflict exists, including the size and nature of the investment; your ability to influence the Company's decisions; your access to confidential information of the Company or of the other company; and the nature of the relationship between the Company and the other company.

(iv) RELATED PARTIES. As a general rule, you should avoid conducting any material Company business with a relative or significant other, or with a business in which a relative or significant other is associated in any significant role. Relatives include spouse, sister, brother, daughter, son, mother, father, grandparents, aunts, uncles, nieces, nephews, cousins, step relationships, and in-laws. Significant others include persons living in a spousal (including same sex) or familial fashion with an employee.

If such a related party transaction is unavoidable, you must fully disclose the nature of the related party transaction to the Company's Chief Financial Officer. If determined to be material to the Company by the Chief Financial Officer, the Company's Audit Committee must review and approve in writing in advance such related party transactions. The most significant related party transactions, particularly those involving the Company's directors or executive officers, must be reviewed and approved in writing in advance by the Company's Board of Directors. The Company must report all such material related party transactions under applicable accounting rules, Federal securities laws, SEC rules and regulations, and securities market rules. Any dealings with a related party must be conducted in such a way that no preferential treatment is given to this business.

Page 3

(TASER INTERNATIONAL LOGO)

The Company discourages the employment of relatives and significant others in positions or assignments within the same department and prohibits the employment of such individuals in positions that have a financial dependence or influence (e.g., an auditing or control relationship, or a supervisor/subordinate relationship). The purpose of this policy is to prevent the organizational impairment and conflicts that are a likely outcome of the employment of relatives or significant others, especially in a supervisor/subordinate relationship. If a question arises about whether a relationship is covered by this policy, the Human Resources Department is responsible for determining whether an applicant's or transferee's acknowledged relationship is covered by this policy. The Human Resources Department shall advise all affected applicants and transferees of this policy. Willful withholding of information regarding a prohibited relationship/reporting arrangement may be subject to corrective action, up to and including termination. If a prohibited relationship exists or develops between two employees, the employee in the senior position must bring this to the attention of his/her supervisor. The Company retains the prerogative to separate the individuals at the earliest possible time, either by reassignment or by termination, if necessary.

(v) OTHER SITUATIONS. Because other conflicts of interest may arise, it would be impractical to attempt to list all possible situations. If a proposed transaction or situation raises any questions or doubts in your mind you should consult the Legal Department.

D. CORPORATE OPPORTUNITIES

Employees, officers and directors may not exploit for their own personal gain opportunities that are discovered through the use of corporate property, information or position unless the opportunity is disclosed fully in writing to the Company's Board of Directors and the Board of Directors declines to pursue such opportunity.

E. PROTECTING THE COMPANY'S CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION

The Company's confidential information is a valuable asset. The Company's confidential information includes product and component technology; manufacturing processes; product plans; names and lists of customers, dealers, and employees; and financial information. This information is the property of the Company and may be protected by patent, trademark, copyright and trade secret laws. All confidential information must be used for Company business purposes only. Every employee, agent and contractor must safeguard it. THIS RESPONSIBILITY INCLUDES NOT DISCLOSING THE COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION SUCH AS INFORMATION REGARDING THE COMPANY'S PRODUCTS OR BUSINESS OVER THE INTERNET. You are also responsible for properly labeling any and all documentation shared with or correspondence sent to the Company's Legal Department or outside counsel as "Attorney-Client Privileged". This responsibility includes the safeguarding, securing and proper disposal of confidential information in accordance with the Company's policy on Maintaining and Managing Records set forth in Section III.I of this Code of Business Conduct and Ethics. This obligation extends to confidential information of third parties, which the Company has rightfully received under Non-Disclosure Agreements. See the Company's policy dealing with Handling Confidential Information of Others set forth in Section IV.D of this Code of Business Conduct and Ethics.

Page 4

(TASER INTERNATIONAL LOGO)

(i) PROPRIETARY INFORMATION AND INVENTION AGREEMENT. When you joined the Company, you signed an agreement to protect and hold confidential the Company's proprietary information. This agreement remains in effect for as long as you work for the Company and after you leave the Company. Under this agreement, you may not disclose the Company's confidential information to anyone or use it to benefit anyone other than the Company without the prior written consent of an authorized Company officer.

(ii) DISCLOSURE OF COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION. To further the Company's business, from time to time our confidential information may be disclosed to potential business partners. However, such disclosure should never be done without carefully considering its potential benefits and risks. If you determine in consultation with your manager and other appropriate Company management that disclosure of confidential information is necessary, you must then contact the Legal Department to ensure that an appropriate written nondisclosure agreement is signed prior to the disclosure. The Company has standard nondisclosure agreements suitable for most disclosures. You must not sign a third party's nondisclosure agreement or accept changes to the Company's standard nondisclosure agreements without review and approval by the Company's Legal Department. In addition, all Company materials that contain Company confidential information, including presentations, must be reviewed and approved by the Company's Legal Department prior to publication or use. Furthermore, any employee publication or publicly made statement that might be perceived or construed as attributable to the Company, made outside the scope of his or her employment with the Company, must be reviewed and approved in writing in advance by the Company's Legal Department and must include the Company's standard disclaimer that the publication or statement represents the views of the specific author and not of the Company.

(iii) REQUESTS BY REGULATORY AUTHORITIES. The Company and its employees, agents and contractors must cooperate with appropriate government inquiries and investigations. In this context, however, it is important to protect the legal rights of the Company with respect to its confidential information. All government requests for information, documents or investigative interviews must be referred to the Company's Legal Department. No financial information may be disclosed without the prior approval of the Chief Financial Officer.

(iv) COMPANY SPOKESPEOPLE. Specific policies have been established regarding who may communicate information to the press and the financial analyst community. All inquiries or calls from the press and financial analysts should be referred to the Chief Financial Officer or Investor Relations Department. The Company has designated its CEO, President, CFO and Investor Relations Department as official Company spokespeople for financial matters and these same persons plus the Director of Government Affairs (Stephen Tuttle) for marketing, technical and other such information. These designees are the only people who may communicate with the press on behalf of the Company.

F. OBLIGATIONS UNDER SECURITIES LAWS-"INSIDER" TRADING

Obligations under the U.S. securities laws apply to everyone. In the normal course of business, officers, directors, employees, agents, contractors and consultants of the Company may come into possession of significant, sensitive information. This information is the property of the Company -- you have been entrusted with it. You may not profit from it by buying or selling

Page 5

(TASER INTERNATIONAL LOGO)

securities yourself, or passing on the information to others to enable them to profit or for them to profit on your behalf. The purpose of this policy is both to inform you of your legal responsibilities and to make clear to you that the misuse of sensitive information is contrary to Company policy and U.S. securities laws.

Insider trading is a crime, penalized by fines of up to $5,000,000 and 20 years in jail for individuals. In addition, the SEC may seek the imposition of a civil penalty of up to three times the profits made or losses avoided from the trading. Insider traders must also disgorge any profits made, and are often subjected to an injunction against future violations. Finally, insider traders may be subjected to civil liability in private lawsuits.

Employers and other controlling persons (including supervisory personnel) are also at risk under U.S. securities laws. Controlling persons may, among other things, face penalties of the greater of $5,000,000 or three times the profits made or losses avoided by the trader if they recklessly fail to take preventive steps to control insider trading.

Thus, it is important both to you and the Company that insider-trading violations not occur. You should be aware that stock market surveillance techniques are becoming increasingly sophisticated, and the chance that U.S. federal or other regulatory authorities will detect and prosecute even small-level trading is significant. Insider trading rules are strictly enforced, even in instances when the financial transactions seem small. You should contact the Chief Financial Officer or the Legal Department if you are unsure as to whether or not you are free to trade.

The Company has imposed a trading blackout period on members of the Board of Directors, executive officers and certain designated employees who, as a consequence of their position with the Company, are more likely to be exposed to material nonpublic information about the Company. These directors, executive officers and employees generally may not trade in Company securities during the blackout period.

For more details, and to determine if you are restricted from trading during trading blackout periods, you should review the Company's Insider Trading Compliance Program. You can request a copy of this policy from the Legal Department. You should take a few minutes to read the Insider Trading Compliance Program carefully, paying particular attention to the specific policies and the potential criminal and civil liability and/or disciplinary action for insider trading violations. Employees, agents and contractors of the Company who violate this Policy are also be subject to disciplinary action by the Company, which may include termination of employment or of business relationship. All questions regarding the Company's Insider Trading Compliance Program should be directed to the Company's Chief Financial Officer.

G. PROHIBITION AGAINST SHORT SELLING OF COMPANY STOCK

No Company director, officer or other employee, agent or contractor may, directly or indirectly, sell any equity security, including derivatives, of the Company if he or she (1) does not own the security sold, or (2) if he or she owns the security, does not deliver it against such sale (a "short sale against the box") within twenty days thereafter, or does not within five days after such sale deposit it in the mails or other usual channels of transportation. No Company director, officer

Page 6

(TASER INTERNATIONAL LOGO)

or other employee, agent or contractor may engage in short sales. A short sale, as defined in this policy, means any transaction whereby one may benefit from a decline in the Company's stock price. While employees who are not executive officers or directors are not prohibited by law from engaging in short sales of Company's securities, the Company has adopted as policy that employees may not do so.

H. USE OF COMPANY'S ASSETS

(i) GENERAL. Protecting the Company's assets is a key fiduciary responsibility of every employee, agent and contractor. Care should be taken to ensure that assets are not misappropriated, loaned to others, or sold or donated, without appropriate authorization. All Company employees, agents and contractors are responsible for the proper use of Company assets, and must safeguard such assets against loss, damage, misuse or theft. Employees, agents or contractors who violate any aspect of this policy or who demonstrate poor judgment in the manner in which they use any Company asset may be subject to disciplinary action, up to and including termination of employment or business relationship at the Company's sole discretion. Company equipment and assets are to be used for Company business purposes only. Employees, agents and contractors may not use Company assets for personal use, nor may they allow any other person to use Company assets. Employees who have any questions regarding this policy should bring them to the attention of the Company's Human Resources Department.

(ii) PHYSICAL ACCESS CONTROL. The Company has and will continue to develop procedures covering physical access control to ensure privacy of communications, maintenance of the security of the Company communication equipment, and safeguard Company assets from theft, misuse and destruction. You are personally responsible for complying with the level of access control that has been implemented in the facility where you work on a permanent or temporary basis. You must not defeat or cause to be defeated the purpose for which the access control was implemented.

(iii) COMPANY FUNDS. Every Company employee is personally responsible for all Company funds over which he or she exercises control. Company agents and contractors should not be allowed to exercise control over Company funds. Company funds must be used only for Company business purposes. Every Company employee, agent and contractor must take reasonable steps to ensure that the Company receives good value for Company funds spent, and must maintain accurate and timely records of each and every expenditure. Expense reports must be accurate and submitted in a timely manner. Company employees, agents and contractors must not use Company funds for any personal purpose.

(iv) COMPUTERS AND OTHER EQUIPMENT. The Company strives to furnish employees with the equipment necessary to efficiently and effectively do their jobs. You must care for that equipment and to use it responsibly only for Company business purposes. If you use Company equipment at your home or off site, take precautions to protect it from theft or damage, just as if it were your own. If the Company no longer employs you, you must immediately return all Company equipment. While computers and other electronic devices are made accessible to employees to assist them to perform their jobs and to promote Company's interests, all such computers and electronic devices, whether used entirely or partially on the Company's premises or

Page 7

(TASER INTERNATIONAL LOGO)

with the aid of the Company's equipment or resources, must remain fully accessible to the Company and, to the maximum extent permitted by law, will remain the sole and exclusive property of the Company.

Employees, agents and contractors should not maintain any expectation of privacy with respect to information transmitted over, received by, or stored in any electronic communications device owned, leased, or operated in whole or in part by or on behalf of the Company. To the extent permitted by applicable law, the Company retains the right to gain access to any information received by, transmitted by, or stored in any such electronic communications device, by and through its employees, agents, contractors, or representatives, at any time, either with or without an employee's or third party's knowledge, consent or approval.

(v) SOFTWARE. All software used by employees to conduct Company business must be appropriately licensed. Never make or use illegal or unauthorized copies of any software, whether in the office, at home, or on the road, since doing so may constitute copyright infringement and may expose you and the Company to potential civil and criminal liability. In addition, use of illegal or unauthorized copies of software may subject the employee to disciplinary action, up to and including termination. The Company's IT Department will inspect Company computers periodically to verify that only approved and licensed software has been installed. Any non-licensed/supported software will be removed.

(vi) ELECTRONIC USAGE. The purpose of this policy is to make certain that employees utilize electronic communication devices in a legal, ethical, and appropriate manner. This policy addresses the Company's responsibilities and concerns regarding the fair and proper use of all electronic communications devices within the organization, including computers, e-mail, connections to the Internet, intranet and extranet and any other public or private networks, voice mail, video conferencing, facsimiles, and telephones. Posting or discussing information concerning the Company's products or business on the Internet without the prior written consent of the Company's CFO is prohibited. Any other form of electronic communication used by employees currently or in the future is also intended to be encompassed under this policy. It is not possible to identify every standard and rule applicable to the use of electronic communications devices. Employees are therefore encouraged to use sound judgment whenever using any feature of our communications systems.

I. MAINTAINING AND MANAGING RECORDS

The purpose of this policy is to set forth and convey the Company's business and legal requirements in managing records, including all recorded information regardless of medium or characteristics. Records include paper documents, CDs, computer hard disks, email, floppy disks, microfiche, microfilm or all other media. The Company is required by local, state, federal, foreign and other applicable laws, rules and regulations to retain certain records and to follow specific guidelines in managing its records. Civil and criminal penalties for failure to comply with such guidelines can be severe for employees, agents, contractors and the Company, and failure to comply with such guidelines may subject the employee, agent or contractor to disciplinary action, up to and including termination of employment or business relationship at the Company's sole discretion.

Page 8

(TASER INTERNATIONAL LOGO)

J. RECORDS ON LEGAL HOLD.

A legal hold suspends all document destruction procedures in order to preserve appropriate records under special circumstances, such as litigation or government investigations. The Company's Legal Department determines and identifies what types of Company records or documents are required to be placed under a legal hold. Every Company employee, agent and contractor must comply with this policy. Failure to comply with this policy may subject the employee, agent or contractor to disciplinary action, up to and including termination of employment or business relationship at the Company's sole discretion.

The Company's Legal Department will notify you if a legal hold is placed on records for which you are responsible. You then must preserve and protect the necessary records in accordance with instructions from the Company's Legal Department. RECORDS OR SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS THAT HAVE BEEN PLACED UNDER A LEGAL HOLD MUST NOT BE DESTROYED, ALTERED OR MODIFIED UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES. A legal hold remains effective until it is officially released in writing by the Company's Legal Department. If you are unsure whether a document has been placed under a legal hold, you should preserve and protect that document while you check with the Company's Legal Department.

If you have any questions about this policy you should contact the Company's Legal Department.

K. PAYMENT PRACTICES

(i) ACCOUNTING PRACTICES. The Company's responsibilities to its stockholders and the investing public require that all transactions be fully and accurately recorded in the Company's books and records in compliance with all applicable laws. False or misleading entries, unrecorded funds or assets, or payments without appropriate supporting documentation and approval are strictly prohibited and violate Company policy and the law. Additionally, all documentation supporting a transaction should fully and accurately describe the nature of the transaction and be processed in a timely fashion.

(ii) POLITICAL CONTRIBUTIONS. The Company reserves the right to communicate its position on important issues to elected representatives and other government officials. It is the Company's policy to comply fully with all local, state, federal, foreign and other applicable laws, rules and regulations regarding political contributions. The Company's funds or assets must not be used for, or be contributed to, political campaigns or political practices under any circumstances without the prior written approval of the Company's Legal Department and, if required, the Board of Directors.

(iii) PROHIBITION OF INDUCEMENTS. Under no circumstances may employees, agents or contractors offer to pay, make payment, promise to pay, or issue authorization to pay any money, gift, or anything of value to customers, vendors, consultants, etc. that is perceived as intended, directly or indirectly, to improperly influence any business decision, any act or failure to act, any commitment of fraud, or opportunity for the commission of any fraud. Inexpensive gifts, infrequent business meals, celebratory events and entertainment, provided that they are not excessive

Page 9

(TASER INTERNATIONAL LOGO)

or create an appearance of impropriety, do not violate this policy. Questions regarding whether a particular payment or gift violates this policy should be directed to Human Resources or the Legal Department.

L. FOREIGN CORRUPT PRACTICES ACT.

The Company requires full compliance with the Foreign Corrupt Practices Act (FCPA) by all of its employees, agents, and contractors.

The anti-bribery and corrupt payment provisions of the FCPA make illegal any corrupt offer, payment, promise to pay, or authorization to pay any money, gift, or anything of value to any foreign official, or any foreign political party, candidate or official, for the purpose of: influencing any act or failure to act, in the official capacity of that foreign official or party; or inducing the foreign official or party to use influence to affect a decision of a foreign government or agency, in order to obtain or retain business for anyone, or direct business to anyone.

All Company employees, agents and contractors whether located in the United States or abroad, are responsible for FCPA compliance and the procedures to ensure FCPA compliance. All managers and supervisory personnel are expected to monitor continued compliance with the FCPA to ensure compliance with the highest moral, ethical and professional standards of the Company. FCPA compliance includes the Company's policy on Maintaining and Managing Records in
Section III.I of this Code of Business Conduct and Ethics.

Laws in most countries outside of the United States also prohibit or restrict government officials or employees of government agencies from receiving payments, entertainment, or gifts for the purpose of winning or keeping business. No contract or agreement may be made with any business in which a government official or employee holds a significant interest, without the prior approval of the Company's General Counsel.

M. EXPORT CONTROLS

The United States maintain controls on the destinations to which products or technical data may be exported. Some of the strictest export controls are maintained by the United States against countries that the U.S. government considers unfriendly or as supporting international terrorism. The U.S. regulations are complex and apply both to exports from the United States and to exports of products from other countries, when those products contain U.S.-origin components or technology. In some circumstances, an oral presentation containing technical data made to foreign nationals in the United States may constitute a controlled export. The Legal Department can provide you with guidance on which countries are prohibited destinations for Company products or whether a proposed technical presentation to foreign nationals may require a U.S. Government license.

IV. RESPONSIBILITIES TO OUR CUSTOMERS AND OUR SUPPLIERS

A. CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIPS

If your job puts you in contact with any Company customers or potential customers, it is critical for you to remember that you represent the Company to the people with whom you are

Page 10

(TASER INTERNATIONAL LOGO)

dealing. Act in a manner that creates value for our customers and helps to build a relationship based upon trust. The Company and its employees have provided products and services for many years and have built up significant goodwill over that time. This goodwill is one of our most important assets, and the Company employees, agents and contractors must act to preserve and enhance our reputation.

B. PAYMENTS OR GIFTS FROM OTHERS

Under no circumstances may employees, agents or contractors accept any offer, payment, promise to pay, or authorization to pay any money, gift, or anything of value from customers, vendors, consultants, etc. that is perceived as intended, directly or indirectly, to influence any business decision, any act or failure to act, any commitment of fraud, or opportunity for the commission of any fraud. Inexpensive gifts, infrequent business meals, celebratory events and entertainment, provided that they are not excessive or create an appearance of impropriety, do not violate this policy. Questions regarding whether a particular payment or gift violates this policy are to be directed to Human Resources or the Legal Department.

Gifts given by the Company to suppliers or customers or received from suppliers or customers should always be appropriate to the circumstances and should never be of a kind that could create an appearance of impropriety. The nature and cost must always be accurately recorded in the Company's books and records.

C. PUBLICATIONS OF OTHERS

The Company subscribes to many publications that help employees do their jobs better. These include newsletters, reference works, online reference services, magazines, books, and other digital and printed works. Copyright law generally protects these works, and their unauthorized copying and distribution constitute copyright infringement. You must first obtain the consent of the publisher of a publication before copying publications or significant parts of them. When in doubt about whether you may copy a publication, consult the Legal Department.

D. HANDLING THE CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF OTHERS

The Company has many kinds of business relationships with many companies and individuals. Sometimes, they will volunteer confidential information about their products or business plans to induce the Company to enter into a business relationship. At other times, we may request that a third party provide confidential information to permit the Company to evaluate a potential business relationship with that party. Whatever the situation, we must take special care to handle the confidential information of others responsibly. We handle such confidential information in accordance with our agreements with such third parties. See also the Company's policy on Maintaining and Managing Records in Section III.I of this Code of Business Conduct and Ethics.

(i) APPROPRIATE NONDISCLOSURE AGREEMENTS. Confidential information may take many forms. An oral presentation about a company's product development plans may contain protected trade secrets. A customer list or employee list may be a protected trade secret. A

Page 11

(TASER INTERNATIONAL LOGO)

demo of an alpha version of a company's new product may contain information protected by trade secret and copyright laws.

You should never accept information offered by a third party that is represented as confidential, or which appears from the context or circumstances to be confidential, unless an appropriate nondisclosure agreement has been signed with the party offering the information. THE LEGAL DEPARTMENT CAN PROVIDE NONDISCLOSURE AGREEMENTS TO FIT ANY PARTICULAR SITUATION, AND WILL COORDINATE APPROPRIATE EXECUTION OF SUCH AGREEMENTS ON BEHALF OF THE COMPANY. Even after a nondisclosure agreement is in place, you should accept only the information necessary to accomplish the purpose of receiving it, such as a decision on whether to proceed to negotiate a deal. If more detailed or extensive confidential information is offered and it is not necessary, for your immediate purposes, it should be refused.

(ii) NEED-TO-KNOW. Once a third party's confidential information has been disclosed to the Company, we have an obligation to abide by the terms of the relevant nondisclosure agreement and limit its use to the specific purpose for which it was disclosed and to disseminate it only to other Company employees with a need to know the information. Every employee, agent and contractor involved in a potential business relationship with a third party must understand and strictly observe the restrictions on the use and handling of confidential information. When in doubt, consult the Legal Department.

(iii) NOTES AND REPORTS. When reviewing the confidential information of a third party under a nondisclosure agreement, it is natural to take notes or prepare reports summarizing the results of the review and, based partly on those notes or reports, to draw conclusions about the suitability of a business relationship. Notes or reports, however, can include confidential information disclosed by the other party and so should be retained only long enough to complete the evaluation of the potential business relationship. Subsequently, they should be either destroyed or turned over to the Legal Department for safekeeping or destruction. They should be treated just as any other disclosure of confidential information is treated: marked as confidential and distributed only to those the Company employees with a need to know.

(iv) COMPETITIVE INFORMATION. You should never attempt to obtain a competitor's confidential information by improper means, and you should especially never contact a competitor regarding their confidential information. While the Company may, and does, employ former employees of competitors, we recognize and respect the obligations of those employees not to use or disclose the confidential information of their former employers.

E. SELECTING SUPPLIERS

The Company's suppliers make significant contributions to our success. To create an environment where our suppliers have an incentive to work with the Company, they must be confident that they will be treated lawfully and in an ethical manner. The Company's policy is to purchase supplies based on need, quality, service, price and terms and conditions. The Company's policy is to select significant suppliers or enter into significant supplier agreements though a competitive bid process where possible. Under no circumstances should any Company employee,

Page 12

(TASER INTERNATIONAL LOGO)

agent or contractor attempt to coerce suppliers in any way. The confidential information of a supplier is entitled to the same protection as that of any other third party and must not be received before an appropriate nondisclosure agreement has been signed. In some cases where the products or services have been designed, fabricated, or developed to our specifications the agreement between the parties may contain restrictions on sales.

F. GOVERNMENT RELATIONS

It is the Company's policy to comply fully with all applicable laws and regulations governing contact and dealings with government employees and public officials, and to adhere to high ethical, moral and legal standards of business conduct. This policy includes strict compliance with all local, state, federal, foreign and other applicable laws, rules and regulations. If you have any questions concerning government relations you should contact the Company's Legal Department.

G. LOBBYING

Employees, agents or contractors whose work requires lobbying communication with any member or employee of a legislative body or with any government official or employee in the formulation of legislation must have prior approval of such activity from the Company's Chief Executive Officer or President. Activity covered by this policy includes meetings with legislators or members of their staffs or with senior executive branch officials. Preparation, research, and other background activities that are done in support of lobbying communication are also covered by this policy even if the communication ultimately is not made.

H. GOVERNMENT CONTRACTS

It is the Company's policy to comply fully with all applicable laws and regulations that apply to government contracting. It is also necessary to strictly adhere to all terms and conditions of any contract with local, state, federal, foreign or other applicable governments. The Company's Legal Department must review and approve all contracts with any government entity.

I. FREE AND FAIR COMPETITION

Most countries have well-developed bodies of law designed to encourage and protect free and fair competition. The Company is committed to obeying both the letter and spirit of these laws. The consequences of not doing so can be severe for all of us.

These laws often regulate the Company's relationships with its distributors, resellers, dealers, and customers. Competition laws generally address the following areas: pricing practices (including price discrimination), discounting, terms of sale, credit terms, promotional allowances, secret rebates, exclusive dealerships or distributorships, product bundling, restrictions on carrying competing products, termination, and many other practices.

Competition laws also govern, usually quite strictly, relationships between the Company and its competitors. As a general rule, contacts with competitors should be limited and should always avoid subjects such as prices or other terms and conditions of sale, customers, and suppliers. Employees, agents or contractors of the Company may not knowingly make false or misleading

Page 13

(TASER INTERNATIONAL LOGO)

statements regarding its competitors or the products of its competitors, customers or suppliers. Participating with competitors in a trade association or in a standards creation body is acceptable when the association has been properly established, has a legitimate purpose, and has limited its activities to that purpose.

No employee, agent or contractor shall at any time or under any circumstances enter into an agreement or understanding, written or oral, express or implied, with any competitor concerning prices, discounts, other terms or conditions of sale, profits or profit margins, costs, allocation of product or geographic markets, allocation of customers, limitations on production, boycotts of customers or suppliers, or bids or the intent to bid or even discuss or exchange information on these subjects. In some cases, legitimate joint ventures with competitors may permit exceptions to these rules as may bona fide purchases from or sales to competitors on non-competitive products, but the Company's Legal Department must review all such proposed ventures in advance. These prohibitions are absolute and strict observance is required. Collusion among competitors is illegal, and the consequences of a violation are severe.

Although the spirit of these laws, known as "antitrust," "competition," or "consumer protection" or unfair competition laws, is straightforward, their application to particular situations can be quite complex. To ensure that the Company complies fully with these laws, each of us should have a basic knowledge of them and should involve our Legal Department early on when questionable situations arise.

J. INDUSTRIAL ESPIONAGE

It is the Company's policy to lawfully compete in the marketplace. This commitment to fairness includes respecting the rights of our competitors and abiding by all applicable laws in the course of competing. The purpose of this policy is to maintain the Company's reputation as a lawful competitor and to help ensure the integrity of the competitive marketplace. The Company expects its competitors to respect our rights to compete lawfully in the marketplace, and we must respect their rights equally. Company employees, agents and contractors may not steal or unlawfully use the information, material, products, intellectual property, or proprietary or confidential information of anyone including suppliers, customers, business partners or competitors.

V. WAIVERS

Any waiver of any provision of this Code of Business Conduct and Ethics for a member of the Company's Board of Directors or an executive officer must be approved in writing by the Company's Board of Directors and promptly disclosed. Any waiver of any provision of this Code of Business Conduct and Ethics with respect any other employee, agent or contractor must be approved in writing by the Company's Legal Department.

VI. DISCIPLINARY ACTIONS

The matters covered in this Code of Business Conduct and Ethics are of the utmost importance to the Company, its stockholders and its business partners, and are essential to the

Page 14

(TASER INTERNATIONAL LOGO)

Company's ability to conduct its business in accordance with its stated values. We expect all of our employees, agents, contractors and consultants to adhere to these rules in carrying out their duties for the Company The Company will take appropriate action against any employee, agent, contractor or consultant whose actions are found to violate these policies or any other policies of the Company. Disciplinary actions may include immediate termination of employment or business relationship at the Company's sole discretion. Where the Company has suffered a loss, it may pursue its remedies against the individuals or entities responsible. Where laws have been violated, the Company will cooperate fully with the appropriate authorities.

VII. ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF RECEIPT OF CODE OF BUSINESS CONDUCT AND ETHICS

I have received and read the Company's Code of Business Conduct and Ethics. I understand the standards and policies contained in the Company Code of Business Conduct and Ethics and understand that there may be additional policies or laws specific to my job. I further agree to comply with the Company Code of Business Conduct and Ethics.

If I have questions concerning the meaning or application of the Company Code of Business Conduct and Ethics, any Company policies, or the legal and regulatory requirements applicable to my job, I know I can consult my manager, the Human Resources Department or Legal Department, knowing that my questions or reports to these sources will be maintained in confidence.


Employee Name


Signature


Date

Please sign and return this form to the Human Resources Department.

Page 15

 

EXHIBIT 23.1
CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
We consent to the incorporation by reference in Registration Statement Nos. 333-89434 and 333-88386 of TASER International, Inc. on Forms S-8 and S-3, respectively, of our report dated March 30, 2005 appearing in this Annual Report on Form 10-KSB of TASER International, Inc. for the year ended December 31, 2004.
DELOITTE & TOUCHE LLP  
 
/s/ Deloitte & Touche LLP  
 
 
Phoenix, Arizona
March 31, 2005
 

EXHIBIT 31.1

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO
Rule 13A-14(A) or RULE 15D-14(A) of Chief Executive Officer

I, Patrick W. Smith, principal executive officer, certify that:

1.   I have reviewed this annual report on Form 10-KSB of TASER International, Inc.;
 
2.   Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;
 
3.   Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the small business issuer as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;
 
4.   The small business issuer’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) for the small business issuer and have:

  (a)   Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the small business issuer, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;
 
  (b)   Evaluated the effectiveness of the small business issuer’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and
 
  (c)   Disclosed in this report any change in the small business issuer’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the small business issuer’s most recent fiscal quarter (the small business issuer’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the small business issuer’s internal control over financial reporting;

5.   The small business issuer’s other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the small business issuer’s auditors and the audit committee of the small business issuer’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

  (a)   All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the small business issuer’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and
 
  (b)   Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the small business issuer’s internal control over financial reporting.

         
Date: March 31, 2005   By:   /s/ Patrick W. Smith

Patrick W. Smith
Chief Executive Officer

 

 

EXHIBIT 31.2

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO
Rule 13A-14(A) or RULE 15D-14(A) of Chief Financial Officer

I, Daniel M. Behrendt, principal financial officer, certify that:

1.   I have reviewed this annual report on Form 10-KSB of TASER International, Inc.;
 
2.   Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;
 
3.   Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the small business issuer as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;
 
4.   The small business issuer’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) for the small business issuer and have:

  (a)   Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the small business issuer, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;
 
  (b)   Evaluated the effectiveness of the small business issuer’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and
 
  (c)   Disclosed in this report any change in the small business issuer’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the small business issuer’s most recent fiscal quarter (the small business issuer’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the small business issuer’s internal control over financial reporting;

5.   The small business issuer’s other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the small business issuer’s auditors and the audit committee of the small business issuer’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

  (a)   All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the small business issuer’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and
 
  (b)   Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the small business issuer’s internal control over financial reporting.

         
Date: March 31, 2005   By:   /s/ Daniel M. Behrendt

Daniel M. Behrendt
Chief Financial Officer

 

 

EXHIBIT 32.1

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO
18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350
AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO
SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

In connection with the Annual Report of TASER International, Inc. (the “Company”) on Form 10-KSB for the year ending December 31, 2004 as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof (the “Report”), I, Patrick W. Smith, Chief Executive Officer of the Company, certify pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that:

  (1)   The Report fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and
 
  (2)   The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.

     
      /s/ Patrick W. Smith
Patrick W. Smith
Chief Executive Officer
March 31, 2005

 

 

EXHIBIT 32.2

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO
18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350
AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO
SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

In connection with the Annual Report of TASER International, Inc. (the “Company”) on Form 10-KSB for the year ending December 31, 2004 as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof (the “Report”), I, Daniel M. Behrendt, Chief Financial Officer of the Company, certify pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that:

  (1)   The Report fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and
 
  (2)   The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.

     
      /s/ Daniel M. Behrendt

Daniel M. Behrendt
Chief Financial Officer
March 31, 2005

 

 

EXHIBIT 99.1
CERTAIN FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN CONNECTION
WITH FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS
From time to time, TASER International, Inc. (“TASER” or the “Company”), through its management, may make forward-looking public statements with respect to the Company regarding, among other things, expected future revenues or earnings, projections, plans, future performance, product development and commercialization, and other estimates relating to the Company’s future operations. Forward-looking statements may be included in reports filed under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”), in press releases, other written statements, or in oral statements. The words or phrases “will likely result,” “are expected to,” “intends,” “is anticipated,” “estimates,” “believes,” “projects” or similar expressions are intended to identify “forward-looking statements” within the meaning of Section 21E of the Exchange Act and Section 27A of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, as enacted by the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995.
Forward-looking statements are subject to a number of risks and uncertainties. The Company cautions investors not to place undue reliance on its forward-looking statements, which speak only as of the date on which they are made. TASER’s actual results may differ materially from those described in the forward-looking statements as a result of various factors, including those listed below. The Company disclaims any obligation subsequently to revise or update forward-looking statements to reflect events or circumstances after the date of such statements or to reflect the occurrence of anticipated or unanticipated events.
Pursuant to the “safe harbor” provisions of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995, TASER hereby files the following cautionary statements identifying certain factors that could cause its actual results to differ materially from those described in its forward-looking statements.
WE ARE MATERIALLY DEPENDENT ON ACCEPTANCE OF OUR PRODUCTS BY THE LAW ENFORCEMENT AND CORRECTIONS MARKET, AND IF LAW ENFORCEMENT AND CORRECTIONS AGENCIES DO NOT PURCHASE OUR PRODUCTS, OUR REVENUES WILL BE ADVERSELY AFFECTED AND WE MAY NOT BE ABLE TO EXPAND INTO OTHER MARKETS.
A substantial number of law enforcement and corrections agencies may not purchase our conducted energy, non-lethal devices. In addition, if our products are not widely accepted by the law enforcement and corrections market, we may not be able to expand sales of our products into other markets. Law enforcement and corrections agencies may be influenced by claims or perceptions that conducted energy weapons are unsafe or may be used in an abusive manner. In addition, earlier generation conducted energy devices may have been perceived as ineffective. Sales of our products to these agencies may also be delayed or limited by these claims or perceptions.
WE SUBSTANTIALLY DEPEND ON SALES OF THE ADVANCED TASER PRODUCTS AND TASER X26 PRODUCTS, AND IF THESE PRODUCTS ARE NOT WIDELY ACCEPTED, OUR GROWTH PROSPECTS WILL BE DIMINISHED.
In 2004 and 2003, we derived our revenues predominantly from sales of the TASER brand devices and related cartridges, and expect to depend on sales of these products for the foreseeable future. A decrease in the prices of or demand for these products , or their failure to achieve broad market acceptance, would significantly harm our growth prospects, operating results and financial condition.
IF WE ARE UNABLE TO MANAGE OUR PROJECTED GROWTH, OUR GROWTH PROSPECTS MAY BE LIMITED AND OUR FUTURE PROFITABILITY MAY BE ADVERSELY AFFECTED.
We intend to expand our sales and marketing programs. Any significant expansion may strain our managerial, financial and other resources. If we are unable to manage our growth, our business, our operating results and financial condition could be adversely affected. We will need to continually improve our operations, financial and other internal systems to manage our growth effectively, and any failure to do so may lead to inefficiencies and redundancies, and result in reduced growth prospects and profitability.
WE MAY FACE PERSONAL INJURY, WRONGFUL DEATH AND OTHER LIABILITY CLAIMS THAT HARM OUR REPUTATION AND ADVERSELY AFFECT OUR SALES AND FINANCIAL CONDITION.
Our products are often used in aggressive confrontations that may result in serious, permanent bodily injury or death to those involved. Our products may cause or be associated with these injuries. A person injured in a confrontation or otherwise in connection with the use of our products may bring legal action against us to recover damages on the basis of theories including personal injury, wrongful death, negligent design, dangerous product or inadequate warning. We are currently subject to a number of such lawsuits. We may also be subject to lawsuits involving allegations of misuse of our products. If successful, personal injury, misuse and other claims could have a material adverse effect on our operating results and financial condition. Although we carry product liability insurance, significant litigation could also result in a diversion of management’s attention and resources, negative publicity and an award of monetary damages in excess of our insurance coverage. The outcome of any litigation is inherently uncertain and there can be no assurance that our existing or any future litigation will not have a material adverse effect on our revenues, our financial condition or financial results.
PENDING LITIGATION MAY SUBJECT US TO SIGNIFICANT LITIGATION COSTS, JUDGEMENTS IN EXCESS OF INSURANCE COVERAGE, AND DIVERT MANAGEMENT ATTENTION FROM OUR BUSINESS.
The Company is involved in several litigation matters relating to its products or the use of such products, as well as shareholder class actions and an informal inquiry by the Securities and Exchange Commission. Such matters could result in substantial costs to the Company and a likely diversion of our management’s attention, which could adversely affect our Company’s business, financial condition or operating results.
OUR FUTURE SUCCESS IS DEPENDENT ON OUR ABILITY TO EXPAND SALES THROUGH DISTRIBUTORS AND OUR INABILITY TO RECRUIT NEW DISTRIBUTORS WOULD NEGATIVELY AFFECT OUR SALES.
Our distribution strategy is to pursue sales through multiple channels with an emphasis on independent distributors. Our inability to recruit and retain police equipment distributors who can successfully sell our products would adversely affect our sales. In addition, our arrangements with our distributors are generally short-term. If we do not competitively price our products, meet the requirements of our distributors or end-users, provide adequate marketing support, or comply with the terms of our distribution arrangements, our distributors may fail to aggressively market our products or may terminate their relationships with us. These developments would likely have a material adverse effect on our sales. Our reliance on the sales of our products by others also makes it more difficult to predict our revenues, cash flow and operating results.
WE EXPEND SIGNIFICANT RESOURCES IN ANTICIPATION OF A SALE DUE TO OUR LENGTHY SALES CYCLE AND MAY RECEIVE NO REVENUE IN RETURN.
Generally, law enforcement and corrections agencies consider a wide range of issues before committing to purchase our products, including product benefits, training costs, the cost to use our products in addition to or in place of other non-lethal products, product reliability and budget constraints. The length of our sales cycle may range from a few weeks to as long as several years. Adverse publicity surrounding our products or the safety of such products has in the past and could in the future lengthen our sales cycle with customers. We may incur substantial selling costs and expend significant effort in connection with the evaluation of our products by potential customers before they place an order. If these potential customers do not purchase our products, we will have expended significant resources and received no revenue in return.


 

MOST OF OUR END-USERS ARE SUBJECT TO BUDGETARY AND POLITICAL CONSTRAINTS THAT MAY DELAY OR PREVENT SALES.
Most of our end-user customers are government agencies. These agencies often do not set their own budgets and therefore have little control over the amount of money they can spend. In addition, these agencies experience political pressure that may dictate the manner in which they spend money. As a result, even if an agency wants to acquire our products, it may be unable to purchase them due to budgetary or political constraints. Some government agency orders may also be canceled or substantially delayed due to budgetary, political or other scheduling delays which frequently occur in connection the acquisition of products by such agencies.
GOVERNMENT REGULATION OF OUR PRODUCTS MAY ADVERSELY AFFECT SALES.
Federal regulation of sales in the United States: Our devices are not firearms regulated by the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms and Explosives, but are consumer products regulated by the United States Consumer Product Safety Commission. Although there are currently no federal laws restricting sales of our devices in the United States, future federal regulation could adversely affect sales of our products.
Federal regulation of international sales: Our devices are controlled as a “crime control” product by the United States Department of Commerce, or DOC, for export directly from the United States. Consequently, we must obtain an export license from the DOC for the export of our devices from the United States other than to Canada. Our inability to obtain DOC export licenses on a timely basis for sales of our devices to the majority of our international customers could significantly and adversely affect our international sales.
State and local regulation: Our devices are controlled, restricted or their use prohibited by several state and local governments. Our devices are banned from private citizen sale or use in seven states: New York, New Jersey, Rhode Island, Michigan, Wisconsin, Massachusetts and Hawaii. Law enforcement use of our products is also prohibited in New Jersey, and Rhode Island. Some municipalities, including Omaha, Nebraska and Washington, D.C. also prohibit private citizen use of our products. Other jurisdictions may ban or restrict the sale of our products and our product sales may be significantly affected by additional state, county and city governmental regulation.
Foreign regulation. Certain foreign jurisdictions, including Japan, the United Kingdom, Australia, Italy and Hong Kong, prohibit the sale of conducted energy devices, limiting our international sales opportunities.
IF WE ARE UNABLE TO PROTECT OUR INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY, WE MAY LOSE A COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE OR INCUR SUBSTANTIAL LITIGATION COSTS TO PROTECT OUR RIGHTS.
Our future success depends in part upon our proprietary technology. Our protective measures, including patents, trademarks and trade secret laws, may prove inadequate to protect our proprietary rights. Our United States patent on the construction of the gas cylinder used to store the compress nitrogen in our cartridges expires in 2015. Our patent on the process by which compressed gases launch the probes in our cartridges expires in 2009. The scope of any patent to which we have or may obtain rights may not prevent others from developing and selling competing products. The validity and breadth of claims covered in technology patents involve complex legal and factual questions, and the resolution of such claims may be highly uncertain, lengthy and expensive. In addition, our patents may be held invalid upon challenge, others may claim rights in or ownership of our patents.
WE MAY BE SUBJECT TO INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY INFRINGEMENT CLAIMS, WHICH WILL CAUSE US TO INCUR LITIGATION COSTS AND DIVERT MANAGEMENT ATTENTION FROM OUR BUSINESS.
Any intellectual property infringement claims against us, with or without merit, could be costly and time-consuming to defend and divert our management’s attention from our business. If our products were found to infringe a third party’s proprietary rights, we could be required to enter into royalty or licensing agreements in order to be able to sell our products. Royalty and licensing agreements, if required, may not be available on terms acceptable to us or at all.
In early April 2001, a patent licensee sued us in the United District Court, Central District of California. The lawsuit alleges that certain technology used in the firing mechanism for our devices infringes upon a patent for which the licensee holds a license, and seeks injunctive relief and unspecified monetary damages. While the court awarded summary judgment in our favor, the plaintiff has filed a notice of appeal. An outcome that is adverse to us, costs associated with defending the lawsuit, and the diversion of management’s time and resources as a result of the claim could harm our business and our financial condition.
COMPETITION IN THE LAW ENFORCEMENT AND CORRECTIONS MARKET COULD REDUCE OUR SALES AND PREVENT US FROM ACHIEVING PROFITABILITY.
The law enforcement and corrections market is highly competitive. We face competition from numerous larger, better capitalized and more widely known companies that make other non-lethal devices and products. Increased competition may result in greater pricing pressure, lower gross margins and reduced sales. In this regard, we expect two different competitors to introduce new products in the first quarter of 2005. We are unable to predict the impact such products will have on our sales or our sales cycle, but existing or potential customers may evaluate such products which could lengthen our sales cycle and potentially reduce future sales.
DEFECTS IN OUR PRODUCTS COULD REDUCE DEMAND FOR OUR PRODUCTS AND RESULT IN A LOSS OF SALES, DELAY IN MARKET ACCEPTANCE AND INJURY TO OUR REPUTATION.
Complex components and assemblies used in our products may contain undetected defects that are subsequently discovered at any point in the life of the product. In 2002, we recalled a series of ADVANCED TASER devices due to a defective component. In connection with the recall, we incurred expenses of approximately $25,000. Defects in our products may result in a loss of sales, delay in market acceptance and injury to our reputation and increased warranty costs.
COMPONENT SHORTAGES COULD RESULT IN OUR INABILITY TO PRODUCE VOLUME TO ADEQUATELY SUSTAIN CUSTOMER DEMAND. THIS COULD RESULT IN A LOSS OF SALES, DELAY IN DELIVERIES AND INJURY TO OUR REPUTATION.
Single source components used in the manufacture of our products may become unavailable or discontinued. Delays caused by industry allocations, or obsolescence may take weeks or months to resolve. In some cases, part obsolescence may require a product re-design to ensure quality replacement circuits. These delays could cause significant delays in manufacturing and loss of sales, leading to adverse effects significantly impacting our financial condition or results of operations.
OUR REVENUES AND OPERATING RESULTS MAY FLUCTUATE UNEXPECTEDLY FROM QUARTER TO QUARTER, WHICH MAY CAUSE OUR STOCK PRICE TO DECLINE.
Our revenues and operating results have varied significantly in the past and may vary significantly in the future due to various factors, including, but not limited to: increased raw material expenses, changes in our operating expenses, market acceptance of our products and services, the outcome of any existing or future litigation, adverse publicity surrounding our products, the safety of our products, or the use of our products, the safety of our products, regulatory changes that may affect the marketability of our products, and budgetary cycles of municipal, state and federal law enforcement and corrections agencies. As a result of these other factors, we believe that period- to-period comparisons of our operating results may not be meaningful in the short term, and our performance in a particular period may not be indicative of our performance in any future period.
THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT AND OTHER RECENT AND PROPOSED CHANGES IN SECURITIES LAWS AND REGULATIONS MAY INCREASE OUR COSTS.
The Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 that became law in July 2002, as well as new rules subsequently implemented by the Securities and Exchange Commission and the Nasdaq Stock Market, have required, and will require, changes to some of our accounting and corporate governance practices, including a report on our internal controls as required by Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002. We expect these new rules and regulations to increase our accounting, legal and other costs, and to make some activities more difficult, time consuming and/or costly. In particular, complying with the internal control requirements of Sarbanes-Oxley Section 404 will result in increased internal efforts, significantly higher fees from our independent accounting firm and significantly higher fees from third party contractors. We also expect these new rules and regulations to make it more difficult and more expensive for us to obtain director and officer liability insurance, and we may be required to accept reduced coverage or incur substantially higher costs to obtain coverage. These new rules and regulations could also make it more difficult for us to attract and retain qualified executive officers and qualified members of our board of directors, particularly to serve on our audit committee.
WE MAY EXPERIENCE DIFFICULTIES AND INCREASED EXPENSES IN COMPLYING WITH SARBANES-OXLEY SECTION 404.
While we believe we currently have adequate internal control over financial reporting, we are required to evaluate our internal controls under Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 and any adverse results from such evaluation could result in a loss of investor confidence in our financial reports and have an adverse effect on our stock price.
Pursuant to Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, beginning with our Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ending December 31, 2005, we will be required to furnish a report by our management on our internal control over financial reporting. Such report will contain among other matters, an assessment of the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting as of the end of our fiscal year, including a statement as to whether or not our internal control over financial reporting is effective. This assessment must include disclosure of any material weaknesses in our internal control over financial reporting identified by management. Such report must also contain a statement that our auditors have issued an attestation report on management’s assessment of such internal controls. Public Company Oversight Board Auditing Standard No. 2 provides the professional standards and related performance guidance for auditors to attest to, and report on, management’s assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting under Section 404.
While we currently believe our internal control over financial reporting is effective, we are still performing the system and process documentation and evaluation needed to comply with Section 404, which is both costly and challenging. During this process, if our management identifies one or more material weaknesses in our internal control over financial reporting, we will be unable to assert such internal control is effective. If we are unable to assert that our internal control over financial reporting is effective as of December 31, 2005 (or if our auditors are unable to attest that our management’s report is fairly stated or they are unable to express an opinion on the effectiveness of our internal controls), we could lose investor confidence in the accuracy and completeness of our financial reports, which would have an adverse effect on our stock price.
While we currently anticipate being able to satisfy the requirements of Section 404 in a timely fashion, we cannot be certain as to the timing of completion of our evaluation, testing and any required remediation. If we are not able to comply with the requirements of Section 404 in a timely manner or if our auditors are not able to complete the procedures required by Auditing Standard No. 2 to support their attestation report, we could lose investor confidence in the accuracy and completeness of our financial reports, which would have an adverse effect on our stock price.
RECENT REGULATIONS RELATED TO EQUITY COMPENSATION WILL LIKELY RESULT IN SIGNIFICANTLY HIGHER EXPENSES AND COULD ADVERSELY AFFECT OUR ABILITY TO ATTRACT AND RETAIN KEY PERSONNEL.
Stock options are a fundamental component of our employee compensation packages. We believe that stock options directly motivate our employees to maximize long-term stockholder value and, through the use of vesting, encourage employees to remain with us. On October 13, 2004, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) concluded that Statement 123R, Share-Based Payment, which would require all companies to measure compensation cost for all share-based payments (including employee stock options) at fair value, would be effective for interim or annual periods beginning after June 15, 2004. Statement 123R will negatively impact our earnings. Recording a charge for employee stock options under SFAS No. 123 would have decreased our net income by $7.1 million in 2004. See Note 2 to our Financial Statements. In addition, new regulations implemented by The Nasdaq Stock Market requiring shareholder approval for all stock option plans as well as new regulations implemented by the NYSE prohibiting NYSE member organizations from giving a proxy to vote on equity-compensation plans unless the beneficial owner of the shares has given voting instructions could make it more difficult for us to grant options to employees in the future. To the extent that new regulations make it more difficult or expensive to grant options to employees, we may incur compensation costs, change our equity compensation strategy or find it difficult to attract, retain and motivate employees, each of which could materially and adversely affect our business.


 

OUR DEPENDENCE ON THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS FOR KEY COMPONENTS OF OUR DEVICES COULD DELAY SHIPMENT OF OUR PRODUCTS AND REDUCE OUR SALES.
We depend on certain domestic and foreign suppliers for the delivery of components used in the assembly of our products. Our reliance on third-party suppliers creates risks related to our potential inability to obtain an adequate supply of components or subassemblies and reduced control over pricing and timing of delivery of components and sub-assemblies. Specifically, we depend on suppliers of sub-assemblies, machined parts, injection molded plastic parts, printed circuit boards, custom wire fabrications and other miscellaneous customer parts for our products. We also do not have long-term agreements with any of our suppliers. Any interruption of supply for any material components of our products could significantly delay the shipment of our products and have a material adverse effect on our revenues, profitability and financial condition.
OUR DEPENDENCE ON FOREIGN SUPPLIERS FOR KEY COMPONENTS OF OUR PRODUCTS COULD DELAY SHIPMENT OF OUR FINISHED PRODUCTS AND REDUCE OUR SALES.
We depend of foreign suppliers for the delivery of components used in the assembly of our products. Due to changes imposed for imports of foreign products into the United States, as well as port closures and delays created by recent terrorist threats, we are exposed to risk of delays caused by freight carriers or customs clearance issues for our imported parts. Delays caused by our inability to obtain components for assembly could have a material adverse effect on our revenues, profitability and financial condition.
FOREIGN CURRENCY FLUCTUATIONS MAY EFFECT OUR COMPETITIVENESS AND SALES IN FOREIGN MARKETS.
The relative change in currency values creates fluctuations in product pricing for potential international customers. These changes in foreign end-user costs may result in lost orders and reduce the competitiveness of our products in certain foreign markets. These changes may also negatively affect the financial condition of some existing or potential foreign customers and reduce or eliminate their future orders of our products.
USE OF ESTIMATES MAY CAUSE ACTUAL FINANCIAL RESULTS TO DIFFER.
There can be no assurance that any liability that may ultimately result from the resolution of these matters either individually or in the aggregate will not be in excess of amounts provided by insurance coverage and will not have a material adverse effect on our business, operating results or financial condition.
The preparation of financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates.
WE FACE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH RAPID TECHNOLOGICAL CHANGE AND NEW COMPETING PRODUCTS.
The technology associated with non-lethal devices is receiving significant attention and is rapidly evolving. While we have patent protection in key areas of electro-muscular disruption technology, it is possible that new non-lethal technology may result in competing products that operate outside our patents and could present significant competition for our products.
OUR FUTURE SUCCESS IS DEPENDENT UPON OUR ABILITY TO RAMP MANUFACTURING PRODUCTION CAPACITY WHICH WILL BE ACCOMPLISHED IN PART BY THE IMPLEMENTATION OF CUSTOMIZED MANUFACTURING AUTOMATION EQUIPMENT.
One of our key challenges is to ramp our production capacity to meet sales demand, while maintaining product quality. Our primary strategies to accomplish this include increasing the physical size of our assembly facilities, the hiring of additional production staff, and the implementation of customized automation equipment. The Company has no previous experience in implementing automation equipment, and the investments made on this equipment may not yield the anticipated labor and material efficiencies. Our inability to meet the sales demand or effectively manage our expansion or our planned move to a larger facility could have a material adverse affect our revenues, profitability and financial condition.
WE DEPEND ON OUR ABILITY TO ATTRACT AND RETAIN OUR KEY MANAGEMENT AND TECHNICAL PERSONNEL.
Our success depends upon the continued service of our key management personnel. Our success also depends on our ability to continue to attract, retain and motivate qualified technical personnel. Although we have employment agreements with certain of our officers, the employment of such persons is “at-will” and either we or the employee can terminate the employment relationship at any time, subject to the applicable terms of the employments agreements. The competition for our key employees is intense. The loss of the service of one or more of our key personnel could harm our business.